K. D.

MALAVIYA NATIONAL OIL MUSEUM

AT GUWAHATI

CIVIL, ARCHITECTURAL & STRUCTURAL,

INCLUDING FINISHING, SITE DEVELOPMENT,
SANITATION & PLUMBING WORKS

VOLUME - II

SPECIFICATIONS

Architect
Pheroze Kudianavala Consultants Engrs. Pvt. Ltd.
Mackinnon Mackenzie Building,
2nd Floor, Ballard Estate,
Mumbai 400 001.

INDEX

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------SR. NO.

DESCRIPTION

PAGE NOS.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1.

SCOPE OF WORKS

SW-1

2.

CIVIL WORKS

CW -1 to CW-248

3.

SANITATION & PLUMBING WORKS

SPW-1 to SPW-38

SCOPE OF WORK
Entire work shall be carried out as per the specifications, drawings and instructions of
the Consultant and Engineer-in-Charge in best workman like manner. The tenderers
are advised to go through all the drawings to arrive at the estimated quantity of each
of the items listed herein or those items, which may not have been specifically listed
but are required to be executed as per intent of the drawing or for completion of the
buildings.

Site Development

Excavation and Earth Filling

Storm Water Drain
On site Sewerage and Water Supply Network
Compound wall and Gates
Road Work and Paving
Retaining Walls
Security Cabin
Septic Tank & Soak Pit

Museum Building

Pile foundation work.

Entire building work
Structural glazing and aluminium cladding, glass pyramid
Underground and overhead water tanks with pump house
Sanitation & Plumbing works.

1.

SITE

1.1

The site is situated at Jawahar Nagar, Guwahati, Assam.

1.2

INVESTIGATIONS
The OIL has done soil investigations through Architect / Consultant and the
data is available for inspection with OIL. However, the Bidders are advised to
either on this data or to make their own investigation / enquiries at their cost, as
deemed fit.

CIVIL WORKS

CW- 1

K. D. MALAVIYA NATIONAL OIL MUSEUM

INDEX

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------SR. NO.
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NOS.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(1)

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS

CW 2 - CW 6

(2)

SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS

CW 7 - CW 11

(3)

LIST OF APPROVED MATERIALS & SPECIALISED AGENCIES

CW 12 - CW 15

(4)

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
i.
ii.

EARTH WORK
CONCRETE & STEEL REINFORCEMENT STRUCTURAL,
STEEL, PILING WORK
iii. MASONRY WORK
iv. PLASTER WORK
v.
PAINTING & POLISHING
vi
FLOORING & WALL CLADDING
vii. WOOD WORK
viii. METAL WORK
ix. ALUMINIUM WINDOWS CURTAIN WALL, ALUMINIUM
CLADDING, DOORS, LOUVERS
x.
GLASS PYRAMID
xi. STAINLESS STEEL RAILINGS
xii. FALSE CEILING
xiii. WATERPROOFING TREATMENT
xiv. ROAD WORK

(5)

LIST OF DRAWINGS

CW 16 - CW 22
CW 23 - CW 67
CW 68 - CW 70
CW 71 - CW 72
CW 73 - CW 81
CW 82 - CW 93
CW 94 - CW 98
CW 99 - CW 101
CW 102 - CW 199
CW 200 - CW 213
CW 214 - CW 215
CW 216 - CW 223
CW 224 - CW 230
CW 231 - CW 245

CW 246 - CW 248

CW- 2

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS

1.

SETTING OUT

1.1

The Contractor shall carry out survey of the work area, at his own cost, setting
out the layout and fixing of alignment of the building in consultation with the
Engineer-in-Charge / Consultant & proceed further. Any discrepancy between
the architectural drawings and actual layout at site shall be brought to the
notice of the Engineer-in-charge/ Consultant. It shall be responsibility of the
Contractor to ensure correct setting out of alignment. Total station survey
instruments only shall be allowed to be used for layout, fixing boundaries,
centre lines, etc., along with theodolites. Nothing extra s hall be payable on this
account.

1.2

The Contractor shall establish, maintain and assume responsibility for grades,
lines, levels and benchmarks. He shall report any errors or inconsistencies
regarding grades, lines, levels, dimensions etc. to the Engineer-in-Charge
before commencing work. Commencement of work shall be regarded as the
Contractors acceptance of such grades, lines, levels, and dimensions and no
claim shall be entertained at a later date for any errors found.

1.3

If at any time, any error in this regard appears during the progress of the work,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense rectify such error, if so required, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge / Consultant. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account.

1.4

Though the site levels are indicated in the drawings the Contractor shall
ascertain and confirm by himself, the site levels with respect to benchmark
from the concerned authorities. The Contractor shall protect and maintain
temporary/permanent benchmarks at the site of work through out the execution
of work. These benchmarks shall be got checked by the Engineer-in-Charge /
Consultant or his authorized representatives. Nothing extra shall be payable on
this account.

1.5

The work at different stages shall be checked with reference to bench marks
maintained for the said purpose. The cost of carrying out lay outs at all stages
including marking of reference points, center lines of the building etc.
including construction/maintenance of said bench marks shall be deemed to be
included in quoted rate. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

1.6

The entire work upto the plinth level, as required for obtaining approval of the
plinth from the local authority, shall be completed by the Contractor at the
same time. The Contractor shall also extend all co-operation and liaison with
the local body for approval of plinth. Nothing extra shall be payable on this

CW- 3

account. Work above plinth shall be carried out only after obtaining approval
from the local body. No extension of time on this ground and also no claim
whatsoever on account of any delay in approval at plinth level by the local
body, if required, shall be entertained from the Contractor. Nothing extra shall
also be payable on this account.
1.7

The approval by the Engineer-in-Charge, of the setting out of the alignment of

the building, by the Contractor, shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities and obligation to rectify the errors/ defects, if any, which may
be found at any stage during the progress of the work or after the completion of
the work.

1.8

The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal,
vertical and other alignments, the level and correctness of every part of the
work and shall rectify effectively any errors or imperfections therein. Such
rectifications shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.9

The rates quoted by the Contractor are deemed to be inclusive of site clearance,
dewatering, removal of slush from PCC etc. setting out work, profile,
establishment of reference bench mark(s), taking spot levels, construction of all
safety and protection devices, barriers, providing and constructing temporary
ramp from the ground level for accessing the site at PCC level for execution of
work and other preparatory works, working during monsoon, working at all
depths, height and location etc. and any other incidental works required to
complete this work. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING OF MATERIALS

All the material to be used in the work shall bear ISI certification mark. In case
ISI mark materials or the materials mentioned in the tender documents are not
available, the material to be used shall conform to CPWD specifications
applicable to this tender and / or national / international codes as approved by
Engineer-in-Charge. In such cases, the Engineer-in-charge shall satisfy
himself about the quality of such materials and give his approval in writing.
Only articles classified as first quality by the manufacturers / suppliers shall be
used in the work. All materials not having ISI mark, if allowed to be used in
the work by Engineer-in-Charge, shall be tested as per relevant specifications,
as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. In all cases of use of ISI marked
materials, proper proof of procurement of materials from authentic
manufacturers shall be provided by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of
Engineer in charge.

CW- 4

The Contractor shall procure and provide all the materials from the
manufacturers / suppliers as per the list attached with the tender documents, as
per the item description and particular specifications for the work. The
equivalent brand for any item shall be permitted to be used in the work, only
when the specified make is not available. This is, however, subject to
documentary evidence produced by the Contractor for non-availability of the
brand specified and also subject to independent verification by the Engineer-inCharge. In such cases, of deviation in specification or material, the matter
should be referred to Engineer-In-Charge for final decision. No claim,
whatsoever, of any kind shall be entertained from the Contractor on this
account. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account. Also, the material
shall be procured only after the written approval of Engineer-in-Charge

QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING OF MATERIALS:

4.1

The Contractor shall submit, immediately after the award of work, a detailed
and complete method statement for the execution, testing and Quality
Assurance, of such items of works, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All
the materials to be used in the work shall comply with the requirements of the
specifications and shall pass all the tests required as per specifications as
applicable. However, keeping the Quality Assurance in mind, the Contractor
shall submit, on request from the Engineer-in-Charge, his own Quality
Assurance procedures for basic materials and such items, to be followed during
the execution of the work, for approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

4.2

The tests, as necessary, shall be conducted in the laboratory approved by the

Engineer in Charge. The samples shall be taken for carrying out all or any
of the tests stipulated in the contract specifications and as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representatives.

4.3

The Contractor shall at his own risk and cost make all arrangements and shall
provide all such facilities, the Engineer-in-Charge may require for collecting,
preparing, packing and forwarding the required number of samples for testing
at an approved laboratory, as per the frequency of test stipulated in the contract
specifications or as considered necessary by the Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing
extra shall be payable for the above.

4.4

The Contractor or his authorized representative shall associate in collection,

preparation, packing, forwarding and testing of such samples. Even if, he or his
authorized representative is not present or does not associate himself, the result
of such tests and consequences thereon shall be binding on the Contractor .The
Contractor or his authorized representative shall remain in contact with the
Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative associated for all such
operations. No claim of payment or claim of any other ki nd, whatsoever, shall
be entertained from the Contractor.

CW- 5

4.5

The Contractor at his own expense shall supply all materials, Labour for
preparing, packing and testing samples as required by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The testing shall be carried out in the presence of the representative of the
Engineer- in- Charge, if so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

4.6

The testing charges shall be borne by the contractor unless otherwise specified
in the particular specifications for the respective items of the contract
agreement.

4.7

The Contractor shall at all reasonable times provide access to the Engineer-inCharge or his authorized representative to the workshops, factories or other
places where materials are stored, for inspection and/or collection of samples.
Nothing extra s hall be payable on this account.

4.8

The Contractor shall also submit on request from the Engineer-in-Charge name
of specialized agencies for execution of such items, details of brand and
manufacture and source of various materials procured by him for the wo rk, if
required by the Engineer-in-Charge.

5.

Materials (required for the work) procured by the Contractor shall be stored by
the Contractor only at places, in standard profiles and in the manner, as per the
manufactures specifications and as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Storage and safe custody of all materials shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.

6.

STORAGE OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall construct suitable godowns / sheds as per specifications
for storing the materials safely, against damage due to sun, rain, dampness,
fire, theft etc. He shall also employ necessary watch and ward for the purpose.

7.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor shall make available, on request from the Department, the
copies of challan, cash memos, receipts and other certificates, if any, vouchers
towards the quantity and quality of various materials procured for the work and
the same shall be kept in record. The Contractor shall also provide information
and necessary documentation on the name of the manufacturer, manufacturers
product identification, manufacturers instructions, warning, date of
manufacturing and test certificates (from manufacturers for the product for
each consignment delivered at site), shelf life, if any etc., for the department to
ensure that the material have been procured from the approved source and is of
the approved quality, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Wherever
specified, day-to-day account of receipt of such material shall be maintained at
site of work.

CW- 6

All the finishing items of work require superior workmanship. Therefore the
Contractor shall deploy / engage skilled and experienced labour and workmen
having experience in executing similar class of works. For assessment by the
department of their quality of workmanship, the Contractor shall, before start
of such items, submit to the department, the details of the workmen being
engaged by him along with the details of projects, executed, where they have
executed similar work. The Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized
representatives shall, if required, physically inspect those works to ascertain
the quality of workmanship. The Contractor shall arrange for such visits by
seeking required permissions from the client / occupant, besides arranging a
meeting with the clients / occupants representative, if so required by the
Department. No claim of any kind or any claim of hindrance shall be
entertained from the Contractor on this account. Thereafter, the Contractor
shall prepare finished sample / mock up of each such item as directed by the
Engineer-inCharge, for approval of workmanship and the material used. The
Contractor shall start mass work only after approval of the sample / mock up
by the Engineer-in -Charge. The sample or the mock-up shall not be
dismantled / removed wi thout the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Unless
otherwise specified, the sample / mock-up shall not form part of the actual
work and the cost of sample / mock up is deemed to be included in the cost of
the relevant items. In such cases, it shall be dismantled by the Contractor and
removed from the site at his own cost, with the approval and direction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.

CW- 7

SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIALS

a)

CEMENT
As specified in the Concrete Specifications.

b)

LIME
Lime shall comply in every respect with the requirement of IS:712 and shall be
made from approved Lime stone or Kankar and properly burnt. It shall be free
from excess of unburnt kankar or lime stone ashes or other extraneous
materials and shall be stored in weather-proof sheds. Lime which has been
damaged by rain, moisture or air slaking shall not be used but shall be removed
from the site of work forthwith. Lime shall be slaked with fresh water and
screened through appropriate screens and stored and used within 14 days
provided it is protected from drying. Field tests according to IS:1624 shall be
carried out from time to time to determine the quality of lime.

c)

FINE AGGREGATE:
Only river sand, as specified in the Concrete Specifications.

d)

COARSE AGGREGATE :
As specified in the Specifications for R.C.C. works.

e)

REINFORCEMENT :
As specified in the Specifications for R.C.C. works.

f)

BRICKS: Bricks shall generally comply with IS:1077 except in size which
shall be conforming to the sizes locally available. Depending upon the quality
of bricks they shall be classified as 1st and 2nd class.
1st class bricks shall be the best quality locally available, well-burnt but not
over-burnt, have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp right
angled edges, have a fine, compact and uniform texture. The bricks shall be
free from cracks, chips, flaws, stones or lumps of any kind and shall not show
efflorescence either when dry or subsequent to soaking in water. It shall emit a
clear ringing sound on being struck and shall not absorb water more than 20%
by weight. Common building bricks shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 50 Kg./sq.cm. unless otherwise specifically stated in the schedule of
quantities.

CW- 8

2nd class bricks shall be generally as specified above, except that they may be
slightly over-burnt, be slightly distorted and have round edges. They shall not
absorb water more than 22% by weight. The compressive strength shall be
10% less than that specified for 1st class bricks.
g)

CONCRETE BLOCKS:
Machine pressed 50 kg/cm2 strength solid concrete blocks of appropriate grade
shall be used. Blocks shall be continuously cured for at least 07 to 10 days.
Continuous curing can be achieved by covering blocks with Hessian cloth.
W/C cement ratio shall be controlled strictly to avoid distortion in shape and
shrinkage of blocks. After continuous curing of 07 to 10 days, blocks shall be
left to dry for atleast one month. Once the blocks are dried they can be used for
masonry work.

h)

NEERU :
Neeru shall be made of class C lime (i.e. pure fat lime) as mentioned in
IS:712. It shall be slaked with fresh water and then shifted and reduced to a
thick paste by grinding in a mill. Neeru thus prepared shall be kept moist until
used and no more than what can be consumed in 15 days shall be prepared at a
time.

i)

WATER :
Water for mixing Cement / Lime / Surkhi mortar or concrete shall not be salty
or brackish and shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from objectionable
quantities of silt and traces of oil, acid and injurious alkali, salts, organic matter
and other deterious material which will either weaken the mortar or concrete or
cause efflorescence or attack the steel in reinforced cement concrete. Water
shall be obtained from source approved by the Consultant. Potable water is
generally considered satisfactory for mixing and curing concrete, mortar,
masonry etc. Where water from other source is used this shall be tested in an
approved testing laboratory to establish its suitability. All charges connected
therewith shall be borne by the Contractors.

j)

TIMBER:
Timber shall be well seasoned and of the best quality. Indian teak of specified
species viz., Dandeli, Balarshah, Malabar, C.P. etc.
Timber shall be considered as well seasoned, if its moisture content does not
exceed the following limits:
i)
ii)

Timber for frames

Timber for planking, shutters etc.

14%
12%

CW- 9

The moisture content of timber shall be determined according to method

described in paragraph 4 of IS:287 for Maximum permissible moisture
content of Timber used for different purposes in different climatic zones.
k)

I ST CLASS INDIAN TEAK WOOD:

1st class teak wood means C.P. and Balarshah teak of good quality and well
seasoned. It shall have uniform colour, reasonably straight grains and shall be
free from large, loose, dead knots, cracks, shakes, warp, twists, bends,
sapwood or defects of any kind. No individual hard and sound knot shall be
more than 2.5 cm in diameter and aggregate area of all knots shall not exceed
1% of the area of the piece. There shall not be less than 5 growth rings per 2.5
cm width.

l)

II ND CLASS INDIAN TEAK WOOD :

IInd class Indian Teak wood shall be similar to 1st Class Indian Teak wood
except that knot upto 4 cms diameter and aggregate area of all knots upto 1
1/2% of the area of the piece shall be al lowed. There shall not be less than 4
growth rings per 2.5 cm width.

m)

FLUSH DOORS :
All flush doors shall be solid core exterior grade unless otherwise specified and
it shall generally conform to IS:2202 (Pt. I & II) and shall be fabricated as
described under specification.

n)

STEEL DOORS :
Steel doors shall be fabricated out of steel sections conforming to IS:226. They
shall conform to IS:1038 (latest). Unless otherwise specified the details of
construction etc. shall be as described under drawings and Specification.

o)

GLAZED TILES:
White or coloured glazed tiles shall comply with IS:777. They shall be only 1st
quality and from an approved manufacturer and shall be flat and true to shape. They
shall be free from cracks, crazing, spots, chip ping edges and corners. The glazing and
colour shall be of uniform shade and unless otherwise specified the tile shall be
minimum 6 mm thick or more as per manufacturers standard.

p)

MARBLE:
Marble slabs for flooring, dado, veneering etc. shall be of the kind specified in
the item such as white or pink, Makrana, Chittor black, Bhanslana black,
Jaisalmeer yellow, Baroda Green, Patiala (Pepsu) grey Italian Marble etc.
Marble from which the slabs are made shall be of selected quality, hard, sound,

CW- 10

dense and homogeneous in texture free, from cracks, decay weathering and
flaws. Before starting the work the Contractor shall get the sample of marble
slabs approved by the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be machine cut and machine polished.
q)

KOTAH / CUDDAPPA / GRANITE :

Kotah / Cuddappa / Granite shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and
homogeneous texture, free from cracks, decay weathering and flaws. Stone
slabs shall be of uniform colour and as approved by the Consultant. They shall
be machine cut and machine polished where specified and shall conform to the
required sizes. Thickness shall be as specified in the respective items.

r)

GLAZING :
Glass used for glazing shall be sheet glass of best approved quality, free from
flaws, specks, bubbles and shall be as specified.
The following types of glasses shall be used unless otherwise specified:
1.

Patterned or translucent glass and sheet glass / bevelled glass shall be

approved by the Consultant.

2.

The putty used for glazing metal door, window or ventilator shall be of
quality approved by the Engineer.

3.

All glazing rebates shall be square, plumb, true in plane, clear, dry and
free of dust.

4.

The frames shall be adjusted before glazing. The weight of the glass in a
side hung casement causes it to drop slight ly on its hinges. Hence,
before glazing, the frame shall be set in slightly higher position in its
frame.

5.

Glass edges shall be clean and cut to the exact size. Glass with chipped
or damaged edges shall be rejected.

6.

Slashes shall be glazed in the closed position and shall not be opened till
the putty is set.

The glass shall be set in teak wood beading or metal glazing clips and so
installed as to achieve proper watertightness.

CW- 11

s)

PAINTS :
Lime for lime wash, dry distemper, oil-bound distemper, cement primer, oil
paint, enamel paint, flat oil paint, plastic emulsion paint, anti-corrosive primer,
red lead, water-proof cement paint etc. shall be from approved manufacturers
and shall conform to the latest Indian Standards for various paints. Ready
mixed paints as received from the manufacturer without any admixture shall be
used, except for addition of thinner, if recommended by the manufacturer.

t)

MORTARS:
Cement Mortar:
Cement mortar shall be of proportions specified for each type of work in the
Schedule. It shall be composed of Portland cement and sand. The ingredients
shall be accurately gauged by measure and shall be well and evenly mixed
together in a mechanical pan mixer, care being taken not to add more water
than is required. No mortar that has begun to set shall be used. River sand shall
be used unless otherwise specified.
If hand mixing is allowed, then it shall be done on pucca water-proof platform.
The gauged materials shall be put on the plat form and mixed dry. Water will
then be added and the whole mixed again until it is homogeneous and of
uniform colour. Not more than one bag of cement shall be mixed at one time
and which can be consumed within half an hour of its mixing.

CW- 12

LIST OF APPROVED MATERIALS & SPECIALISTS

NOTE :
1)

The Contractor should obtained prior approval from `Engineer-in-Charge /

Consultant before placing order for any specific material / Agencies. The
Contractor shall make a detailed submittal with catalogues and highlighted
proposed specifications as well as full details of specialised works.

2)

The Engineer-in-Charge may approve any equivalent material subject to proof

being offered by contractor for equivalence to the satisfaction of the Engineerin-Charge / Consultant.

3)

The tender shall indicate the make of material out of approved list indicated. If
not, the choice of make of material to be put to work will rest with the
Engineer-In-Charge.

A.

1.

CEMENT

ULTRA-TECH, BIRLA PLUS, AMBUJA, A.C.C.

2.

WHITE CEMENT

J.K., BIRLA

3.

READY MIX CONCRETE

A.C.C., L&T, READYMIX,

UNITECH.

4.

REINFORCEMENT

`TISCO, `SAIL

5.

STRUCTURAL STEEL

`TISCO, SAIL

6.

STAINLESS STEEL

SALEM STEEL, SAIL

7.

WHITE/COLOURED
GLAZED TILES

H. & R. JOHNSON, PEDDER,

SOMANI, KAJARIA

8.

CERAMIC TILES

REGENCY, KAJARIA, BELL

CERAMIC, NITCO

9.

VITRIFIED CERAMIC TILES-

JOHNSON MARBONITE,
RESTILE, BELL, NAVEEN, NITCO

10.

GLASS MOSAIC TILES

ITALIA, MRIDUL, OPIO MOSAICA

11.

SUPER PLASTICISERS

MCBAUCHRMIE, ROFFE, FOSROC

12.

WATER PROOFING
COMPOUND

`CICO NO. 1, `IMPERMO,

`ACCOPROOF.

CW- 13

13.

HARDENERS

`IRONITE, `FT HARDONATE

14.

CONCRETE BLOCKS

GURJARI, CONWOOD, HINDUSTAN

15.

FLUSH DOORS & PLYWOODPRODUCTS INCLUDING

TEAK PARTICLE BOARDS

KITPLY, NATIONAL, INDIAN

PLYWOOD, SITAPUR PLYWOODS,
KUTTY, ANAND

16.

PRESSED METAL DOORS

SHAKTI MET-DOR, AGEW,

17.

ROLLING SHUTTERS &

GRILLS

STANDARD, SWASTIK,
SHUBDHWAR

18.

(a)

ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS,

PARTITIONS ETC

ECIE, CRYSTAL CORPN.,

ALUMILITE. ALUPLEX,
SP FABRICATION.

(b)

ALUMINIUM
EXTRUSIONS

HINDALCO, INDALCO, JINDAL

19.

TIMBER FIRE DOORS

`KUTTY, `NAVAIR, RADIANT,

ABAQX

20.

METAL FIRE DOORS

SHAKTI METDOR, NAVAIR, RADIANT

21.

DOOR CLOSERS,
FLOOR SPRINGS

YALE, EVERITE

22.

HARDWARE

i) GENERAL

ii) PARTICULAR

23.

GLASS

`HINDUSTAN PILKINGTON,
MODIGAURD, ST. GOBAIN

24.

WATER PROOF CEMENT

PAINT

`SUPER SNOWCEM, DULUX, BERGER,

J & N, GOODLASS - NEROLAC

25.

PAINTS & DISTEMPERS

`JENSON & NICHOLSON,

`BERGER, `ASIAN, `I.C.I.,
`GOODLASS - NEROLAC

`SHALIMAR, `INDO-BRASS,
AMARBHOY DOSSAJI, EARL
BIHARI
DORMA MAIN ENTRANCE DOORS,
PATEL FITTINGS, FITTINGS FOR
SLIDING DOORS

CW- 14

26.

GALVANISING

JENCO, STEELLITE

27.

GALVANISED / STAINLESS
STEEL ANCHOR FASTENERS- HLLTI, FISCHER

28.

ITALIAN MARBLE SUPPLIER- NITCO, LITOLIER

29.

POLYMER MODIFIED
CEMENTITIONS GLOUT -

BAL ENDLLRA

30.

GLASS BRICK / BLOCKS

PITASBARG CORNING FIDENZA

VETROAMDD

31.

NATURAL WOOD VENEERS-

ARCHID, ANCHOR, DURIAN

32.

PLYWOOD

ANCHOR, ARCHID, KITPLY,

GREEN PLY, CENTURY

33.

MELAMINE POLISH

TOUCH WOOD OF ASIAN PAINT,

WUDFIN OF PIDILITE INDUSTRIES

34.

ANTISTATIC HIGH
PRESSURE LAMINATE

FORMICA, BAKELITE HYLAM

35.

HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE- MERINO, GREEN LAM, DECOLAM,

CENTURY, FORMICA

36.

FIRE RATED GLASS

PROMAT

37.

EPOXY PRIMER / PAINTS -

BERGER

38

S. S. CLADDING
FABRICATOR

SREEVATSA

39.

FALSE CEILING SYSTEM

ARM STRONG, HUNTER DOUGLAS,

DIAKIN, INDIAN GYPSUM

40.

STRUCTURAL GLAZING

ALUPLEX, CRYSTAL, SHAPOORJI

PALLONJI, ALUMILITE.

41.

PILING WORK

SIMPLEX CONCRETE PILES,

SKANSKA CEMENTATION INDIA LTD.,
AFCONS INFRASTRUCTURE LTD.

CW- 15

B.

SPECIALISED AGENCIES
1.

WATERPROOFING WORK -

2.

ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT- PEST CONTROL (INDIA) /

CHEMAFUMES

3.

GLASS PYRAMID

LIKPROOF INDIA PVT. LTD.

INDIA WATER PROOFING CO.

GEODESIC TECHNIQUES PVT. LTD.

MCCOY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEMS
PVT. LTD.

CW- 16

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK

1.

Earthwork in excavation, in general, shall be carried out as per the CPWD

Specifications.

2.

The earthwork in excavation with all type of soils including soft / hand rock
wherever required, shall be carried out in slushy position. Earthwork shall
include cost of the element for working in or under water / liquid mud
including pumping of water / liquid mud. Nothing extra shall be payable on
this account. Therefore, the Contractor shall quote his bid after studying the
site conditions.

3.

The item for excavation, wherever required, shall be inclusive of carrying out
the work for all lifts, depths, heights and leads.

4.

Wherever required, the Contractor shall carry out close / open timbering,
including strutting, shoring and packing etc., at his own cost.

5.

Royalty at prevalent rates shall be payable by the Contractor for the entire
earthwork to be executed by him, directly to the Revenue authorities of the
State Government and nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

6.

Pre construction chemical treatment of building from the attack of

subterranean termites shall be done as per CPWD Specifications and as per IS:
6313 (Part II) and as per the item description. The chemicals shall be procured
from the approved manufacturers or from their dealers in sealed containers as
approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The treatment shall be got done only from
the approved specialized agencies.

7.

The Contractor shall submit ten years guarantee in the attached prescribed
proforma for the anti termite treatment. If any defect is noticed during the
guarantee period, it shall be rectified by the Contractor within seven days of
issue of notice to the contractor. If not attended to, the same shall be got done
through other agency at the risk and cost of the Contractor and the cost, which
shall be final and binding on the contractor, shall be recovered from the
amount due to the contractor. In any case, the Contractor and the specialised
agency shall inspect and examine the treatment once in every year during the
guarantee period and make good any defect observed and confirm in writing
the same.

CW- 17

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR

EARTH FILLING WORKS
The work in general shall be carried out as per the CPWD specifications.
Filling shall be done with good earth, murum, stone chips or disintegrated building
debris. It shall be free from salts, organic matter, black cotton or slushing earth and
combustible material. All clods shall be broken before back-filling.
a)

Filling in Plinth :
Shall be done in layers not exceeding 20 cms., amply watered and consolidated
by ramming with iron or wooden rammers weighing 7 to 8 Kg. and having base
20 cm. square or 20 cm. diameter. When filling reaches the finished level,
surface shall be flooded with water for at least 24 hours, allowed to dry and
then rammed and consolidated, after making good any settlement in order to
avoid settlement at a later stage. Special care shall be taken to pack earth under
plinth beam and column corners. Finished level of filling shall be kept to a
slope intended to be given to the floor.

b)

Filling in Outdoor positions and for site development:

Shall be done in layers of 20 cm. Each layer shall be adequately watered. When
filling reaches the required level topmost layer shall be dressed to proper
section, grade and camber and rolled by 8 - 10 tons power roller and adequately
watered to aid compaction to have 95% of Standard Proctor Density.

c)

Filling by Sand
Sand filling shall be done by river sand under floors, trenches, pits etc.
including watering, leveling, removing, unsolidating as per drawing and as
directed by Engineer-In-Charge.

CW- 18

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR BLASTING

The work in general shall be carried out as per the CPWD specifications.
The Contractor shall obtain license from District / public authorities for carrying out
blasting work as well as for obtaining transporting and storing explosives as per
Explosives Rules 1940 or as amended. He shall purchase the explosives, fuses,
detonators etc. only from a licensed dealer. He shall maintain the account of
explosives etc. purchased and used by him. He shall be responsible for safe custody
and proper accounting of explosive materials.
Blasting shall normally be done with gun powder. Dynamite, Gelatine or any other
high explosives shall only be used in special cases with written permission of the
Consultant and District authorities concerned as required under Explosive Rules.
Blasting operations shall be carried out by a licenced blaster under supervision of a
responsible representative of the Contrac tor, during certain hours, preferably during
lunch break, as approved by the Consultant in writing. The representative shall be
conversant with the rules of blasting.
Proper precautions for safety of persons shall be taken. Red Flags shall be
prominently displayed around the area to be blasted and all people on work except
those who actually light the fuses shall be withdrawn to safe distance of not less than
100 meters from the blast site. Blasting shall not be done within 100 meters of an
existing masonry or any other kind of structure unless special precautions are taken by
heavy blanketting etc.
Where blasting is not practicable or prohibited, excavation shall be done by wedging
or chiselling and it shall be restricted to the quantity required to enable the necessary
foundations etc. to be put in. The item also covers bailing out subsoil water or rain
water including pumping at any stage of the work, shoring, strutting etc.

CW- 19

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR DRY RUBBLE

PACKING WORK

The work in general shall be carried out as per the CPWD specifications.
Ground shall first be levelled up and thoroughly consolidated by means of heavy log
hammerer frog rams. Rubble of specified thickness shall be laid and set with hand. It
shall be consolidated either by hand roller or wooden log hammer, free use of water
being made during consolidation. All hollows and interstices after consolidation shall
be filled with quarry spalls, stone chips etc. and the packing blinded with stone grit
and watered and consolidated by log hammer.

CW- 20

GUARANTEE TO BE EXECUTED BY CONTRACTOR FOR

REMOVAL OF DEFECTS AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK IN
RESPECT OF ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT WORKS.
This agreement made this _____day of _________________two thousand and
_________________________________________________________________
between___________________________________________________________
(Name of contractor, hereinafter call Guarantor of the one part) and the
_____________________ (hereinafter called the ____________ of the other part).
WHEREAS THIS agreement is supplementary to a contract (hereinafter called the
Contract) dated________________ and made between the GUARANTOR of the one
part and the ____________ of the other part, whereby the Contractor, inter alia,
undertook to render the buildings and structures in the said contract recited
completely termite proof.
AND WHEREAS THE GUARANTOR agreed to give a guarantee to the effect that
the said structures will remain termite proof for ten years from the date of completion
of work.
NOW THE GUARANTOR hereby guarantees that anti-termite treatment given by
him will render the structures completely termite proof and the minimum life of such
anti-termite treatment shall be ten years to be reckoned from the date of completion of
work.
During this period of guarantee, the guarantor shall make good all defects and in case
of any defects being found, render the building termite proof at his own cost, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall commence the work for such
rectification within seven days from the date of issue of the notice from the Engineerin-Charge calling upon him to rectify the defects, failing which the work shall be got
done by Department through some other contractor at the GUARANTORS cost and
risk. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the cost, payable by the Guarantor
shall be final and binding.
That is the Guarantor fails to execute the necessary rectification or commits breach
there under, then the Guarantor will indemnify the Principal and his successors
against all loss, damage, cost expense or otherwise which may be incurred by him by
reasons of any default on the part of GUARANTOR in performance and observance
of this supplementary agreement. As to the amount of loss and / or damage and / or
cost incurred by the Government, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge will be final
and binding on the parties.

CW- 21

IN WITNESS WHERE OF these presents has been executed by the GUARANTOR

________________________________________________and
by
_____________________________and for and on behalf of the ___________ on the
day month and year first above written.

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED by GUARANTOR in the presence of:

1.
2.
SIGNED FOR AND ON BEHALF OF ______________________________ BY
________________________ in the presence of:
1.
2.

CW- 22

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR DEWATERING DURING

EXCAVATION,
FOUNDATION,
WATER
PROOFING
AND
UNDERGROUND WORKS.
1.

De-watering shall be done at contractors cost conforming to BIS Code IS: 9759
(guide lines for de-watering during construction) and / or as per the
specifications approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Design of an appropriate
and suitable dewatering system shall be the Contractors responsibility. Such
scheme shall be modified / augmented as the work proceeds based on fresh
information discovered during the progress of work, at no extra cost. At all
times during the construction work, efficient drainage of the site shall be
carried out by the Contractor and especially during the ANTI TERMITE &
WATER PROOFING treatment, casting of RCC raft foundation, lift pit, laying
of plain cement concrete, taking levels, installing rock anchors etc. The
Contractor shall also ensure that there is no danger to the nearby properties and
installations on account of such lowering of water table. If needed, suitable
precautionary measures shall be taken by the Contractor. Also the scheme of
dewatering adopted shall have adequate built in arrangement to serve as standbye to attend to repair of pumps etc. and disruption of power / fuel supply.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

2.

De-watering shall be carried out by suitable means with adequate stand-by

arrangements of pumps etc. and it shall be ensured that its disposal is carried
out as per the regulations of the local bodies. The water / slush / muck etc. shall
not be disposed off into the public drainage system of sewer manhole or storm
water drain, but shall be pumped off into the creek close to the plot or disposed
by any other manner, subject to the approval of the local bodies in this regard.
The agencies are, therefore, advised to inspect and acquaint themselves of
the site and location of disposal point(s) of water / slush and satisfy
themselves as regards method of pumping and disposal required to be adopted.
Any default or failure on the part of the Contractor to acquaint himself with the
aforesaid aspect of work shall not absolve him from his responsibility for the
execution / performance of this contract. Also, all permissions in this regard, to
be taken from local authorities, shall be obtained by the Contractor. Nothing
extra shall be payable on these accounts.

3.

In trenches where surface water is likely to get into cut / trench during
monsoons, a ring bund of puddle clay or by any other means shall be formed
outside, to the required height, and maintained by the Contractor. Also,
suitable steps shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent back flow of pumped
water into the trench. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

CW- 23

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CONCRETE & STEEL

1.

CONCRETE

1.1

Scope
This section of the specification shall apply to all concrete works to be carried
out under the contract including batching, supply, delivery, handling, placing
and curing of concrete, erection and dismantling of formwork and supply,
bonding, handling and fixing of reinforcement.
Reinforced concrete unless varied by this specification shall comply with the
requirements of the latest Indian Code Requirements for Plain and Reinforced
Concrete IS 486: 2000, its amendments and other relevant codes stated herein.
All materials used shall be of the best quality obtained from sources and suppliers
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge and shall comply strictly with the tests
prescribed herein or, where tests are not laid down in this Specification, with the
requirements of the latest relevant Indian Standards outlined herein or other
Standards approved by the Engineer.

1.2

Materials

1.2.1 Cement
a)

Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 269 - 1989 unless

specified differently.
It shall be received in bags of 50 kg and a factory test certificate shall
accompany each batch. It shall be tested before use to ascertain its strength,
setting time, etc. In case cement has been stored for over 6 months or for any
reasons, the stored cement shows signs of deterioration or contamination, it
shall be tested as per the direction of the Engineer-In-Charge prior to use in the
works.

b)

Cement shall be stored to prevent deterioration due to moisture/dampness.

Bags shall be stacked on rigid waterproof platforms with about 15 to 20 mm
clear above the floors and with 25 to 35 cm clearance from the surrounding
walls. Maximum stack height is 12 bags. Stacks shall be so arranged that the
first batches be used first (FIFO) and for easy access for inspection and
handling.

c)

The following other types of cement may be used in works if specified or with
the prior written approval of the Engineer in writing for specific purpose. Any
additional cost for the use of these cements unless requested by the Engineer-

CW- 24

In-Charge, shall be to the expense of the Contractor. Specialist literature shall

be consulted for guidance regarding use of these types of cement.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.

Rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS 8041 - 1990.

Portland pozzolana cement conforming to IS 1489 - 1991.
High strength ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8112 - 1989.
High alumina cement conforming to IS 6452 - 1991.
Supersulphated cement conforming to IS 6909 - 1990

1.2.2 Aggregate
1.2.2.1 Alkali Silica Reaction of Aggregates
Any aggregate source of an extrusive volcanic origin shall be tested for alkali
silica reaction (ASR) by a test procedure acceptable to the Engineer before it is
accepted for inclusion in the works. Aggregates from any source known to be
alkali silica reactive shall not be included in the works. If at any time during
the works the aggregates are sourced from other than approved sources, the
new source material shall be tested for ASR before it may be approved by the
Engineer for inclusion in the works.
The cost of all such testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.2.2.2 Coarse Aggregate
a)

Coarse aggregate shall be obtained from approved quarries and may be

crushed or uncrushed, or a combination thereof. Aggregate shall be
hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins and adherent
coatings. It shall be free from soft, friable, thin, elongated or laminated
pieces and shall be roughly cubicle in shape. It shall consist of coarse
material, most of which is retained on 4.75 mm IS sieve.

b)

Coarse aggregate shall not contain any harmful material such as iron,
pyrites, coal, mica, shale or similar laminated material; neither shall it
contain clay, alkali, soft fragments, seashells, organic impurities, etc. In
such quantities that adversely affects the strength and durability of the
concrete. In addition to the above, in reinforced concrete the aggregate
shall not contain any material, which might attack the reinforcement.
The maximum quantities of deleterious materials in coarse aggregate,
when determined in accordance with IS: 2386 - 1963 Part I and Part II "
Method of test for aggregates for concrete" shall not exceed the limits
laid down in Table 1 of IS: 383.

c)

Aggregate crushing value, impact value, abrasion value and soundness

shall be respectively in accordance with Section 4.3, 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6 of
IS 384 - 1979.

CW- 25

d)

Grading of coarse aggregate shall be in conformity with the

requirements laid down in IS: 384 - 1979. (Table 2 and 5).

e)

Aggregate shall be sourced from an approved Government location. It

shall be tested prior to the approval by the Engineer-In-Charge by an
approved testing laboratory. In case available aggregates do not meet
certain requirements of IS 383 - 1970 or any other specification, the
Contractor at his cost shall carry out the required processing. The
Employer shall pay no extra cost towards these processes or treatments.
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to make sure that all aggregate
material received by him is from Government approved quarries and
that all with fully paid royalties, taxes, duties, etc. as may be in force
from time to time for respective locations.

f)

Aggregate shall be stored in such a way that it does not contaminated by

with mud, grass, vegetables and other foreign matter.

g)

Coarse aggregate shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.6

(Saturated surface dry basis). Aggregate below this specific gravity shall
not be used without the special permission of the Engineer-In-Charge.

h)

Once a specific source of supply of coarse aggregate is approved, the

source shall not be changed without the prior approval of the EngineerIn-Charge.

1.2.2.3 Fine Aggregate

Natural sand is the most preferable source of fine aggregate.
a)

Crushed and screened stone may be used but care will be required to
ensure that it is free of excessive dust and clay. Flaky and angular
particles are to be avoided.

b)

Sea sand should not be used unless approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

If approved, all required treatment shall be done at the Contractor's cost.

c)

Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and
organic matter and shall not contain any clay. Sand shall not contain
harmful impurities such as iron, pyrites, coal particles, lignite, mica,
shale or similar laminated material, alkali, and organic impurities in
such form or quantities as to affect the strength or durability or concrete
or mortar. It must not contain any material liable to attack the steel
reinforcement.

CW- 26

1.3

d)

When tested as per IS: 2386 - 1963 Part I and Part II, fine aggregate
shall not exceed permissible quantities of deleterious materials as give
in Table 1 of this code.

e)

If necessary fine aggregate shall be thoroughly washed with clean fresh

water such that the percentage of all deterious materials is reduced
permissible limits. The cost of washing is to be borne by the
Contractor.

f)

Grading of fine aggregate shall fall within the limits of one of the four
zones given in Table 4 of IS: 383 - 1970.

g)

Due allowance is to be made while preparing mixes based on volume

measurements for bulking. Bulking shall be determined as per
Appendix A of IS: 2386 - 1963 Part III.

h)

Storing of aggregate shall be as per 3.2.3.2 f).

Water
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean, reasonably clear and free
from excessive quantities of silt, oils, alkalies, acids, and salts. It shall be free
of elements, which significantly affects the hydration reaction or otherwise
interfere with the hardening of concrete during curing, or those elements,
which produce objectionable stains or deposits. Potable water is generally
satisfactory but it shall be tested prior to use in the works. Seawater shall not
be used for either batching or curing.
Water testing shall be in accordance with IS: 3024 - 1964. Maximum
permissible limits of deleterious materials in water shall be as given in IS: 456
- 1978 (Table 1).
The suitability of water shall be further ascertained by the compressive
strength and initial setting time test as specified under:
a)

Average 28 days compressive strength of at least three 150 mm concrete

cubes prepared with water proposed to be used shall not be less than
90% of the average strength of three similar blocks prepared and tested
in accordance to IS: 516 - 1959.

b)

The initial setting time of test cubes made with proposed cement and
water, shall not be less than 30 minutes and shall not differ by 30
minutes from the initial setting time of control test block prepared with
the same cement and water. Preparation and testing of cubes shall be in
accordance with IS: 4031 - 1988.

CW- 27

c)

The PH value of water shall not be less than 6 or more than 9.

d)

Water storage tanks shall be such as to prevent the inclusion of any

deleterious materials.
Water shall be tested and approved in writing by the Engineer-In-Charge
prior to use in the works.

1.3.a

Admixture
These are substances other than cement, aggregate and water that may be
permitted to be used to modify the properties of concrete for single, or a
combination of purposes. Admixtures shall be used only on the written
approval of Engineer-In-Charge for specific purpose and at the cost of the
Contractor. Admixtures generally in use are classified as:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

Accelerators
Retarders
Workability agents
Water repelling agents
Air-entraining agents
Gas-forming agent

These are manufactured and sold by various companies under brand names.
The Contractor proposing to use any of them shall submit to the Engineer-InCharge technical literature including chemical composition, reason for use, and
method recommended by the manufacturer and what site controls are intended
to ensure compliance with the proposed methodology.
The Contractor's proposal to use an admixture shall include the following:
a)

The trade name of the admixture, its source and the manufacturer's
recommended method of use;

b)

Typical dosage rates and the possible detrimental effects of under and
over dosage;

c)

Whether the admixture contains chloride in any free form or any other
chemical present as an active ingredient which is a likely cause of
corrosion of reinforcement or deterioration of concrete; and

d)

The average expected air content of freshly mixed concrete containing

an admixture, which causes air to be entrained when used at the
manufacturer's recommended rate of dosage.

CW- 28

1.3b. Concrete
Concrete shall be designed and produced so that the following parameters as
specified in the relevant codes are met.
All slump testing shall be carried out at the workplace.
Concrete Use

Compressive
Strength
(MPa)

Slump (mm)
15

Minimum
Cement Content
(kg/m3 )

Maximum
Water Cement
Ratio

Foundation,
Columns. Staircase

M30

60

410

0.42

Grade slab

M20

120

340

0.45

P.C.C.

M15

120

315

0.45

Flat Slab, beams,

columns, Drop Panels

M30

60

410

0.42

1.3.1 Cement Concrete

This shall be classified as plain cement concrete or reinforced cement concrete.
Plain cement concrete (PCC) shall be used in levelling course under
foundations, floors, copings, etc. and shall include formwork as part of the
work.
Reinforced cement concrete shall be used in all structural elements and
comprises formwork, reinforcement and concrete.
Concrete shall be classified by its 28-day compressive strength. The concrete
grades shall be as designated in Table 2 of IS 456 - 1978.
1.3.2 Design Mix
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to carry out design mixes.
Approval for of the same shall be obtained from the Engineer-In-Charge at least
56 days in advance of the actual placing of concrete at site in the permanent
works.
The basic aim of mix design shall be to find the most economic proportion of
cement, aggregates, and water which will give the desired strength of concrete,
proper workability and durability (Severe as per I.S. 456 appendix). Also it is
important that the mix should be easily worked with the use of equipment
available on site. The operations involved at site include measurement of
material, mixing, placing, compacting, finishing and curing. The design shall
be carried out strictly to IS specification and IS code of practice 456, SP 23 and

CW- 29

SP 24. The Contractor must ensure that the minimum cement content per
cubic meter of reinforced concrete is not being less than that stipulated in
Section 3.5.
1.3.3 Trial Mix
i)

As stated above in clause 3.5.2, the Contractor shall submit, at least 56

days in advance, to the Engineer-In-Charge the mix design that he
proposes to use at site. The mix design shall also give basic details
(When tested according to IS 1199 - 1959 and IS 2386 -Part III 1963),
such as
a) Mix Designation Mark.
b) Grade of Concrete.
c) Type of Cement.
d) Maximum nominal size of aggregate.
e) Proportion by weight of individual ingredients and total weight of
batch.
f)
Water cement ratio
g) Type of aggregate
h) Admixture and quantity
i)
Slump
j)
Target strength
k) Cement manufacturer
l)
Quality Control Measures
m) Bleeding
n) Compacting Factor
o) Vee-Bee Time.

ii)

On receipt of this, the Engineer-In-Charge may immediately order trial

mixes before the final approval is granted. This shall be done with the
mixer and materials actually being used at site.
This shall give the Contractor additional chance to check the actual
workability and make sure that the proposed mix by him will be
satisfactory with regards to slump, segregation, bleeding, water-cement
ratio and workability.
Six cubes shall be taken from each of 3 test mix batches. Cubes shall be
cast, stored, cured, transported and tested to IS 516 - 1959. The test
may be carried out at site or a laboratory as approved by the EngineerIn-Charge.
Trial mixes shall be approved provided that the average strength of 3
consecutive cubes is not less than that specified and if no cube gives a
value of less than 90% of the specified strength.

CW- 30

iii)

In case the trial mix fails the above criteria, the Engineer-In-Charge shall
order fresh trial mixes to be made, until the desired strength is arrived
at.

iv)

If a material source(s) or quality is changed the Engineer-In-Charge may

order fresh design mix and trial mixes to be carried out before the same
is used at site.

v)

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare and get the cubes

tested and to provide for all material, labour, moulds, equipment,
casting and curing facilities, charges for testing, etc.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a site laboratory with
necessary equipment and staff to carry out the following tests.
a)

Grading of coarse and fine aggregates;

b)

Silt content of sand;

c)

Moisture content of coarse and fine aggregates;

d)

Slump test of concrete; and

e)

Concrete cube test

The Contractor shall maintain full records of all tests in a register. The
format of records shall be prepared in consultation with the Engineer-InCharge. The Engineer-In-Charge shall at all times have full access to the
Contractor's laboratory and test records.
The Contractor shall include charges for the above work in his rates and
no extra whatsoever shall be admissible on this account of designing,
testing, maintaining laboratory, etc.
1.3.c Supply of Concrete
1.3.c.1 Approval of Source
Concrete supplied for the contract shall be either ready mixed concrete from a
recognised supplier or from a batch plant established on site. At least 56 days
prior to any concrete being required, the Contractor shall seek approval from the
Engineer-In-Charge for both the supplier and their plant or the Contractors own
proposed batching plant.
Submission for approval of on site batching shall be made to the Engineer 56
days prior to any concrete being used. The submission shall be accompanied by:

Details of the proposed material storage arrangements on site;

CW- 31

Details of the proposed batching and mixing methods;

Details of the proposed material sources;
Details of the proposed transportation method; and
Any other information, which the Engineer-In-Charge deems necessary.

1.3.c.2 Batching
All mixing and batching operations shall be carried out in accordance with the
relevant codes.
The concrete shall be proportioned in the following manner: cement by weight,
aggregates by weight, water by volume and admixtures by volume.
The cement shall be weighed in a hopper separately from the aggregates. The
batching plant shall be so designed that materials flow efficiently and freely from
bins to weighing hoppers. Means of control shall be shut off with precision.
Weighing hoppers shall discharge efficiently so that no more than 0.25 percent of
batch weights shall be retained in the hopper in the case of aggregates and no
more that 1 percent in the case of cement.
Allowance shall be made for the water contained in the aggregates when
calculating the quantity of water to be added in the mix.
The Contractor shall provide concrete batch mixers, vibrators, weigh batches
conforming to relevant IS specification. The capacity and number of mixers
and vibrators required at site from time to time shall be to the approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge. No equipment from site shall be removed without the
prior written approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. The Contractor shall also
maintain a platform weighing scale of capacity 300 kg with fraction up to 100
Gms at the site.
As directed by the Engineer-In-Charge, a weekly or periodic calibration of all
machines shall be done and records of these calibrations shall be maintained in
a register.
Regular maintenance of machinery shall be carried out on a weekly basis
or as directed by the manufacturer of machines.
1.3.c.3 Mixing
The concrete shall be mixed in a mixer of adequate capacity complying with the
requirements of IS: 4952:1968 and having a power elevated loading hopper. The
quantity of water added to each batch in the mixer may be varied by not more
than + 5% in order to maintain a constant workability. The mixing shall continue
until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is uniform in
colour and consistency and in no case shall the time of mixing be less than 2

CW- 32

minutes or more than 5 minutes after all the ingredients have been placed in the
mixer.
Any concrete surplus to immediate requirements shall be thrown away. In no
circumstances may the surplus be used later.
Mixers, which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes, shall be
thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed.
Records of each batch showing weights of the various components of the mix,
results of testing carried out to determine the insitu water content of the aggregate
prior to mixing, the quantity of cement added and its location and time of
placement in the structure shall be kept on site.
Ready mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the
requirements of the local code and Engineer-In-Charge requirements.
The placing temperature of concrete shall not be more than 320 C. If it is
more, the Engineer-In-Charge may order addition of ice or chilled water to the
concrete.
1.3.c.4 Transport and Delivery
Transit trucks shall comply with the relevant code, with an agitating speed
between 2 and 3 RPM and mixing speeds in the range of 10 - 20 RPM. The
elapsed time between charging of the mixer and discharge at the site shall not
exceed 45 minutes, and the concrete temperature at time of placement shall not
exceed 32oC.
Before unloading of any truck at the site, the Contractor shall supply a certificate
from the supplier for the load.
The maximum water cement ratio, as specified and determined in the approved
mix design shall not be exceeded.
The Contractor shall keep records showing for each batch of concrete produced,
the weight of cement, weight of each grade of aggregate used, amount of
approved admixtures added, weight of added water and the results of tests made
to determine the water contained in the aggregate. The records shall be crossreferenced by the Contractor at the site to show locations in the pour where the
batches were placed.
1.3.c.5 Shrinkage cracks
Concreting shall be avoided in very hot weather. If necessary exposed concrete
surfaces shall be covered with damped Hessian within 2 hours of placing of
concrete.
CW- 33

To achieve good results the concrete shall be immediately covered with a

plastic sheet and not allowed any direct wind contact. This shall eliminate
shrinkage cracks.
1.3.d Placement of Concrete
1.3.d.1 Approvals
No concrete shall be placed without the Engineer's approval. In particular, the
Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer-In-Charge a schedule
showing proposed construction joint locations and the sequence in which the
Contractor intends to place the concrete, at least six weeks before any concrete is
required on site.
The Contractor shall seek the Engineer-In-Charges approval at least 24 hours
prior to the formwork and reinforcement being ready for inspection, and the
intended time for the pour to commence. Adequate time, but in any case not less
than eight hours, shall be allowed by the Contractor for the Engineer-In-Charge
inspection work.
Concrete placement shall not commence until inspections have been carried out,
outstanding work completed or corrected and approval to proceed given by the
Engineer.
All built in conduits, pipes, fittings, guards, block outs, bolts, reinforcement and
other fittings shall be in a position and secured before placing is commenced.
Formwork should be clean, free from sawdust, pieces of wood or any other
foreign material. It should have been treated by for releasing agent prior to the
laying of reinforcement and concrete.
1.3.d.2 Method of Placement
Concrete shall be placed in position within 45 minutes from the time it is
produced. Concrete shall be laid during normal working hours. Concreting at
night or on holidays shall be permitted only on the written approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Concrete shall be as gently deposited as is practically possible, in its final
position to avoid rehandling and shall be so deposited that segregation of
aggregates does not occur. In case of deep trenches and footings, it may be
done with the help of a chute. Concrete shall not be dumped away from the
face of concrete already in place. It shall be dumped into the face of concrete
already in place.

CW- 34

Concrete onto a sloping surface shall be discharged by providing a chute with a

baffle and a drop at its end so that the concrete remains on the slope.
Columns and walls shall be concreted in one operation to their full height to
avoid any horizontal construction joint.
Concrete shall be placed in layers not exceeding 450mm deep in deep beams and
placed to the full depth in slabs and small beams. When a layer is not completely
placed in one operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer
shall be placed and compacted before the preceding layer has taken its initial set
and in a manner that will entirely breakup and prevent any construction joint
forming between the layers. All placements shall be made in one continuous
operation between construction joints or approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Construction joints shall be in accordance with Clause 3.7.5.
1.3.d.3 Compaction of concrete
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted as depositing proceeds by means of
suitable vibrators. The vibrators shall maintain the entire concrete under
treatment in an adequate state of agitation and shall continue during the whole
duration of concrete placement. Care shall be taken not to over- vibrate the
concrete. While withdrawing vibrator needles, no holes should be visible in
concreting. Compaction shall be completed before the initial setting time.
Successive vibrations shall not disturb concrete already set.
It shall be ensured that the needle vibrators are not applied on reinforcement,
which may destroy the bond between concrete and reinforcement.
When electric vibrators are in use, the standby petrol vibrator must always be
available at the concreting point. At least two (2) vibrators shall be used, and
an adequate number of standby vibrators shall be available on site in case of
breakdowns. Workmen skilled in their use shall operate vibrators. Should the
vibration of the concrete not be to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge, at
the Engineer-In-Charges request, the Contractor shall replace the person
currently in control of the vibrator.
1.3.d.4 Hot Weather Requirements
In hot weather, precautions shall be taken to avoid premature stiffening of fresh
mix and to reduce water absorption and evaporation losses. Where the
temperature of the surrounding air is higher than 32oC, the following provisions
shall apply:
(a)

The formwork shall be continuously sprayed with cold water in advance

of the concreting. Excess water shall be removed from the inside of the
forms immediately prior to the concrete placement. The reinforcement

CW- 35

and the formwork, if metal forms are used, shall be protected from the
effects of hot winds and direct sunlight.
(b)

The concrete shall have a temperature not higher than 32oC when placed,
either following the use of chilled mixing water, or by water spraying of
the coarse aggregate or both, and if necessary by covering the container in
which the concrete is transported to the forms.

(c)

The concrete shall be mixed, transported, placed and compacted as rapidly

as possible, and the element of structure shall then be covered with an
impervious membrane or with wet sand or wet Hessian, kept wet until
moist curing ends.

(d)

Curing compounds shall not be used as an alternative to the requirements

of paragraphs (b) or (c) above. Curing compounds are to be approved by
the Engineer-In-Charge prior to use.

1.3.d.5 Construction joints

In large pours, it is practically not possible to carry on concreting continuously
and hence construction joints shall be provided. The Contractor for approval
of the Engineer-In-Charge shall submit location of construction joints. Such
joints shall be kept to a minimum. The joints shall be at places where shear
force is nil or minimum and these shall be straight and at right angles to the
direction of the main reinforcement.
Stop ends provided shall be with necessary slots for reinforcement bars to pass
freely without bending or any other obstruction. Also a trapezoidal fillet nailed
on stop board shall be provided to form a regular keyed joint. Joints shall be
straight and truly vertical or horizontal.
Before commencement of concreting, adjacent concrete stopper and surfaces
shall be chipped and roughened to expose aggregate. When wire brushed and
cleaned the concrete surface shall be sprayed with water for 24 hours before
casting and kept wet until casting.
True horizontal joints shall also be provided with a keyed joint by inserting
planed greased timber.
It shall be treated as above prior to the start of fresh concreting.
For vertical joints neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface just before
concreting. For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered with a layer of
mortar abo ut 10 to 15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same
ratio as the cement and sand in the concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry
shall be freshly mixed and applied just before concreting.

CW- 36

The location of all joints is to be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

1.3.d.6 Expansion Joints
Expansion joint shall be formed and located as detailed in the drawing.
1.3.d.7 Curing
Curing of concrete is an extremely important aspect of the work. There shall
be no compromise on this activity and it is for the Contractor to arrange for
everything necessary to make sure that the concrete is cured to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge. As noted in Clause 3.6.5, after concrete
has begun to harden (i.e. about 1 to 2 hours after laying), it shall be protected
from quick drying with moist or damped Hessian cloth or any other material
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. After 12 hours of laying of the concrete,
flooding with water for a period of 10 days to keep it moist shall cure the
surface.
1.3.d.8 Finishing
Concrete shall be finished keeping in mind the next operation to be carried out
over the surface. For guidance the following points shall be noted but the
Engineer shall be consulted prior to start of concreting and his decision in this
regard shall be final.
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)

Roof slab shall be traveled even and smooth with a wooden float.
Surfaces that will receive plaster shall be roughened immediately.
Surfaces that will be in contact with any masonry work shall be
roughened immediately.
The surfaces that will receive mosaic floor or IPS or any other type of
tiled work shall be roughened while it is green. Every care shall be
taken not to disturb the freshly laid concrete.
Workshop floor shall be broom finished transverse to the direction of
the slope.

Particular attention should be given to the surface tolerance for all floors. This
being 6mm. Failure to achieve this tolerance will require the Contractor to
apply at his expense a self-levelling epoxy or mortar.
1.3.d.9 Inspection and corrective measures
On removal of formwork, the Engineer-In-Charge shall examine the surface.
Till such time, the Contractor shall carry out no remedial measures. All
patching, rectification or chipping shall be done only on the Engineer-InCharge instructions. In case of any violation of this rule, the concrete poured
shall stand rejected. The decision of the Engineer-In-Charge in this regard shall
be final and binding on all parties.
CW- 37

Sagged, bulged, patched, honeycombed work shall stand to be rejected for

surfaces that are exposed, or require fairface finish or decorative textured
finish. The Engineer-In-Charge may permit any work found structurally safe
and areas of unexposed faces, for repairing. As directed by the Engineer-InCharge these works shall be retained and the cost of repair shall be to the
Contractor's account.
Cracks observed shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer-In-Charge who
shall examine them. It shall be kept under observation and a record shall be
maintained for a period of 45 days. It shall be shown to the Engineer and the
following procedure shall be followed: a)

Cracks not developing further and in the opinion of Engineer-In-Charge,

detrimental to the strength of the construction shall be grouted with nonshrinking cement slurry, epoxy or as directed by the Engineer-InCharge.

b)

Cracks developing further and, in the opinion of the structural Engineer,

detrimental to the strength of construction, shall be tested as per the
relevant Indian standard

c)

Based on results of the test, the Engineer in consultation with the

Design Engineer-In-Charge shall order remedial measures or order the
Contractor to dismantle construction, cart away the debris, replace the
construction and carry out all the consequential works thereto.

d)

The decision of the Engineer-In-Charge in this matter shall be final and

binding on all parties. This decision shall not be open for arbitration.

1.3.e Testing/Acceptance
1.3.e.1Quantum of cubes and testing
The minimum frequency of cube casting shall be as follows. Each sample shall
consist of 6 cubes.
Concrete Quantity
Up to 5 cu m in a day
5 cu m to 15 cu m
15 cu m to 30 cu m
30 cu m to 50 cu m
More than 50 cu m

Number of Samples
1
2
3
4
4 + one additional per
Each 50 cu m or part thereof

CW- 38

In addition, samples shall be taken whenever any of the materials or the

proportions of the mix are changed or whenever directed by the Engineer.
The samples shall be taken, and the test cubes cured in accordance with the
requirements of IS: 1199 - 1959 and IS: 516 - 1959. Three shall be tested after 7
days and the remaining three after 28 days in a laboratory approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
The cube tests shall be in accordance with IS 516 - 1959.
The number of cubes in each sample may be reduced by the Engineer-In-Charge
if consistently satisfactory results are obtained, or increased up to a maximum of
12 when, in the opinion of the Engineer-In-Charge, additional tests are required
as, for example, in the early stage of the works.
The Contractor shall supply or arrange all labour and equipment for the sampling
and testing of concrete as specified. The costs of this sampling and testing shall
be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the tendered
rates and prices for concrete works.
1.3.e.2 Acceptance of work
It shall be as given in IS 456 - 2000, SP 23 and SP 24. The Guidance brief is
as under.
Part or element of work shall be deemed to be accepted, provided the results of
the 28th day cube testing conform to the criteria stated as under.
a)

The average of the three consecutive cubes strength shall not be less
than the specified strength.

b)

No individual cube strength shall be less than 90% of the specified

strength.

c)

If the individual cube strength exhibits more than 133 % of the specified
strength, such a cube shall be classified as freak and the criteria in (a)
and (b) shall be applied to the remaining two cubes and their
acceptability determined.

d)

If the concrete tests fail to meet the acceptance criteria of the minimum
strength required for respective grades of concrete, the Engineer may
take one of the following decisions:
i)

Instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests (e.g. core
tests, load tests, etc.) and/or remedial measures to ensure the
soundness of the structure at the Contractor's expense.

CW- 39

ii)

Any decision to accept the work shall be entirely at the discretion

of the Engineer-In-Charge who may make a reduction in the rate of
the appropriate item.

iii)

The Work will be rejected and any consequential action as

needed shall be taken at the Contractor's expense including cutting
out and replacing a part or whole of the work.

In addition to the above plastic concrete is liable for rejection if the time since
completion of mixing is greater than 45 minutes or the appearance and
cohesiveness of the particular quantity is significantly different from previously
supplied quantities of the same specification.
Hardened concrete shall be liable to rejection if (a)

It does not satisfy the strength requirements of this specification,

(b)

It is porous, segregated, honey-combed, or contains surface defects; or

(c)

It fails to comply with other requirements of this specification.

All remedial work to bring rejected concrete to an acceptable standard shall be to

the Contractor's cost and to the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
1.4.

Repair Work
Concrete, which is unsatisfactory, shall be repaired by cutting out the
unsatisfactory material and by replacing it with an approved repair material.
Voids to be so filled shall be provided with anchors, keys or dovetail slots
whenever necessary to attach the new material securely in place. Surface of
prepared voids shall be wetted for 24 hours immediately before the patching
material is placed. Skilled workmen shall make repair of concrete. Repairs
shall be made as soon as practicable after removal of forms and in a manner to
meet the requirements for the finish specified for the particular location.
Repairing leakages in liquid retaining structures, which become apparent
during leak testing will also have to be repaired by the Contractor at his own
cost following methods and specifications as directed by the Engineer.
For repair of the concrete works, the Contractor may use epoxy as a bonding
agent prior to placing the repair material. The use or otherwise of epoxy for
the repair work will be at the discretion of the Engineer-In-Charge. Epoxies
shall be applied in strict accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer.

CW- 40

Approved brands of repair material and chemicals shall be used to repair

surfaces of damaged concrete at the discretion of the Engineer-In-Charge. The
repair work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations as regards the preparation of surface, cleaning, hacking,
applying bonding agents, admixtures, polymer mortars etc. The Engineer-InCharge shall certify any deviation before being brought into execution.
Filling material or grout used in repair of surfaces which will be exposed after
completion of the project shall be made with cement from the same sources as
that used in concrete and blended with a sufficient amount of white portland
cement to produce the same colour as in the adjoining concrete. Patched
surfaces shall be given a final treatment as required to make the texture of the
patch match that of the surrounding material.
Immediately after patching is completed, the patched area shall be covered
with an approved non-staining, water-saturated material, which shall be kept
wet and protected against sun and wind for a period of 12 hours. Thereafter,
the patched area shall be kept continuously wet by a fine spray or sprinkling
for not less than 10- days.
All materials, procedures and operations used in the repair of concrete and also
the finished work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
All fillings shall be tightly bonded to the concrete and shall be sound, free from
shrinkage cracks, or drummy areas after the fillings have been cured and dried.
The Engineer-In-Charge shall decide upon the extent of repair. The cost of
repairs of defective areas shall be borne by the Contractor. The Engineer may
adopt at his discretion any other method of repairing like grouting with cement
grout, epoxy grouts or guniting etc. This shall be carried out by the Contractor
at his cost as per the specifications supplied by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Repairing shall be carried out only if the Engineer-In-Charge feels that it is
sufficient only to repair the concrete and demolition and reconstruction is not
necessary.
1.5

Reinforcement
Reinforcement bars used in construction shall be mild steel or medium tensile
steel round bars and high strength deformed bars. Refer to the drawings for
details.

1.5.1 M S Plain
Rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel plain round bars used in concrete
shall conform to IS 432 - 1982 Part I. Steel received shall conform to the
following IS with regard to manufacturing and chemical composition.

CW- 41

1.
2.
3.

M.S. bar Grade I Steel designation Fe 410-S of IS 2062 - 1992.

M.S. bar Grade II Steel designation Fe 210-O of IS 1977 - 1975.
Medium Tensile Steel designations Fe 540 W-HT Steel bars IS 8500 -1991

Nominal sizes and tolerances shall be as specified in IS 432 - 1982Part I.

Physical requirements shall be determined in accordance with IS 1608, read in
conjunction with IS 2062 - 1992.
1.5.2 Tor Steel
High Strength deformed bars for use as reinforcement in concrete shall be of
grade Fe 415, Fe 500 and Fe 550 conforming to IS 1786 - 1985
Chemical composition shall conform to IS 1786 - 1985 when made as a
relevant part of IS 228 -1959.
Nominal sizes, cross sectional areas and their mass shall be as specified in IS
1786 - 1985, allowing due consideration for tolerances specified therein.
Physical properties
1)
2)
3)

It shall satisfy IS 1599 - 1985 test for bend and rebend test in
conjunction with IS 226.
Bond requirements shall be deemed to have been satisfied if it meets
clause 4.0 of IS 1786 - 1985.
Tensile, proof stress and percent elongation shall be as per Table 3 of IS
1786 - 1985.

1.5.3 Delivered Material

a)

Material received at site shall have ISI certification mark. Each bundle
or coil containing the bars shall be suitably marked with ISI certification
mark. Bars shall also be marked to identify categories. This shall be
done as per IS 1387 - 1993.
In case bars are without ISI certification mark, the manufacturer shall
give a certificate stating process of manufacture, chemical composition
and mechanical properties. Each certificate shall indicate the number or
identification mark of the batch production/cast to which it applies.
Corresponding number or identification mark should be found on the
material.

b)

All reinforcement material shall be free from loose mill scale, excessive
rust, loose rust, pitting, oil grease, paint, mud or any foreign deleterious
material present on the surface. Cleaning shall be done to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

CW- 42

c)

Each batch brought at site shall be tested prior to use for respective
specification/ physical properties. Cost of all such tests shall be borne
by the Contractor. Material acceptable as per IS shall be allowed into
the works. The Contractor shall remove all rejected material from site
within 3 days of rejection. This will be without any appeal and shall
not be subjected to arbitration.

d)

Reinforcement bars received at site shall be stored on hard concrete

platform and clear of the ground with the use of timber sleeper, concrete
sleeper or suitable other means. Reinforcement material shall be kept
covered by tarpaulins or plastic to avoid excessive corrosion and other
contamination. It is advised to follow storage methods as described in
IS 4082 - 1977.

1.5.4 Fabrication of reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordance with the Drawing or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Bending shall be done mechanically or by
hand, to the correct radius, with proper tools and platform and shall conform to
IS 2502 - 1963. Bars shall be cold bent only. Material shall be inspected for
visible defects such as cracks, brittle, excessive rust, loose mill scale, etc.
Cracked ends of bars shall not be used in Works. Bars should be free from any
deleterious material and hence the best practice shall be to hose down
reinforcement just prior to concreting.
It is important that bending, straightening, cutting, etc. shall be carried out in a
manner not injurious to the material and the safety of the persons working
should be ensured.
1.5.4.1 Anchoring of Reinforcement
Anchoring of bars and stirrup shall be provided in accordance with the details
on the structural drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
1.5.4.2 Lapping of bar
Lapping shall be strictly as per the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. For
general guidance, the following principle shall be followed as given in IS 456 1978.
i) Splices shall be provided as far as possible away from sections of

maximum stress and be staggered.

ii) Not more than half of the total bars shall be spliced at a section.

CW- 43

iii) Where more than one half of the bars are spliced at a section or where

splices are made at points of maximum stress, special precautions shall be

taken, such as increasing the length of lap and/or using spirals or closely
spaced stirrups around the length of the splice.
iv) Lap length including anchorage value of hooks in flexural tension shall be

Ld (as defined in 23.2.1 of IS 456 - 1978) or 30 dia whichever is greater.

The straight length of lap shall not be less than 15 dia. or 200 mm., Where
Ld is the development as described in 23.2.1 of IS 456 - 1978.
v) When splicing of welded wire fabric is to be carried out, lap splices of

wires shall be made so that the overlap measured between the extreme cross
wires shall be not less than the spacing of cross wires plus 100 mm.
vi) The lap length in compression shall be equal to the development length in

compression, calculated as described in 23.2.1 of IS 456 - 1978 or as

specified in drawing but not less than 24 dia.
1.5.4.3 Spacing of bars
Bars shall be placed in position as shown in the drawing. Guidelines as given
in IS 456 - 1978 shall be followed or in case of difficulties as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
i) Horizontal distance between two parallel main reinforcing bars shall

usually not be less than the greatest of the following:

1. The diameter of the bar, if the diameters are equal;
2. The diameter of larger bar, if the diameters are unequal; and
3. 5 mm more than the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate (By

using reduced size of aggregate in congested reinforced area, conditions

given here of should be overcome.)
ii) When needle vibrators are used, the distance between bars of a group may

be reduced to two -thirds of the nominal maximum size of the coarse

aggregate, provided sufficient space is left between groups of bars to enable
the vibrator to be immersed.
iii) Where there are two or more rows of bars, the bars shall be vertically in

line and the minimum vertical distance between the bars shall be 15 mm,
two-thirds the nominal maximum size of the aggregate or the maximum
size of bar, whichever is more.

CW- 44

1.5.5 Cover to reinforcement

Reinforcement shall have concrete cover and the thickness of such cover
(exclusive of plaster or other decorative finish) shall be as noted on the
Drawings or, if not noted, as listed below:
At each end of the reinforcing bar, not less than 25 mm.
For a longitudinal bar in a column, not less than 50 mm.
For longitudinal reinforcing bar in beam, not less than 40 mm.
For tensile, compressive, shear or other reinforcement in slab, not less than
25mm.
v) For tensile, compressive, shear or other reinforcement in chajja, not less
than 40mm.
Concrete cover should not exceed 75 mm in any case.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)

1.5.6 Fixing in position

Correctly cut and bent bars shall be accurately placed in position as detailed in
the drawing. Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, reinforcement shall
be positioned within the tolerance as under:
i) For effective depth 200 mm or less, 5 mm
ii) For effective depth more than 200 mm, 10 mm

In no case shall the cover be reduced by more than 5 mm of that specified.

There shall be no compromise on cover for foundation work.
Reinforcing bars shall be held in position during the placing of concrete by use
of concrete cover blocks (made of equal strength of well-cured concrete in use)
or Steel chair spacers and secured by tying with an annealed binding wire of 16
to 18 gauges as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Precast concrete spacer blocks or spacer bars shall separate layer of bars.
Reinforcement shall be in correct position prior to start of concreting. No
reinforcing bar shall be placed on freshly laid concrete for adjusting bar
spacing. Care shall be taken to maintain reinforcement in position and keep it
clean, throughout the period till it is embedded in the concrete. For
maintaining cover, pieces of broken stone of brick or wooden blocks shall not
be used at any stage.
Galvanised binding wire used shall conform to IS 280 - 1978.
Welded joints or mechanical connections may not be used.
Where
reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent

CW- 45

back into their original position, care should be taken to ensure that at no time
is the radius of the bend less than 4 bar diameters in case of plain mild steel or
6 bar diameters for deformed bars. Care shall be taken when bending back
bars to ensure that the concrete around is not damaged/ disturbed.
1.6

Formwork
The materials, design, and construction of formwork (including bracing and
shoring) shall comply with the Indian Standard Code of Practice for false work
and below.
Specifically, forms for concrete work shall be so constructed and erected as to
resist the force exerted on them with the deflection at any point no greater than
three (3) mm. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of
mortar/grout.
The responsibility for the sufficiency of the whole of the formwork shall rest
entirely with the Contractor who shall engage a qualified Engineer experienced in
formwork construction methods to structurally design the formwork.
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of dressed timber or metal. Angle
fillets shall be used in the angles of side forms. The junction of soffit and side
forms shall be cast with a 25x25 fillet, and the top edge of the slabs and all
corners shall be cast with a 25mm x 25mm chamfer.
Forms shall be true to line and conform to the dimensions and levels shown on
the Drawings.
The interior surface of forms shall be oiled or greased with an approved nonstaining mineral oil prior to the placing of reinforcement, and any surplus
moisture shall be removed from the forms prior to concreting.
All deleterious material such as dirt, clay, wire, reinforcing bar, wood chips, etc.
shall be removed from the forms prior to concreting.
Should any formwork be displaced during concrete or within the periods
specified for the retention of formwork, the concrete shall be removed between
such limits as the Engineer-In-Charge may determine, construction joints shall be
formed and the section of work shall be reconstructed after the formwork has
been strengthened and adjusted.
Formwork shall remain in place for the minimum time as specified in IS: 456 1978 or as varied within this specification and shall be removed with care in
accordance with this code. Not withstanding this, side forms may be stripped
after the minimum time specified in IS: 456 - 1978 has elapsed (but in any case
not less than 24 hours) after the concrete has been poured, provided that the

CW- 46

surfaces exposed are immediately sprayed with an approved curing compound

and curing is carried out in accordance with this specification. Bottom forms
shall remain in place for 14 days after pouring or as otherwise approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
When forms are reused, their original shape, strength, rigidity, mortar tightness
and surface smoothness shall be maintained. All material previously used in
formwork must be cleaned off and oiled before reuse.
Formwork shall be constructed so as to ensure uniform quality and texture over
large areas, built to close tolerances and exhibit consistently good quality edge
and joint details.
1.7

Construction Loads
The Contractor should be aware that no additional reinforcement has been
allowed for construction loads arising out of the construction method. The
Contractor shall consider this in his construction process and advise the EngineerIn-Charge of his proposed details for ensuring the structure remains in a
structurally sound condition during the construction process. This can be
achieved by the use of forms or additional reinforcement.

2.

STEEL WORKS

2.1

Scope of Work

2.1.1 Scope of Specifications

This section shall apply to the fabrication and erection of steel structures for all
general purposes.
The work shall include the supply, delivery, off-loading and erection, and
unless otherwise stated, fastening and fittings of every type which are
described in or implied by this specification whether shown on the Drawings or
not, and shall include every detail required for the works complete in position
and in perfect state including shop drawings etc.
The works shall be generally as shown on the Drawings as to overall dimensions
and sizes.
2.1.2 Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of detailed working and shop
drawings and schedules of all structural steelwork. Fabrication shall not
commence until (1) set of the shop drawings has been returned to the Contractor
and stamped by the Engineer as approved for fabrication.

CW- 47

Shop drawings shall be in metric units and shall clearly show all sizes,
dimensions, markings, connections, splices etc. and shall set out the positions,
sizes and lengths of all welds as are necessary for the complete fabrication,
assembly and erection of the steelwork. Marking plans and sufficient elevations
shall be included in the shop drawings to define the positions of all members
detailed. Splices may be made only where shown on the approved shop drawings.
The Contractors in advance of the actual fabrication shall prepare shop Drawings.
These drawings should clearly distinguish between the shop and field bolts and
welds. A marking diagram allotting distinct identification marks to each separate
piece of steel work shall be prepared on the shop drawing. The shop drawings
shall be sufficient to ensure convenient assembly and erection at site. They shall
be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer-In-Charge for their scrutiny. One copy
will be returned within 14 days to the Contractor wi th the Engineer-In-Charges
comments for amendment of the drawings and re-submission till final approval.
The Contractor should provide for this period of submission and re-submission as
often as required, in determining the total contractual time for completion of
works. The Engineer-In-Charge will not scrutinise the shop drawings for
numbering off the components or for dimensional accuracy of fit. The shop
drawings shall have to be updated to incorporate changes and revisions during the
progress of the work and finally a triplicate set of As -Built drawings are to be
submitted.
No other substitutions in sizes or shapes of members shall be made without prior
approval and no variation to the details shown on the shop drawings shall be
made unless authorised by the Engineer-In-Charge. Minor details not shown on
the drawings shall conform to the relevant Indian code and to the approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
The Contractor shall note that the Engineer-In-Charge for general conformity
with the contract Drawings and Specification check shop drawings only. The
responsibility of all aspects of the fabrications remains with the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking closing dimensions and detail
where new work connects to existing. The Engineer-In-Charge for lack of fit will
consider no payment for extras.
2.2

Materials

2.2.1 Rolled Sections and Plates

All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of any one of the
following Indian Standards as specified.
IS800 - 1984

Code of Practice for General Construction Steel

CW- 48

 IS 2062 - 1992 (MTD) 4 Structural Steel (Standard quality/Fusion welding

quality) / Wieldable Structural Steel
IS 1975-1977
Structural Steel (Ordinary) Fe 410-0
ISP 6 (I) - 1964
Handbook for Engineers (Structural Steel Section)
IS 262 - 1975
Structural Steel (Standard Quality) 5 th Revision
Structural steel not conforming to the requirements of any of the above
standards may be used only if permitted in writing by the Engineer-In-Charge.
This permission may be granted after the steel is tested for yield point stress,
ultimate tensile stress, elongation, ductility, weldibility or any other property as
required by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The Contractor shall furnish a mill certified report, in triplicate, of the tests for
each grade of steel from which the material is to be fabricated. The
certification shall contain the results of chemical and physical tests required by
the specification for the material. In the event the results of any test are not in
conformance with the requirements of these specifications, the Engineer-InCharge reserves the right to make additional mill and laboratory tests. When
additional tests are required, the Contractor shall furnish, cut and machine
additional test specimens in accordance with I.S. requirements. The additional
costs of furnishing, cutting and machining additional test specimens shall be
borne by the Contractor.
The Engineer-In-Charge at his discretion may require conducting radiographic
and/or other non- destructive tests on material, welds and workmanship to ensure
that the requirements as described in the codes, specifications and drawings are
achieved. Any rectification and/or replacement of faulty material or workmanship
shall be at the Contractors expense. Remedial work shall not be carried out
without prior approval of the Engineer.
Costs of satisfactory testing shall be to the Employers expense. Costs of re-testing
areas, which are unsatisfactory, or of extensive testing to isolate unsatisfactory
areas will be charged to the Contractor.
2.2.2 Cold Formed Sections
Steel and strip used for making these sections shall conform to
*

IS 1079 - 1994

Specifications for light gauge structural quality hot

rolled carbon steel sheet and strip.

2.2.3 Bolts & Nuts

All bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of
*
IS: 1367 -1967
Technical supply conditions of threaded fasteners.
(First Revision)

CW- 49

All mild steel for bolts and nuts in accordance with IS: 1680-1960 Method for
Tensile Testing of Steel Products Other than Sheet, Strip, Wire and Tube and
IS: 1367-1960 Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners shall have
a tensile strength of not less than 44 kg/mm2, and a minimum elongation of 23
percent on a gauge length of 3.65A.
2.2.4 Washers
Plain washers shall be made of steel conforming to IS: 226-1962 Specification
for Structural Steel (Standard Quality) (Third Revision), or St 44-O of IS:
1977-1962 Specification for Structural Steel (Ordinary), or IS: 2062-1992
Specification for Structural Steel Fusion Welding Quality).
2.2.5 Electrodes
They shall conform to the requirements of the following Indian Standards as
specified.
*

IS: 814 - 1991

Specifications for covered electrodes for metal arc

welding of structural steel. Part 1 and 2.

IS: 816 - 1996

Classification and coding of covered electrodes for

metal arc welding of mild steel and low alloy hightensile steel.

IS: 822 - 1970

Code of procedure for inspection of welds.

The electrode to be used for all steel welding unless otherwise advised shall be
E6013 60 KSE UTS.
2.2.6 Filler Wire & Flux
The filler wire & flux combination for submerged arc welding shall conform to
the requirements for the desired application as laid down in IS 3613 - 1974,
Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for submerged arc welding.
2.2.7 Dimensions and Tolerances
The dimensions, form, weight, and tolerances of all hot rolled shapes (and
other members) shall conform to the following Indian Standards and other
relevant standards:
*

IS 1852-1985

Specifications for rolling and cutting tolerance for

hot rolled steel products.

IS 808 - 1989

Dimensions for hot rolled steel Sections

CW- 50

IS: 1730-1989

Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for

structural and general engineering Purposes.

IS 1732-1989

Dimensions for round and square steel bars for

structural & general engineering purpose.

IS 7215-1974

Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures.

2.2.7.1 Cold Formed Sections

The dimensions and tolerances of all cold formed light gauge structural steel
sections shall conform to Clauses 5 & 6 of IS: 811-1987, specifications for cold
formed light gauge structural steel sections.
2.2.7.2 Bolts, Nuts & Washers
The dimensions and tolerances of all bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the
requirements of the following Indian Standards.
IS 6639-1970

Specifications for hexagon bolts for steel structures.

IS 5624-1993

Specifications for foundations bolts

IS 6761-1994
socket.

Specification for countersunk head screws with hexagon

2.2.8 Welds and Welding

For requirements of welds and welding, reference shall be made as per IS: 8161969 code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction
in Mild Steel.
Other materials used in association with steel work shall, wherever appropriate
Indian Standard specifications for the materials exist, conform to such
specifications.
2.3

Fabrication

2.3.1 Workmanship
Workmanship shall be of the highest quality for all phases of the work.
Supervising engineers, welding supervisors and welders shall be qualified in
accordance with the Standards and Codes designated. The Contractor shall not
adopt any practice, which will damage materials.

CW- 51

The whole of the structural steel fabrications shall be done in the Contractors
workshop unless specific approval has been obtained from the Engineer for the
sub-contracting of any part of the work prior to the placing of the sub-contract.
All steel shall be new and each member shall be free from any butt-welded or
other form of splice for the full length between joints shown in or indicated by
the drawings unless such splice shall have been shown in the approved shop
drawings and/or approved in writing.
Steel sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings. Under no circumstances can any
other member size or type be made without the written approval of the EngineerIn-Charge who will consider only written application showing specified size and
dimensions and required substitute size and dimensions.
Clamps, magnets, holding devices or other setting up fixtures shall be used in
assembling structural members in order to avoid tack welding whenever
practicable.
Finished members shall be free from kinks or bends. Shearing shall be accurately
done, and all portions of the work neatly finished. Corners shall be square and
true, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Where shearing cannot make
re-entrant cuts, a rectangular punch may be used. Re-entrant cuts shall be
filleted, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. Approved dies
shall make bends, except for minor details, or bending rolls. Where heating is
required, precautions shall be taken to avoid overheating the metal and it shall be
allowed to cool in such a manner as not to destroy the original properties of the
metal. Hammer marks shall not be evident. Steel with welds will not be accepted,
except where welding is definitely specified, called for on the Drawings, or
otherwise approved. All bolts, nuts, and screws shall be tight. The ends of pipes,
except for hand railing, shall be reamed.
Fabrication in general shall conform to the requirements of IS 800-1984, Code of
practice for use of structural steel in general building construction
2.3.2 Strengthening
All materials before being laid off or worked shall be straight and free from twist.
If rectification is necessary, it shall be affected by cold working and applying
pressure, but not by hammering or any other method that will affect or injure the
metal. Material with kinks or bends shall be rejected.
2.3.3 Dimensional Tolerances for Structural Work
Dimensions shall be measured by means of an approved calibrated steel tape of
the same temperature as the structure at the time of measurement.

CW- 52

An allowable variation of 1 mm is permissible in the overall length of members

with both ends milled. Members without milled ends, which are to be assembled
to other steel parts of the structures, shall not deviate from the dimensions shown
on the drawings by more than 1.8 mm for members 10 meters or less in length,
and by not more than 3 mm for members over 10 meters in length.
The erection clearance for cleared ends of members connecting steel to steel
should preferably be not greater than 2.0 mm at each end. The erection
clearance at ends of beams without web cleats should be not more than 3 mm
at each end, but where, for practicable reasons, greater clearance is necessary,
suitably designed seatings should be provided.
2.3.4 Cutting
Cutting shall be affected by shearing, cropping, sawing or gas cutting and shall
be reasonably square and free from distortion with all burrs removed. If
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge the edges shall be ground afterwards.
For gas cutting high tensile steel, sufficient metal shall be left beyond the
required profile so that all metal that has been flame hardened cube removed
later by machining.
Except where the material is subsequently joined by welding, no loadtransmitting surface shall be gas cut.
Plates in built-up members shall be end and edge planed, except where flats
with square edges are used. Plates specified to be planed, milled or chipped,
shall be cut in the first instance to such size as to allow 3 mm to be planed,
milled or chipped, from the sides and ends.
Edges of gussets up to and including 8 mm in thickness may be sheared in a
machine, which can take the full side in one cut. Planing, milling or grinding
shall prepare edges of gussets of greater thickness.
Edge preparation for surfaces to be welded shall be carried out by grinding
planing but not shearing or cropping.
2.3.5 Drilling and Punching
a)

Holes through more than one thickness of material for members, such as
compound stanchion and girder flanges shall be drilled after the
members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted together.
Punching may be permitted before assembly, provided the holes are
punched 3 mm less in diameter than the required size and reamed, after
assembly, to the full diameter. The thickness of material punched shall
be not greater than 16 mm.

CW- 53

b)

Drilled or reamed holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the

surface. They shall not be more than 1.5 mm larger than the specified
diameter of bolts up to and including 25 mm in diameter.

c)

When holes are drilled in one operation through two or more separable
parts, these parts, when so specified by the Engineer-In-Charge, shall be
separated after drilling and the burrs removed.

d)

Holes in connecting angles and plates, other than splices, roof members
and light framing, may be punched full size though material not over 13
mm thick, except where required for close tolerance or barrel bolts.

e)

Matching holes for bolts shall register with each other so that a gauge of
1.5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be, depending on whether the
diameter of the bolt is less than or more than 25 mm) less in diameter
than the diameter of the hole will pass freely though the assembled
members in the direction at right angle to such members. Finished
holes shall be not more than 1.5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be) in
diameter larger than the diameter of the rivet or black bolt passing
through them, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer-In-Charge.

f)

Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a diameter equal to
the nominal diameter of the shank or barrel subject to H8 tolerance
specified in IS: 919-1959 Recommendations for Limits and Fits for
Engineering. Preferably, parts to be connected with close tolerance or
barrel bolts shall be firmly held together by tacking bolts on clamps and
the holes drilled through all the thickness at one operation and
subsequently reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all thickness
at one operation shall be drilled to a smaller size and reamed out after
assembly. Where this is not practicable, the parts shall drilled and
reamed separately through hard bushed steel jigs.

g)

A gas cutting process shall not form holes for bolts.

h)

All holes shall be free of burrs, fins and other defects

i)

No holes shall be drilled in structural members at locations other than

those indicated on the drawings unless approved in writing by the
Engineer-In-Charge.

2.3.6 Assembly
The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither
twisted nor otherwise damaged, and shall be prepared that the specified
combers, if any, are provided.

CW- 54

2.3.7 Bolts, Pins, Nuts and Washers

2.3.7.1 General
All bolts shall be of such a length that at least one full thread but not more than
12mm of the threaded part of the bolt is exposed beyond the nut, after the nut has
been tightened. Bolts shall comply with IS: 281 and IS: 3757.
All bolts shall be fitted with one washer under the nut. Where a nut or bolt bears
on an inclined surface, a levelled washer of the correct shape shall be used
between the surfaces. Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise
suitably shaped to give the heads and nuts of bolts a satisfactory bearing.
Bevelled washers shall not be allowed to move out of their correct positions
during fabrication and erection. No connection shall be made with less than two
bolts and both shall be not less than 16 mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated
on the drawing.
In all cases where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be developed, the bolt
shall be provided with a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut to avoid
any threaded portion of the bolt being within the thickness of the parts bolted
together.
2.3.7.2 Bolt Tightening
Bolts shall be "snug tightened" as defined as the tightness attained by a few
impacts of an impact wrench or by the full effort of a man using a standard
podgier spanner
Snug tightening shall be achieved by using a standard wrench to ensure intimate
positive contact between mating surfaces. Bolts, nuts and washers that are snug
tightened shall be hot dipped galvanised and centrifugally spun to remove excess
spelter.
2.3.8 Welding
2.3.8.1 Welding Steel
a)

All welders to be employed on the works shall be qualified to an

appropriate standard as per the procedures outlined in the relevant Indian
Standard. Testing of all welders shall be carried out before any work is
commenced. Only Welders who pass the test shall be permitted to work
only for those positions for which they were tested and passed.

b)

Welding shall be in according with the following Indian Standards as

applicable.

CW- 55

IS 816-1969

Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general

construction in mild steel.

IS 822-1970

Code of practice for inspection of welds

IS 1024-1979

Code for practice for use of welding in bridges and

structures subject to dynamic loading.

IS 1323-1982

Code of practice for oxy-acetylene welding for structural

work in mild steel.

IS 9595-1980

Recommendations for metal-arc welding of carbon and

carbon manganese steels.

c)

For welding for any particular type of joint, welders shall submit evidence
acceptable to the Engineer-In-Charge of having satisfactorily completed
appropriate tests as described in the following relevant Indian Standards.

IS: 7307-1974

Approval tests for welding procedure.

IS 7310-1974

Approval tests for welders working to approved

welding procedure.

Unless otherwise stated all welds shall be electric metal arc welds.
d)

All welding procedures shall be arranged, to suit the details of joints

indicated on the drawings. Welding shall be carried out shall be such as to
ensure that the weld metal is full and satisfactorily deposited throughout
the length and thickness of all joints.
Members to be welded shall be securely held in their relative position
during welding, either by jigs or tack welding.
Profile of fusion faces may be prepared by shearing, chipping, or gas
cutting. In all cases the faces should be dressed by chipping, filling or
grinding and made regular.
For thickness of metal 16 mm and above, electrodes used shall be
Supercito (E-7018) or equivalent. For thicknesses of metal below 16 mm
the root run shall be with Phillpe 31 (E 6010) electrodes, (or equivalent)
and subsequent runs shall be with Overchord - SS (E- 6013) electrodes (or
equivalent). The electrodes shall be dried in an electric oven as per the
recommendations of manufacturers. Only DC current shall be used for
welding and the Contractor shall make his own arrangements of all
welding power and for equipment.

CW- 56

Vertical down welding shall not be permitted. All welds shall be backgouged and welded from the backside unless specifically approved
otherwise.
All welds shall be carried out in such a sequence and manner as to cause
minimum distortion of the welded parts.
Multiple run welds shall be carried out with each run closely following the
previous run, but so that sufficient time is allowed for slag removal.
Welds shall on completion present an even, smooth and regular finish free
from defects. The weld metal shall be solid throughout with complete
fusion between weld metal and parent metal and between successive runs
throughout the joints. Caulking shall not be used to correct defects.
2.3.8.2 Surface Cleaning Prior to Welding
Surfaces to be we lded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and
other foreign materials. Surfaces need not be cleaned of Zinc Silicate primer if
present prior to welding.
2.3.8.3 Cleaning
Upon completion of each welding pass, the weld shall be cleaned of spatter, slag
and flux deposits. The weld must show a good clean contour and on a cut
specimen good fusion with the parent metal. After welding is complete, adjacent
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all spatter and deposits.
2.3.8.4 Size of Welds
All structural welds shall be continuous around all mating faces and edges of the
members being connected. If not detailed on the drawings welds shall be sized to
develop the full strength of the smaller of the two members being joined and not
less than 6mm.
2.3.8.5 Compatibility of Welds
All welds shall develop the strength and ductility specified for the steel being
welded. Welds forming connections between steel of different grades shall
develop at least the same unit strength as that specified for the higher strength
steel.
2.3.8.6 Automatic Welding
Automatic and semi-automatic welding processes may be employed provided
they are approved by the Engineer and conform to the requirements of these

CW- 57

specifications. All equipment for automatic and semi-automatic welding shall be

subject to approval by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Pre-heating will be required where any section thickness exceeds 30mm.
Requirements for, and method of, pre-heating shall be submitted to the EngineerIn-Charge for approval.
2.3.8.7Inspection
Upon completion of steel fabrication and before any surface treatment is applied,
the Contractor shall allow inspection of the steelwork by the Engineer-In-Charge
who may reject the steelwork if it fails to meet the requirements of this
Specification.
2.3.8.8 Following welding tests shall be carried out as per Engineer-In-Charges
directive.
1. Ultra Sonic test for fillet weld
2. Die testing on site
3. Radiography beam to beam joints 6 to 8 weld length
4. 3 segments top & bottom 6 x 2 (twelve)
2.4

Miscellaneous Metals

2.4.1 Fabrication
All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight,
sharply defined profiles, and smooth surfaces of uniform colour and texture and
free from defects impairing strength or durability.
Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand
stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Accessories and connections
to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless otherwise specified. Threaded
connections shall be made so that fitting conceals the threads.
Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded. The face of welds shall be
dressed flush and ground smooth. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and joined
where least conspicuous.
Pipe railing panels shall be straight and true to dimensions. Adjacent railing
panels shall align with a variation of not to exceed 1.5 mm. Joints shall be match
marked.

CW- 58

2.4.2 Finishes
All steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose mill
scale, rust, grease and foreign matter and shall be treated in the workshop prior to
transportation. If painted it shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall be
thoroughly and evenly spread and well-worked into joints and open spaces.
Abrasions in field erection shall be touched up (including primer) immediately
after erection.
Galvanised surfaces shall not be painted, unless noted otherwise. Refer to the
surface treatment section of the specification for details.
All aluminium exposed surfaces shall have satin finish, free from die markings,
scratches, welding discolourations, "leave -off-marks" or other surface blemishes.
Unless otherwise specified, aluminium shall be given an anodic oxide treatment.
It shall have a finish equal to IS 11857-1986 Anodised Coating Aluminium for
External Architectural Application. A coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be
applied to all aluminium before shipment from the factory.
All exposed stainless steel surfaces shall be polished finish, free from die
markings, welding discolorations or other surface blemishes. Relevant codes for
finishes above areas follow:
*

IS 1868 - 1992

Anodic coatings on aluminium and its alloys.

IS 9844 - 1981

Method of testing corrosion resistance of

electroplated and anodized aluminum coatings by
neutral salt spray test.

IS 11268 - 1985

Method for estimation of loss of absorptive power of

anodic oxide coatings after sealing dye spot test with
prior acid treatment for anodised aluminium and its
alloys.

IS 7088 - 1973

Recommended practice for anodising of aluminium

and its alloys.

2.4.3 Installation
The Contractor shall install all items furnished including items to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Items, to be attached to concrete or masonry after such
work is completed, shall be installed in accordance with the details shown.
Fastening with wood plugs in concrete or masonry will not be permitted.
All aluminium surfaces to come in contact with concrete or masonry shall receive
a heavy protective coating of bitumastic applied in a neat manner. All aluminium

CW- 59

surfaces to come in contact with dissimilar metals shall receive a heavy brush
coat of zinc - chromate primer followed by two coats of aluminium paint and a
fabric separator. The dissimilar metal surface shall receive two coats of an
approved paint. All procedures and applications shall be to the approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
2.4.4 Bolts and Nuts
Holding down bolts, with or without pipe sleeves, shall be in accordance with the
details shown and include washers and hexagonal nuts.
Screw and bolt anchors, that are not shown, shall be cinch anchors, rawl or of the
slug-in type. Anchors shall be minimum "two unit" type. Toggle bolts shall be
of the size indicated and shall be galvanised.
Bolt and nut threads shall be galvanised and shall conform to the aforementioned
codes.
2.4.5 Miscellaneous Shapes
Miscellaneous shapes shall include but not be limited to sump cover plates, floor
plates, angles, beams, fabricated plates, channels, bars and metal anchors for
embedment in concrete or masonry.
Miscellaneous shapes shall be of galvanised mild steel, unless stated otherwise.
All material shall be in accordance with the details shown or specified and
relevant I.S. codes shall be conformed with.
2.4.6 Stainless Steel
Stainless steel used in the buildings shall be Grade 316 unless noted otherwise.
The sections to be used shall be as shown on the drawings. All welded joints shall
be well buffed to match the finish of the stainless steel.
2.4.7 Dovetail Anchors
Anchor slots and anchors for anchorage of exterior masonry walls to concrete
shall be fabricated of 16 gauges galvanised sheet to the details indicated on the
drawings. Slots shall run continuously the height of the masonry walls and
anchors shall be installed between every third concrete and hollow brick block
course, unless noted otherwise. Grooves shall be provided with filler material
during concreting to prevent concrete from entering the anchor slot.
2.4.8 Chemical Anchors
The Contractor shall supply and install all chemical anchors shown on the
Drawings. Chemical anchors shall be Hilti - Masonry Rawl Plug anchors or

CW- 60

approved equivalent. Substitution with Dynabolt or expansion bolts shall not be

permitted. After completion of the drilling of the hole for the chemical anchor the
hole shall be cleaned of dust using compressed air.
2.4.9 Fastenings
Fastenings including anchors, lugs, screws, rivets and the like shall be of
approved type, appropriate to the work, capable of transmitting the loads and
stresses imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly. Fastenings
to aluminium, including aluminium alloys, shall be aluminium alloy or nonmagnetic stainless steel unless otherwise specified. Details are as follows:
Self tapping screws
Nails

:
:

Stainless steel
Aluminium

2.4.10 Steel Plate and Protection Angles

Steel plate and protection angles required for the protection of concrete work
shall be erected true to line and grade within the tolerances specified below. The
edges of exposed faces may have a vertical or horizontal distortion from a
straight line not greater than 3 mm per meter of length, provided, that distortion
for any single piece shall not exceed 1 mm and provided, that when the warp is
greater than 1.6 mm an extra anchor hole shall be drilled near the proper corner
and the piece drawn into position thereby. All bolt heads on the exposed face
shall be countersunk and fitted or ground so that the heads are flush with the
finished surface. Joints between abutting sections shall be square and flush and
the butting ends shall be sawed or otherwise made smooth and regular.
2.4.11 Sealing
All tubular, square and rectangular hollow sections shall be welded so as to
completely seal the internal sections against air and moisture. All ends will be
fully welded into adjacent members or capped with 6mm end plates as
applicable. To ensure this condition is met, the Engineer-In-Charge may require
the Contractor to carry out pressure tests on internal sections of any part of the
structures, at the Engineer-In-Charges discretion and Employers cost. The
Contractor at his cost will rectify any defective areas found by such test.
2.5

Surface Treatment
Following the completion of fabrication all steel shall be cleaned and protective
coated in accordance with the procedures specified in the Surface Treatments
Section of this specification.
Protective coatings damaged during the Contract shall be rectified as specified in
the Surface Treatments Section of this Specification and/ or to the approval of the
Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
CW- 61

All bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanised unless noted otherwise.
These and any other items as detailed on the Drawings and the Specification to be
hot dipped galvanised shall be in accordance with IS: 1239 (Part I and II) or an
equivalent approved standard.
2.6

Miscellaneous

2.6.1 Marking
The steel work shall be temporarily shop erected complete or as arranged with
the Project Engineer so that accuracy of fit may be checked before dispatch.
The parts shall be shop assembled with a sufficient number of parallel drifts to
bring and keep the parts in place.
2.6.2 Packing
Prior to transportation of the steelwork all projecting plates or bars, and all
ends of members at joints shall be stiffened. All straight bars and plates shall
be bundled, all screwed ends and machined surfaces shall be suitably packed.
All rivets, bolts, nuts, washers and small loose parts shall be packed separately
in cases so as to prevent damage or distortion during transit.
2.6.3 Inspection and Testing
The Project Engineer shall have free access at all reasonable times to those
parts of the Contractors works which are concerned with the fabrication of the
steel work. He shall be afforded all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself
that the fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with the provisions of
the Specification.
Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture prior to dispatch and shall be conducted so as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the work.
The Contractor shall guarantee compliance with the provisions of the
Specification, if required to do so by the Engineer.
Should any structure or part of a structure be found not to comply with any of
the provisions of the Specification, it shall be liable to rejection. No structure
or part of the structure, once rejected shall be resubmitted for test, except in
cases where the Engineer-In-Charge considers the defect as rectifiable.
Defects, which may appear during fabrication, shall be made good by the
Contractor with the consent of, and according to the procedure laid down, by
the Engineer-In-Charge.

CW- 62

The Contractor shall supply all gauges and templates necessary to satisfy the
Engineer-In-Charge. The Engineer-In-Charge may, at his discretion, check the
test results obtained at the Contractors works by independent tests at the
Government Test House or elsewhere.
2.7

Erection

2.7.1 Plant and Equipment

The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment used for erection shall
be to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge. Details of the proposed
equipment shall be submitted for approval 6 weeks prior to erection
commencing.
2.7.2 Storing and Handling
All structural steel should be so stored and handled at the site that the members
are not subject to excessive stresses and damage.
2.7.3 Setting out
The positioning and leveling of all steel work with accuracy shall be in
accordance with the approved Drawings, Specifications and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer-In-Charge.
2.7.4 Security During Erection
During erection, the steel work shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened
and, where necessary, temporarily bracing provided for all load to be carried
by the structure during erection including those due to erection equipment and
its operation.
No permanent bolting or welding should be done until proper alignment has
been obtained.
2.7.5 Field Connections
All field assembly and welding shall be executed in accordance with the
requirements for shop fabrication, excepting such as manifestly apply to shop
conditions only. Where the steel has been delivered painted, the paint shall be
removed before field welding, for a distance of at least 50 mm on either side of
the joints.
2.7.6 Painting After Erection
Prior to the painting of steel, which is delivered unpainted, commences, all
surfaces to be painted shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned from all loose scale
and rust.

CW- 63

The specified protective treatment shall be completed after erection. All bolt
heads and site welds shall be cleaned.
Where the steel has been surface treated in the workshop, the coating shall be
completed on site so as to be continuous over any welds and site rivets or bolts.
Bolts, which have been galvanised or similarly treated, are exempted from this
requirement.
Surfaces, which will be inaccessible after site assembly, shall receive the fullspecified protective treatment before assembly.
2.8

Transport, Handling and Storage

Steel shall be handled and transported with care, and in such a manner that parts
will not suffer strain, distortion or abrasion. The Engineer shall reject distorted or
damaged steelwork. All steel shall be stored above the ground and supported in
timber packers.
Lifting and handling of all steel, whether painted or not shall be done with
synthetic webbing flat slings or bagged chains. All slings shall comply with the
local work place, health and safety acts.
Under no circumstances shall unprotected chains be used for lifting steel.
Paintwork damaged during transport and erection shall be rectified as specified in
the Surface Treatment Section of the Specification.
Where large portal frames are being used, the flexibility of the frames requires
that care be taken when accepting delivery, stacking, lifting and erecting. It is
expected that a foreman competent and familiar with all aspects if lifting a large
portal frame be appointed to the site.
Beams and trusses shall be lifted such that bending occurs about the axis for
which the member was designed.

2.9

Grouting
Unless otherwise stated on the Drawings a space of not less than 25mm shall be
provided between undersides of column base plates and between all beam and
roof truss bearings, and concrete pads, footings etc.
After steel work has been wedged up to line and level fixed in position, the space
between steelwork and concrete shall be grouted with a mixture of Portland
cement and approved commercial grit or washed sand. The mix shall be of equal
proportion by volume of cement and sand (or grit) mixed with just sufficient
water to form a mixture of "damp earth" consistency, and shall be used within 20

CW- 64

minutes. The grouting mix shall be rammed to approval into the space between
steelwork and concrete and protected from damage until it sets.
3.0

Piling work

3.1.0 GENERAL
3.1.1 The construction of pile foundation shall confirm to the requirement of
IS 2911 [Part 1/Sec.2]
3.1.2 Piles shall be of diameter of 600mm dia. Cast in situ pile of about 20m deep to
be constructed by boring holes of required diameter by using Conventional
method through rock and socketing to the minimum depth of 3 times the pile
diameter be carried out.
3.1.3 The as cast diameter shall not be less than the specified dia of that pile.
3.1.4 Piles shall be constructed in such sequence that the previously constructed
piles are not affected by the construction of the subsequent ones. The
contractors shall indicate their proposed sequence of construction to the
Supervising Engineer and proceed with the work only on obtaining his
approval there to. Generally there should be a time interval of at least 24 hours
between completion of concreting of one pile and commencement of boring for
adjacent piles.
3.1.5 The eccentricity or shift of the piles from their the theoretical position shall not
be more than 75mm.Out of the plumb piles shall not be more than 2%. The
cost of the additional structural changes including driving of additional piles
due to excessive than admissible eccentricity shall be debited to the contractor.
3.1.6 The responsibility for the load carrying of piles will be of the contractor & he
shall give a performance Certificate for the same as acceptable to the R.C.C
Engineer-In-Charge.
3.2. MOBILISATION AND SETTING OUT
3.2.1 The contractor shall set out the entire work as per the line out drawing
furnished to the contractor and a base line actually set out at site as directed by
the architects. The entire lining out shall be checked by the Engineer-In-Charge
and got approved from the Architect in writing before the start of the work.
3.2.2 The contractor shall provide all the necessary plants & equipments required for
the work and contractor shall demobilize the same after the work is completed.

CW- 65

3.3 BORING
3.3.1 Boring in through whatever strata encountered up to required strata by using
Conventional method with approved equipments.
3.3.2 The tops of the bore holes shall be defined and stabilized by driving non
removable casings to a level below which boring can be continued without
them. The internal and not the external diameter of the removable casings, and
the diameter of the bore hole beyond the casings, both shall be such that the
pile reinforcement cage of specified diameter can be properly lowered into the
bore.
3.3.3 All bored material including mud shall be carted away & the site kept clean at
the contractors expense. This muck disposal shall be done simultaneously
while boring is in progress. The Engineer-In-Charge may stop the work if
muck accumulates at site and delay in completion of the work due to such
stoppage shall be to the contractors account.
3.3.4 It shall be contractors responsibility to stabilize the walls of bore holes by
using temporary casing.
3.4 TERMINATION OF PILE
The pile should be terminated at the depth as per soil investigation report or as
stipulated in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The
termination depth of pile should be properly checked referring to the R.L. of
the existing ground level.
3.5

REINFORCEMENT

3.5.1 Mild steel bars used shall confirm to I.S.432 and high yield strength deformed
bars shall confirm to I.S.1786.
3.5.2 Reinforcement shall be cut and fabricated as per the Consulting Engineers
drawing using 18G galvanized binding wire.
3.5.3 The main reinforcement bars shall be in one piece but if this length exceeds the
commercially available lengths then the overlapping equal to 60 times diameter
of the bar shall be provided and in addition the overlapping portion shall be
tack welded at three points to make overlap rigid.
3.5.4 Providing spiral stirrups shall hold the longitudinal reinforcement in the piles.
At the end of the spiral the text spiral shall overlap by two rounds and the
spirals shall be alternatively left handed and right handed.

CW- 66

3.5.5 All reinforcement shall be provided with proper specified cover. Providing
precast concrete circular disc shaped cover blocks with a hole in the center
shall ensure this cover. These shall be threaded on to the spiral stirrups.
3.5.6 The assembly of the fabricated reinforcement of the piles into a cage shall be
carried out on a level platform so as to maintain its linearity in the longitudinal
direction. The entire assembly shall be rigid and stable during handling and
placing.
3.5.7 The assembled cage of the reinforcement shall be carefully lowered into the
borehole by a crane or a hoist so that no muck or soil or other impurities fall
into the borehole.
3.6

CONCRETING OF PILES

3.6.1 a)

Concrete mix to the piles shall be of the proportion of 1 part of cement is

to 1 part of sand is to 2 parts of trap metal & water: cement ratio shall
not exceed 0.45. Workability may be improved by use of plasticisers or
water reducing admixture as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

b)

Concreting mix to the piles of dia 600mm dial shall be of proportion of

M25 designed concrete mix and water cement ratio 0.45.

3.6.2 Concrete shall be deposited in the pile using a termie pipe. A minimum
concrete height of 1 tm shall be maintained inside the termite over that of the
concrete in the pile. A minimum tremie penetration of 1 tm into the concrete
shall be ensured at all times so that during the up and down movement of the
tremie its bottom does not come out of the concrete in the pile. (Use of
tremie pipe is a must for concreting).
3.6.3 All piles shall be concreted to a level at least 1 pile dia . or 1 meter whichever
is more, higher than the specified cut-off- elevation of the pile. 1 in 20
piles shall be cast upto the ground level for perm visual inspection of the
overflow of concrete.
3.7

PILE TEST
Pile test shall be carried out as per IS 2911 part IV (1985) and as directed by
Engineer-In-Charge. The necessary test results must comply requirements of IS
2911 part IV (1985) and to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.

4.0

Precast Concrete
All aforesaid specifications for concrete shall apply to precast concrete in
addition to the following variations.

CW- 67

The concrete in one precast piece shall be placed in one operation. No piece
shall be removed from the mould or erected until sufficiently matured to ensure
that no damage shall be done to the piece.
All details of jointing, inserts, anchors and bearing widths shall be as shown on
the drawings.
All precast concrete members shall be clearly marked to indicate the top of the
member and its location.
Units shall be stored, transported and placed with due care so that they will not
be overstressed or damaged.
Precast units shall be adequately braced and supported during erection to
ensure proper alignment and safety, and such bracings and supports shall be
maintained until there are adequate permanent connections.

CW- 68

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR MASONRY WORKS

1.

The work in general shall be carried out as per the CPWD specifications.

2.

Work at all heights, depth and in all situations and to all shapes and profile and
all necessary works like staging, ladders, platforms, double staging etc. all as
required for proper execution of works.

3.

Hacking and roughening of concrete or other surfaces coming in contact with

masonry for bondage, cutting bricks / blocks, wastage etc.

4.

Raking out joints to specified depth either for plaster or pointing or finishing
the joints flush as the work proceeds, all as directed.

5.

Leveling up and preparing tops of walls for damp proof course, precast units,
plinth beams etc.

6.

Bedding and pointing wall plaster, lintels, sills etc. in or on walls, bedding and
painting doors, windows and like in cement mortar.

7.

Making openings for pipes, conduits, ducts etc. and closing the same after
completion of such works and finishing as directed.

8.

Providing at exact locations and to exact sizes pre-designated openings.

9.

Forming chases for edges for concrete floors or other units, for scaling in of
waterproofing layers etc.

10.

Providing cement concrete blocks (M150) at door jambs where required to

receive expansion bolts / holdfasts etc.

11.

Providing and building in holdfasts and / or inserts.

12.

Keeping the work well wetted for 10 days.

13.

Bricks / blocks to be wetted before use.

14.

Bailing out, pumping out or otherwise removing all water which may
accumulate from all causes.

15.

Making drip course, projected courses of any descriptions, offsets, set backs,
corbels, architraves or any other features as directed.

16.

Sampling and testing of any other material during the course of work as and
when directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
CW- 69

17.

Making good of all openings/pockets etc. if any, made by other agencies after
masonry work completion.

Masonry
i)

Brick Masonry
General : All brick work shall be carried out as shown on the drawings with
set backs, projections cutting, toothings, etc. Flat brick arches shall be provided
wherever required. Brick work shall be kept wet while in progress, till mortar
has properly set. On holidays or when work is stopped, top of all unfinished
masonry shall be kept wet. Should the mortar become dry, white or powdery
for want of curing, work shall be pulled down and rebuilt.
The bricks shall be of approved quality well-burnt, sound and of uniform
quality and colour, free from salt and of standard size, shall conform to I.S.I.
specification 1977, and shall be well wetted and soaked for at least 12 hours in
fresh water. The best available locally manufactured bricks as approved by the
consultants shall be used.
The brick work shall be built in English bond, with frog upwards. Each brick
shall be set with both bed and vertical joints filled with mortar as per I.S. 2250.
All horizontal joints shall be parallel and truly in level. The thickness of the
joints shall not exceed 10 mm. The joints of all the brick work shall be raked
out 10mm to receive plaster. Newly laid brick work shall be watered three
times a day for 10 days and afterwards twice a day for a month and shall be
protected from the effects of sun, rain etc. by suitable covering.
The brick work shall be set out and built to respective dimensions, thickness
and height shown on drawings. Bricks work shall be carried up in a uniform
manner, no one portion being raised more than 1.0 meter above another at one
time. Any dislodged bricks shall be removed and reset in fresh mortar. Before
commencing any brickwork, the Contractor shall confer with other trades to
ensure that all pipes, conduits, drains, sleeves, bolts, hangers or any other
materials necessary are installed in the brick work at the time it is built.
The mortar for brickwork shall be made from cement and sand (1:6) proportion
and shall be made in small quantities so as to be used within 30 minutes.
Whole of the masonry work shall be brought up at one uniform level
throughout the structure but where breaks are unavoidable, joints shall be made
in good long steps. All junctions of walls and cross walls shall be carefully
bonded into the main wall. The rate of laying masonry may be upto height of
60 cm. per day, if cement mortar is used, and 45 cm. per day, if lime mortar is
used.

CW- 70

During rains, the brickwork shall be carefully covered to prevent mortar from
being washed away.
ii)

Half Brick Masonry

Half Brick Masonry shall be set in cement mortar (1:4). Hoop iron bonds of 2
Nos. 6 mm dia. bars shall be used in every sixth course.

iii)

Concrete Block work

All blocks shall be dried for at least one month. The edges of blocks shall be
sharp and surface shall be free of honeycombing. Block work shall not be
raised more than one metre per day. All miscellaneous inserts like structural
lintels, anchors etc. shall be inserted by the Contractor at no extra cost.
The mortar for masonry work shall be (1:6). The thickness of the joints shall
not be more than 10 mm. The joints shall be raked by raking tools every day
for 12 mm deep thickness. The excess cement mortar lying on the floor shall
be reused within 30 minutes. The green block work shall be protected from
rain. The block work shall be cured for a minimum period of 8 days. All
masonry adjacent to openings shall be with solid block and voids if any shall
be filled in with situ concrete of 50 kg/cm2 strength. Block work shall be
carried out with double scaffolding only. Making holes of any kind for the
purpose of supporting the scaffolding shall not be allowed. The mixing of
mortar shall be done by measuring boxes only.

iv)

Uncoursed rubble masonry / coursed rubble masonry

All work shall be carried out as per CPWD specifications. The trap stone shall
be fixed in cement mortar 1:4. The joints shall be racked out wherever
pointing is to be done. The watering shall be done for seven days.

CW- 71

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORKS

1)

The works in general shall be carried out as per CPWD specifications

2)

Work at all levels, heights and to all situations and profiles.

3)

Double scaffolding, working platforms etc.

4)

Coving, drip-moulds, grooves, recesses, ornamental bands etc.

5)

Work in narrow widths and small quantities unless special provision is made to
the contrary.

6)

Preparation to the surfaces by raking out joints in brick or by hacking the

concrete surface and wetting the surface before plastering wherever required.

7)

Thickness of plaster exclusive of the thickness of key i.e. grooves and open
joints in brick work, stone work etc.

8)

Chamfers of any width, internal and external rounded angles and chases and
forming sharp and clean edges as shown.

9)

Curing, protection and cleaning of all surfaces.

10)

Keeping all plastered surfaces well wetted for at least 7 days.

11)

Making good of all openings/pockets etc. if any made by other agencies even
after plaster work completion.

i.

Cement Plaster / Neeru Plaster

The Cement mortar of (1:4) proportion shall be prepared in small batches and
applied to the wall surface/ceiling. To ensure proper thickness gauged patches
shall be made at 1.5m to 2.0m apart and surface plastered true to line level and
plumb taking special care to finish jambs of windows, doors, wall returns,
corners, junctions etc. A thin layer of neeru / cement shall then be applied and
rubbed into surface and finished by means of trowel until the surface is even
and smooth wherever specified. The surface shall be kept moist for seven days.

ii.

Sand faced plaster

The surface shall be prepared as above. The coat of cement mortar in
proportion of 1:4 or as specified, shall be applied uniformly all over the surface
to a thickness of 15 mm. and finished true to level and line and keys shall be
formed on the surface. The surface shall be kept moist till the finishing coat is
applied.

CW- 72

The finishing coat shall be applied a day or two after. The proportion of mortar
for finishing coat shall be 1 part of cement and 3 parts of sand, well graded and
washed and it shall be applied in a uniform thickness of 6 mm to 8 mm. Curing
shall start after 24 hours and the surface kept wet for 7 days. The base coat
cement mortar shall be inclusive of waterproofing compound at the rate of 1 kg
per bag of cement.
iii)

Sunk Cement Pointing

Sunk cement pointing in cement mortar 1:3 shall be done to uncoursed rubble
masonry work of compound wall. The work includes required scaffolding and
curing.

CW- 73

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTING &

POLISHING WORKS

1.

The work in general shall be carried out as per the CPWD specifications

2.

Works at all heights and use of all scaffolding, trestles, ladders, cradles etc.
necessary for execution of work and for inspection.

3.

Preparing surfaces to received finishing coats, such as brushing, preparing,

scraping, washing and rubbing etc.

4.

Puttying, sand papering and dusting of surface in between coats where

applicable.

5.

Work on cornices, narrow bands and widths, recesses, grooves etc.

6.

Finishing to approved matt texture and / or stipple finish etc. complete as

directed.

7.

Spreading and removing, covering to doors, window, floors, fittings, ducts,

pipes etc. to protect them from splashes.

8.

Washing floors, cleaning glass, joinery, electric fittings, ducts, pipes etc. and
leaving premises clean and tidy.

CW- 74

1.0

Lime Wash
Materials for lime wash shall be freshly burnt fat lime of good quality free
from un-burnt stone and other foreign matter dissolved in sufficient quantities
of water (4 to 5 litres per kg. of lime), stirred thoroughly and strained through a
clean coarse cloth. Clean gum or fevicol dissolved in hot water shall then be
added in the proportion of 2 gm of gum arabic per litre of lime to prevent lime
wash being removed when rubbed.
Surfaces shall be prepared by removing all mortar droppings and other
deleterious foreign matter and thoroughly cleaned with wire or fibre brushes to
the approval of the Engineer. Holes and/or depressions shall be stopped with
mortar and cured prior to lime washing.
Lime wash shall be applied by brush, the first stroke being from the top
downwards, the second from the bottom upwards over the first stroke and
similarly with strokes from right and left over the first strokes before they dry.
This application forms one coat and each coat shall be allowed to dry and shall
be subject to inspection by the Engineer before the next coat is applied. When
dry surfaces shall not show signs of cracking and present a smooth and
uniform finish free from brush marks, not easily removed when rubbed.
Patchy or streaky work will be rejected and shall be re-executed at the
Contractors own expense.
Doors, windows, floors, fittings, fixtures and the like shall be protected from
splashes, splashing and droppings, if any, being removed and surfaces
thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.0

Colour Wash
Colour wash shall consist of lime wash composed as described above to which
a solution of water and lime fast pigment, boiled if directed, shall be gradually
added and stirred until the required tinge is obtained to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Surfaces shall be prepared by removing all mortar droppings and other
deleterious foreign matter and thoroughly cleaned with wire or fibre brushes to
the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Holes and/or depressions shall be
stopped with mortar and cured prior to colour washing.
Colour wash shall be applied by brush, the first stroke being from the top
downwards, the second from the bottom upwards over the first stroke and
similarly with strokes from right and left over the first strokes before they dry.
This application forms one coat and each coat shall be allowed to dry and shall
be subject to inspection by the Engineer before the next coat is applied. When

CW- 75

dry surfaces shall not show signs of cracking and present a smooth and
uniform finish free from brush marks, not easily removed when rubbed.
Patchy or streaky work will be rejected and shall be re-executed at the
Contractors own expense.
Doors, windows, floors, fittings, fixtures and the like shall be protected from
splashes, splashing and droppings, if any, being removed and surfaces
thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.0

Plastic Emulsion Paint

Plastic emulsion paint shall be of approved make, colour and shade to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Plastic emulsion paint shall be diluted by the addition of a quantity of water
equivalent to half the volume of the paint to be applied. The paint and water
shall be thoroughly mixed and then strained through cloth.
Priming coats shall be applied to surfaces by brush and allowed to dry
properly, holes and depressions being filled with putty prepared with whitening
and plastic emulsion paint and rubbed smooth and dry and touched up with
plastic emulsion paint.
Subsequent coats, diluted by the addition of a quantity of water equivalent to
about 15% to 20% of the volume of paint to be applied shall be applied to
surfaces by brush and allowed to dry thoroughly so that no brush marks shall
be seen.
Surfaces shall be cleaned and all cracks, holes and surface defects repaired
with gypsum and allowed to set hard. All irregularities shall be removed by
sand papering smooth and wiped clean and surfaces so prepared shall be
completely dry and free from dust before painting is commenced. In the case
of newly plastered surfaces special care shall be taken to ensure that they are
completely dry before any application is attempted.
Existing, previously distempered or painted surfaces shall be cleaned of grease,
dirt, dust and other deleterious matter and cracks, holes and surface defects
repaired with plaster of Paris, allowed to set hard, sand papered smooth and
wiped clean. Flaking from previous coatings, if any, shall be thoroughly
removed.

4.0

Waterproof Cement Paint

Waterproof cement paint shall be Snowcem plus or other equal and approved
make of approved colour and shade to the satisfaction of the Engineer brought
to Site in original air-tight containers with seals intact.

CW- 76

Dry cement paint shall be thoroughly mixed with clean fresh water to produce
paint of the required consistency to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge
and strained through a paint strainer. Paint shall be constantly stirred during
application and applied within the specified or recommended time hardened or
damaged paint not being allowed to be used.
Paint shall be applied by brush, each coat being properly cured and inspected
and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the application of each
subsequent coat.
Absorbent surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted so as to provide even
absorption. In dry weather freshly painted surfaces shall be kept damp for at
least two days and protected from direct sunlight.
Surfaces shall be free from dirt, dust, grease and other deleterious matter and
thoroughly cleaned by brushing and washing down with clean water.
Existing lime wash and/or water bound distemper shall be thoroughly removed
by washing, brushing and, if necessary, accumulated coats of oil paint removed
by brushing and/or scraping and washing to obtain clean and even surfaces.
Roughcast and pebbledash surfaces shall be thoroughly brushed and washed to
remove dust, dirt, grease and other deleterious matter.
5.0

Oil Painting
General
Oil paint shall conform to the relevant Standards and be of the specified make,
colours and shades as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Materials shall be
obtained directly from approved manufacturers and brought to Site in
manufacturers sealed drums and tins for inspection by the Engineer-inCharge.
Paint for undercoats and finishing coats shall be ready mixed. Mixing by the
Contractor shall not be allowed except with the prior written permission of the
Engineer-in-Charge, in which case preparation of the ingredients and the
control of quality shall be in strict conformity wi th the manufacturers
recommendations and the relevant Standards and Codes of Practice.
Materials shall be properly stored and protected when not in use with the lids
of containers kept tightly closed. Paint in open containers during painting
operations shall be covered with a thin layer of turpentine to prevent the
formation of skin on the surface.

CW- 77

If required by the Engineer-in-Charge paint supplied by the Contractor shall be

quality tested in an approved laboratory as described in IS 101. Rejected paint
shall be removed immediately from Site.
Application
Unless otherwise specified, paint may be applied by brush or spray. Brushes of
appropriate size shall be either round or oval shaped and shall be maintained
carefully throughout the work so as to be pliable and free from loose bristles.
All brushes, rollers, implements and the like used for painting shall be cleaned
of all foreign matter prior to beginning different operations.
Contents of drums and tins shall be well stirred before use and constantly
during operations with a small, clean and smooth stick to prevent
sedimentation at the bottom of containers.
Painting shall be carried out, as far as possible, in dry, warm weather.
Primer coats shall be applied as soon as surfaces have been cleaned and before
the deterioration of surfaces by rust and/or contamination by dust, dirt or any
other deleterious material. Sufficient time shall be allowed for one coat of paint
to dry before the next is applied.
Painted surfaces shall be protected from sun, rai n, condensation, contamination
or other surface damage until they are completely dry, Wet Paint boards
being placed where necessary.
Surface preparation, the application of priming coats, undercoats and finishing
coats shall be carried out as specified below or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
New plaster shall be carefully rubbed smooth and thoroughly cleaned with
fresh water to leave dry and smooth surfaces free from dirt. Surfaces shall not
be primed or painted until they are completely dry and hard and have been
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Steel surfaces shall be degreased using proprietary brand solvent cleaners
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge or mineral turpentine or petroleum and
other petroleum solvents, such as trichloroethylene or other equal and
approved alkali solutions or detergents.
De-rusting of steel surfaces shall be done by manual scraping using wire
brushes, fine steel-wool, sand paper and the like, mechanically by sand
blasting, shot blasting or by flame cleaning or chemical cleaning by methods
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

CW- 78

Oil paint shall not be applied to woodwork that is not well seasoned. Surfaces
of woodwork to be painted shall be thoroughly dry, clean and smooth and
prepared by using coarse and medium grade sandpaper with finished surfaces
free from scratches.
Before applying primers to surfaces of woodwork knotting shall be done with
two coats of varnish made by dissolving Shellac in methylated spirits of wine
or as directed by the Consultant.
Plastered surfaces : Priming coats shall consist of equal parts of white and red
lead mixed in boiled linseed oil to the required consistency applied uniformly
over surfaces to be painted. When dry, all cracks, holes and other such defects
shall be filled with a mixture of one part of white lead and 3 parts of ordinary
putty. Surfaces shall then be rubbed with sandpaper and dusted clean and an
undercoat thinly applied so that plastered surfaces are saturated.
Steel surfaces : Priming coats shall consist of red lead conforming to IS 102
applied uniformly over surfaces to be painted. On old or previously painted
surfaces and new surfaces already primed with red lead, surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and primed with red lead on exposed surfaces as necessary
or over whole surfaces as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Woodwork surfaces : Priming coats shall consist of red lead, white lead, raw
and boiled linseed oil and patent dryers applied uniformly over surfaces to be
painted. When dry, small holes, cracks, open joints and other minor defects
shall be stopped with putty made from whitening mixed to proper consistency
with raw linseed oil and white lead to facilitate hardening of putty. Surfaces
shall then be lightly rubbed down smooth with sandpaper and dusted clean. All
necessary surface preparation on woodwork to be done with water cutting to
receive enamel painting of 1 st quality.
Finishing coats : Unless otherwise specified, finishing of all surfaces shall
consist of two coats of paint of approved make, colour and shade. The second
coat of paint shall give a flat, semi-glossy or glossy finish as specified or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall present on even appearance and
show no brush marks. Stipple finishes, if directed by the Engineer-in-Charge,
shall be provided at no extra cost.
6.0

Enamel Painting
General
Enamel paint shall conform to the relevant Standards and be of the specified
make, colours and shades as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Materials
shall be obtained directly from approved manufacturers and brought to Site in

CW- 79

manufacturers sealed drums and tins for inspection by the Engineer-inCharge.

Paint for undercoats and finishing coats shall be ready mixed. Mixing by the
Contractor shall not be allowed except with the prior written permission of the
Engineer-in-Charge, in which case preparation of the ingredients and the
control of quality shall be in strict conformity with the manufacturers
recommendations and the relevant Standards and Codes of Practice.
Materials shall be properly stored and protected when not in use with the lids
of containers kept tightly closed. Paint in open containers during painting
operations shall be covered with a thin layer of turpentine to prevent the
formation of skin on the surface.
If required by the Engineer-in-Charge paint supplied by the Contractor shall be
quality tested in an approved laboratory as described in IS 101. Rejected paint
shall be removed immediately from Site.
Application
Unless otherwise specified, paint shall be applied by brush. Brushes of
appropriate size shall be either round or oval shaped and shall be maintained
carefully throughout the work so as to be pliable and free from loose bristles.
All brushes, rollers, implements and the like used for painting shall be cleaned
of all foreign matter prior to beginning different operations.
Contents of drums and tins shall be well stirred before use and constantly
during operations with a small, clean and smooth stick to prevent
sedimentation at the bottom of containers.
Painting shall be carried out, as far as possible, in dry, warm weather.
Primer coats shall be applied as soon as surfaces have been cleaned and before
the deterioration of surfaces by rust and/or contamination by dust, dirt or any
other deleterious material. Sufficient time shall be allowed for one coat of paint
to dry before the next is applied.
Painted surfaces shall be protected from sun, rain, condensation, contamination
or other surface damage until they are completely dry, Wet Paint boards
being placed where necessary.
Surface preparation, the application of priming coats, undercoats and finishing
coats shall be carried out as specified below or as recommended by the
manufacturer.

CW- 80

New plaster shall be carefully rubbed smooth and thoroughly cleaned with
fresh water to leave dry and smooth surfaces free from dirt. Surfaces shall not
be primed or painted until they are completely dry and hard and have been
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Steel surfaces shall be degreased using proprietary brand solvent cleaners
approved by the Engineer or mineral turpentine or petroleum and other
petroleum solvents, such as trichloroethylene or other equal and approved
alkali solutions or detergents.
De-rusting of steel surfaces shall be done by manual scraping using wire
brushes, fine steel-wool, sand paper and the like, mechanically by sand
blasting, shot blasting or by flame cleaning or chemical cleaning by methods
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Enamel paint shall not be applied to woodwork that is not well seasoned.
Surfaces of woodwork to be painted shall be thoroughly dry, clean and smooth
and prepared by using coarse and medium grade sandpaper with finished
surfaces free from scratches.
Before applying primers to surfaces of woodwork knotting shall be done with
two coats of varnish made by dissolving Shellac in methylated spirits of wine
or as directed by the Consultant.
Plastered surfaces : Priming coats shall consist of equal parts of white and red
lead mixed in boiled linseed oil to the required consistency applied uniformly
over surfaces to be painted. When dry, all cracks, holes and other such defects
shall be filled with a mixture of one part of white lead and 3 parts of ordinary
putty. Surfaces shall then be rubbed with sandpaper and dusted clean and an
undercoat thinly applied so that plastered surfaces are saturated.
Steel surfaces : Priming coats shall consist of red lead conforming to IS 102
applied uniformly over surfaces to be painted. On old or previously painted
surfaces and ne w surfaces already primed with red lead, surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and primed with red lead on exposed surfaces as necessary
or over whole surfaces as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Woodwork surfaces : Priming coats shall consist of red lead, white lead, raw
and boiled linseed oil and patent dryers applied uniformly over surfaces to be
painted. When dry, small holes, cracks, open joints and other minor defects
shall be stopped with putty made from whitening mixed to proper consistency
with raw linseed oil and white lead to facilitate hardening of putty. Surfaces
shall then be lightly rubbed down smooth with sandpaper and dusted clean. All
necessary surface preparation on woodwork to be done with water cutting to
receive enamel painting of 1st quality.

CW- 81

Finishing coats : Unless otherwise specified, finishing of all surfaces shall

consist of two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make, colour and
shade. The second coat of paint shall give a flat, semi-glossy or glossy finish
as specified or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall present on even
appearance and show no brush marks. Stipple finishes, if directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall be provided at no extra cost.
7.0

French Polishing
Materials
French spirit polish shall conform to IS 2338 and shall be made by dissolving
0.15 kg of best quality shellac, free from resin or dirt, in 1 litre of methylated
spirit. Suitable pigment shall be added to obtain the required shade or colour.
Workmanship
Surfaces to be polished shall be cleaned and all unevenness rubbed smooth
with sandpaper, knots, if visible, being covered with a preparation of red lead
and glue. Holes and indentations in surfaces shall be filled with putty made of
whiting and linseed oil. Surfaces shall then be given a coat of filler comprising
2.25 kg of whiting dissolved in 1.5 litres of methylated spirit. When dry
surfaces shall again be rubbed down perfectly smooth with sandpaper and
wiped clean.
Polish shall be applied by using pieces of clean fine cotton cloth wrapped
around cotton wool made into pads. Pads shall be moistened with polish
sparingly, but uniformly, and completely over the entire surface. When dry a
further coat shall be applied in the same way. Finishing shall be carried out
with pads covered with a fresh pieces of clean, fine cotton cloth, slightly
dampened with methylated spirit, rubbing lightly and quickly with a circular
motion, to give a uniform, high class texture.

8.0

Texture Paint
The cement based textured wall finish in two coats of approved design &
colour shall be provided to external face of structure over plastered surface.
The surface texture shall be got approved from Engineer-In-Charge. Before
applying texture paint, the surface shall be cleaned properly. The entire work
shall be carried out as per the specifications of manufacturer by skilled worker
and as per the instructions of Engineer-In-Charge.

CW- 82

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING &

WALL LINING / VENEER WORKS
1

GENERAL

1.1

The Engineer-in-Charge or his representative may, if required, visit the source

of supply of the various stones to assess the quality as well as availability of
the material in the required quantities. The Contractor shall bear the cost of
such visits of the Engineer-in-Charge / Consultant.

1.2

For the circular or curved profile, nothing extra shall be payable for labour,
material, wastages and any other incidental charges.

1.3

For the skirting in the enclosures with curvilinear profiles, the tiles / stones
shall be cut to the required size and the shape to match the profile and/ or the
joints as per the architectural drawings. Similarly, the skirting shall be fixed in
a manner as to flush or project from the finished face of the wall as per the
architectural drawings and as directed by the Engineer in Charge. Any
chasing of the C.C masonry / blocks required for such fixing shall be done by
the Contractor. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

1.4

For flooring work, the joints between the different types of flooring shall be
located as per the architectural drawings and the measurement shall be done
under the respective flooring items. Also, the Contractor shall maintain the
uniform level of the finished flooring of the different types unless specifically
mentioned on the architectural drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on
these accounts.

1.5

Wherever flooring is carried out in combination with different types of stones

as per the architectural drawings, for the purpose of payment, the actual area of
the each type of the stone shall be measured separately under relevant items.
Nothing extra shall be payable on account of any consequent wastage,
incidental cost etc. on this account.

1.6

The samples of all the stones and tiles are available in the office of the
Engineer-in-Charge. The tenderers are requested to inspect the same before
quoting the rates in the tender to make themselves familiar with the quality of
the material to be provided in the work.

2.

GRANITE WORKS

2.1

The granite stonework shall, in general, be carried out as per the CPWD
Specifications. The specifications for dressing, laying, curing, finishing,
measurements, rate etc. for the granite stone flooring shall be same as that of
works for the Marble flooring, skirting and risers of steps under Flooring Sub
Head of the CPWD Specifications. The wall lining / veneer work with granite
stone shall be as per the CPWD Specifications for Marble work Sub Head.

CW- 83

2.2

Granite stone tiles and slabs shall be pre polished (mirror polished), eggshell
polished, flame finished or given any other surface treatment as specified, as
per the Architectural drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.3

Machine polishing and cutting to required size shall be done with water (as
lubricant) only. Sawing shall also be done preferably with water as lubricant
but as a special case, the Engineer-in-Charge may permit, at his discretion, oil
or kerosene as lubricant subject to all kerosene or oil in the body and surface of
tiles / slabs being thoroughly dried in ovens. Tiles / slabs with stains or
patches due to the use of oil or otherwise, either before or after installation,
shall be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

2.4

Granite stone slabs shall be individually packed in cardboard paper. These

shall be handled carefully to prevent any damage .The stone slab procured
shall be free of any surface defect or any edge damage. The damaged stones
shall not be allowed to be used in the work. So the Contractor shall procure
additional such quantities, to cover such contingencies. However nothing extra
shall be payable on this account .The stone slabs shall not be waxed or touched
up with dyes / colours.

2.5

The granite stone slabs to be procured for the work shall match the samples
shown to the Contractors before submission of the tenders. Before starting the
work, the Contractor shall procure and submit the samples of granite stone slab
(matching to the samples shown to the Contractors before submission of the
tenders) for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The samples shall be
submitted along with the following details:
a)

Three representative samples for each type of granite stone specified.

b)

Details of physical characteristics such as dimensional tolerances

(within the specified limits), water absorption, compressive strength,
Mohs Hardness, Specific gravity with reference to IS or International
standards.

c)

Source of supply and confirmation of availability in full quantity and

uniformity of colour, tone and textures.

d)

Company profile of Suppliers.

e)

Procedure for fixing including samples of fixtures such as cramps, pins,

dowels etc.
The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as regards the approval of the
samples for the various types of the granite stones shall be final and
binding on the Contractor. No claim of any kind whatsoever shall be
entertained from the Contractor on this account. The Contractor shall
then procure and get the mock up prepared at site of work for approval

CW- 84

of quality of workmanship and the granite stone as specified. The mock

up shall be prepared in lift lobby, toilet etc. on one of the floors. The
size of the stones shall be as per the architectural drawings. If the
quality of the workmanship and the material is as per the required
standards, the mock up shall be allowed as part of the work and
measured for payment and shall not be dismantled. Otherwise, it shall
be dismantled by the contractor as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge
and taken away from the site of the work at his own cost. Nothing extra
shall be payable on this account.
2.6

The entire supply for each type of granite stone slab shall be procured from one
location (in one quarry), and supplied preferably, in one lot to keep variations
to the minimum. The Contractor shall also segregate and sort the slabs
according to colour, shade, texture and size of grains etc. to keep variation(s) in
stones used at any one floor to the minimum. Any slab with variation in the
colour, shade, texture and size of grains etc., not acceptable to the Engineer-inCharge, shall not be used in the work and shall be removed and replaced by the
Contractor. Nothing extra shall be payable on these accounts. Also no claim of
any kind shall be entertained from the Contractor on this account.

2.7

The stone work may be required to be carried out in patterns, design and / or in
combination with granite stones of different colour and shade with or without
borders and in combination of different stone slabs / ceramic tiles for which
nothing extra shall be payable. The stones shall be provided in sizes and shapes
as per the architectural drawings and wastages and incidental costs, if any,
shall be deemed to be covered in the cost of the relevant items. Nothing extra
shall be payable on this account.

2.8

The following tolerances shall be allowed in the dimension of granite stone

slab :
Slabs:
a)
b)
c)
d)

Length
Width
Thickness
Angularity at corners

Tolerance
1mm
1mm
1mm
0.25%

The stones (slab and tiles) not meeting the above tolerance limits shall be
rejected and not permitted to be used in the work.
2.9

Stones slabs shall have uniform thicknesses with in the tolerance limits and
linear items like treads, sills and jambs, coping, risers, urinal partitions, kitchen
/ wash basin platforms, vanity counters, facias and other similar locations etc.
shall have calibrated thickness i.e. exposed edges shall have uniform thickness
throughout the length of the work.

CW- 85

2.10

The flooring work shall be carried out as per the architectural drawings in
design and pattern (geometric, abstract etc.) and in linear and / or curvilinear
portions and in combination with stones of different colour and shade and
ceramic tiles etc. For the flooring portions curved in plan, the stone slabs (at
the edge) shall be cut to the required profile and shape as per the architectural
drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account and any consequent
wastages and incidental charges on such accounts shall be deemed to be
included in the cost of such items.

2.11

For the steps (risers and treads) in the linear profile, the granite stone shall be
provided in single pieces up to 2.0m as per the architectural drawings, unless
otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. Wherever
required, the joints shall be provided as per the architectural drawings. Nothing
extra shall be payable on this account.

2.12

For the granite stone work in treads and risers of steps at the entrance to the
building from the ground to the plinth level shall be provided as per the
architectural drawing, using tread stones and riser stones in the profiles of the
steps shown in the architectural drawings. Based on the architectural drawings
and the actual dimensions at site, the contractor shall first prepare shop
drawings. However, the length of the granite stone slabs shall generally be not
less than 1.2 metres unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-in-Charge
specifically to match the architectural details.

2.13

The granite slabs used for providing and fixing in the sills, soffits and jambs of
doors, windows, ventilators and similar locations shall be in single piece unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Wherever stone slab other than
in single piece is allowed to be fixed, the joints shall be provided as per the
architectural drawi ngs and as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. In
the cabin areas, the joints in sills shall preferably be provided in line with the
partition wall. Depending on the number of joints, as far as possible, the stone
slabs shall be procured and fixed in slabs of equal lengths as per the
architectural drawings and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge / Consultant.

2.14

While fixing the granite slabs in sills, soffits and jambs of doors, windows,
ventilators etc., rebates shall be made by overlapping the stones at the required
places for fixing shutters for doors, windows and ventilators etc. as shown in
the architectural drawings and as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge /
Consultant. Epoxy based adhesives shall be used for fixing the granite stones
to each other, as per the manufacturers recommendations. Any extra mortar
thickness required due to the overlap arrangement shall be deemed to havebeen
included in the item. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account. The cut
exposed edges of the granite stones shall be polished / moulded as per the
architectural drawing.

CW- 86

2.15

The granite stone slab shall be fixed for wash basin counters as shown in
drawing. The stone shall have uniform thickness and shall be provided in sizes
as per the architectural drawings. The stone slab shall have uniformly leveled
surface after fixing. All the joints shall be finished smoothly in a workmanlike
manner. The necessary cutouts for fixing wash basins shall be provided in
granite.

2.16

The edge moulding / nosing/ polishing to the cut exposed edges of the granite
stone slab to be used in flooring, skirting, dado, sills, jambs, soffits, risers,
treads etc. shall be provided in a workmanlike manner as per the architectural
drawings.

2.17

The granite work shall be adequately protected by a layer of Plaster Of Paris,

which shall be maintained throughout and removed just before handing over of
the works for which nothing extra shall be payable.

2.18

Wherever the granite stone slab dry cladding is provided exposed to

environment, both the surfaces of the granite stone slabs shall be treated to
make the surfaces hydrophobic by applying one or more coats of water
repellant / hydrophobic clear coating of water soluble siliconate based
impregnating agent DC 777 of Dow Corning or equivalent brand. The
formulation shall be prepared and applied as per the manufacturers
recommendations. Before applying the formulation the surface preparation
shall be done as per the manufacturers recommendations.
The stainless steel pins / anchors / cramps shall be provided for fixing granite
as shown on drawing.
The surface shall be cleaned using water and the formulation shall be applied
on the damp surface.

CHINA MOSAIC FLOORING WORK

3.1

The China Mosaic tile pieces shall be hard, sound, dense and glossy in texture.
These shall be of required colour and shade and free from stains, cracks, decay
and weathering.

3.2

The Contractor shall procure and submit the samples of the material for
approval of the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge before taking up the work.

3.3

The work shall be carried out as per the architectural drawings in design
(geometric, abstract etc.) and in linear and / or curvilinear pattern and in
combination with tile pieces of different colour and shade. Nothing extra shall
be payable on this account.

CW- 87

3.4

Before laying China Mosaic flooring on RCC slabs / PCC base, the laitance
shall be removed and the surface shall be roughened. A coat of cement slurry
@ 2.2 kg of cement per sqm shall be applied over the base surface for bonding
between RCC slab / PCC and base mortar of the China Mosaic flooring.

3.5

A coat of white cement as specified in the item shall be applied over the mortar
base (admixed with water proofing compound conforming to IS 2645 and of
approved make @ 200 ml per bag of cement. The tile pieces shall then be
fixed in such a manner that the finished china mosaic flooring shall be true to
the required level, slopes and pattern of design as per the architectural
drawings and as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. Care shall be
taken to keep the joint thickness to the minimum.

3.6

After fixing the tile pieces, the mixture of white cement and marble dust in the
ratio 1:2 (1 white cement: : 2 marble dust) by weight, admixed with water
proofing compound @ 200 ml per bag of cement (the cost of the water
proofing compound shall be paid under relevant item) shall be filled in
between the gaps of laid tile pieces. The filled surface shall then be trowelled
over, pressed and brought to the level of the laid tile pieces. The whole surface
area shall be cleaned and cured.

3.7

The Contractor shall ensure that the China Mosaic work provides
waterproofing treatment and shall not allow penetration of water. The
guarantee for the water proofing work at the terrace shall also include
restoration of the China Mosaic work after rectification, if any to the integral
cement based waterproofing treatment to the terrace. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account.

4.

GLASS MOSAIC DADO WORK

4.1

The work shall be carried out as per the manufacturers specifications. The
Contractor shall obtain and submit to the Department the manufacturers
certificate for compliance of the material as per the manufacturers
specifications and also a copy of the manufacturers test report for the record.
The Glass Mosaic tiles shall be S A Series of Italia or equivalent approved
make, of approved colours and shades. The size of the glass mosaic tiles shall
be generally 20mm x 20mm x 4mm, and joint width of about 1.80 mm, all as
per the architectural drawings. The Contractor shall procure and submit the
samples of the tiles for approval of the Engineer-in-charge before taking up the
work. The work shall be carried out in patterns and designs in combination of
tiles of different colours and shades, fixed in linear as well as curvilinear
profile, as per the architectural drawings.

4.2

Before fixing the glass mosaic tiles on the surface, the surface shall be cleaned
properly and cement mortar shall be applied as per the item description and
shall be sponge finished without any scratches, in true plumb and level.

CW- 88

Thereafter, the glass mosaic tiles shall be fixed with polymer modified
cementitious adhesive (minimum 2 mm thick) with white star of BAL
ENDURA adhesive or equivalent including grouting the joints with polymer
modified grout of required colour and shade. The tiles in the required pattern
shall be laid with random mix of tiles (in combination of tiles of different
colours and shades) as per the architectural drawings and as per the directions
of Engineer-in-Charge / Consultant.
5.

GLAZED / CERAMIC TILE FLOORING AND DADO:

5.1

Glazed / Ceramic tiles, of 1st quality, of approved manufacture of required size,

colour and shade (pastel colours) shall be used in the flooring work. The tiles
shall conform to IS 13755.

5.2

Glazed / Ceramic tiles, of 1st quality, of approved manufacture of required size,

colour and shade (pastel colours) shall be used in the dado work. The tiles shall
conform to IS 13753.

5.3

The Contractor shall procure and submit the samples of the tiles for flooring as
well as dado work, of required colour, shade, design & make for the approval
of the Engineer-in-charge prior to the execution of the item. The mock up for
the dado work shall be as specified above for the granite stone work

5.4

The entire material shall be procured preferably, in one lot from one of the
approved manufacturers to avoid any variation in the colour, shade and design
of the tiles. Any tile with variation in the colour, shade and design, not
acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge, shall not be used in the work and shall
be removed and replaced by the Contractor. Nothing extra shall be payable on
this account.

5.5

The Contractor shall obtain and submit to the Department the manufacturers
certificate for compliance of the material as per the manufacturers
specifications and also a copy of the manufacturers test report for the record.

5.6

The tiles shall be transported to site well packed in boxes. These shall be
handled carefully to prevent any damage. The tiles procured shall be free of
any surface defect, edge damage and any other such defects. The defective /
damaged tiles shall not be allowed to be used in the work. So the contactor
shall procure additional quantity of tiles to cover such contingencies. However
nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

5.7

The work shall be carried out as per the architectural drawings and as per the
directions of the Engineer-in- Charge / Consultant. The work may be carried
out in design and pattern in linear as well as curvilinear portions of the
building, as per the architectural drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on
account of any wastage, incidental costs etc.

CW- 89

5.8

The flooring / dado should be set out such that the perimeter / corner tiles are
in excess of half a tile so that the edge panels on both the sides are of equal
sizes, as far as possible. The tiles shall be cut to required size and shape in a
workman like manner but with all precautions as per the manufacturers
specifications.

5.9

For dado / skirting work, the tiles shall be chamfered at the meeting edges on
the corners in a manner that butt edges are not visible. It shall be ensured that
the edges shall be ground / filed to chamfer the edges so that the glazing layer
at the edges of the tiles is not chipped off otherwise the work shall be rejected
and redone by the Contractor at his own cost.

5.10

Adequate care shall be taken before installation as well as afterwards till

handing over the building for occupation. The flooring / dado shall be free of
any scratches, stains etc. at the time of handing over. Abrasive cleaners shall
not be used to clean the marks.

5.11

The preparation of base surface, laying, measurements, rates, frequency of

testing shall in general be as that of Glazed tile flooring & dado as per CPWD
Specifications.

KOTA STONE FLOORING

6.1

The work shall in general be carried out as per the CPWD Specifications
and as per the architectural drawings.

6.2

The Contractor shall procure and submit the samples of the kota stone for
flooring as well as risers and treads in the staircase, for the approval of the
Engineer-in-charge prior to the execution of the item. The mock up for the
work shall be as specified above for the granite stone work.

6.3

All the Kota stones shall have uniform green colour and shade .So the entire
quantity shall be obtained, preferably, in one lot from one location (in one
quarry) to keep variation to the minimum. The Contractor shall also sort,
segregate and use the stone slabs, according to colour, shade, etc. at any one
floor to keep variation in the colour, shade etc. in stones used to the minimum.
The stone slabs shall not be waxed or touched up with dyes / colours. Any
stone slab with a variation, not acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge, shall not
be used in the work and shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his
own cost. Nothing extra shall be payable on these accounts. Also no claim of
any kind shall be entertained from the Contractor on this account.

6.4

The Kota stone slabs to be provided for steps of the staircase shall be in one
piece and shall have machine cut edges. The granite inlay in tread shall be
provided in each step as shown in the architectural drawings. Nothing extra
shall be payable on this account.

CW- 90

6.5

The Kota stone procured shall be free of any surface defect or any edge
damage. The damaged stones shall not be allowed to be used in the work. So
the contactor shall procure additional quantity of the stone to cover such
contingencies. However nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

6.6

The edges of the kota stone slab in skirting, risers and treads of steps shall be
calibrated, i.e., the exposed cut edges shall be of uniform thickness (with in the
tolerance limits for thickness) throughout the length of the work.

6.7

The exposed cut edges of the Kota Stone slab in risers and treads along its
width (sides of the risers and treads of the steps i.e. along the shorter
dimensions of the kota stone slab for the risers and treads) shall be polished in
a workmanlike manner. The top exposed edge of the kota stone skirting shall
also be polished in a workmanlike manner. Nothing extra shall be payable on
this account.

6.8

Nosing / edge moulding shall be provided to the front edge of the Kota stone
slab treads along its length i.e. along the longer dimensions of the kota stone
slab, as per the architectural drawings.

7.

INDIAN PATENT STONE

Selection of materials, method of mixing, placing and compacting shall
generally conform to the specifications under plain and reinforced cement
concrete. A stiff mix consistent with workability shall be used.
Preparation of surface
Before the operation for laying topping is started the surface of base concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles, caked mortar droppings
and laitance if any, by scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush. Where the
concrete has hardened so much that roughening of surface by wire brush is not
possible, the surface shall be roughened by chipping or hacking at close
intervals. The surface shall than be cleaned with water and kept wet for 12
hours and surplus water shall be removed by mopping before the topping is
laid.
Laying
The screened strips shall be fixed over the base concrete dividing it into
suitable panels. Before placing the concrete for topping neat cement slurry
shall be thoroughly brushed into the prepared surface of the base concrete just
ahead of the finish. Concrete of M-15 proportion and thickness shall be laid in
alternate panels to required level and slope and throughly tamped.

CW- 91

Finishing Surface
After the concrete has been fully compacted it shall be finished by trowelling
or floating with neat cement rendering. Finishing operations shall start shortly
after the compaction of concrete and the surface shall be trowelled three times
at intervals so as to produce a uniform and hard surface. The satisfactory
resistances of floor to weat depends largely upon the care with which
trowelling is carried out. The time interval allowed between successive
trowelling is very important. Immediately after placing cement rendering, only
just sufficient trowelling shall be done to give a levelled surface. Excessive
trowelling in the earlier stages shall be avoided as this tends to bring a layer
rich in cement to the surface. Sometimes, after the first trowelling the duration
depending upon the temperature, atmospheric conditions and the rate of set of
cement used, the sur face shall be retrowelled to close any pores in the surface
and to bring to surface to scrap off any excess water in concrete or laitance. No
dry cement shall be used directly on the surface to absorb moistures or to
stiffen the mix. The final trowelling shall be done well before the surface
becomes too hard but at such a time that considerable pressure is required to
make any impression on the surface.
If directed by the Engineer-In-Charge, approved mineral pigment shall be
added to the rendering to give desired colour and shade to the flooring at no
extra cost.
The topping shall be rendered with 1:2 cement mortar with a suitable mineral
pigment, if directed, instead of cement only. The flooring shall be machine
polished as per Engineer-In-charges instructions.
Ironite topping
Instead of finishing the, top with rendering coat of 1:2 cement mortar, the top
shall be finished with 12mm, thick ironite toping. Unless otherwise specified,
one part of ironite and four parts of ordinary cement by weight shall be mixed
thoroughly dry. This dry mixture shall be mixed with stone grit 6mm and down
size or as otherwise directed the ratio of 1:2 by volume and well turned over.
Just enough water shall be added to this dry mix and mixed thoroughly well
and laid to uniform thickness of 12mm and compacted. After initial set has
started the surface shall be finished as directed.
8.

PEBBLE FACED CEMENT TILES:

Pebble faced cement tiles of required size shall be fixed on 1:4 cement mortar
bedding. The tiles shall be got approved from the Engineer-In-Charge. The
flooring shall be cleaned after completion of the flooring work.

CW- 92

9.

STONE WORK FOR WALL CLADDING

The required size stone shall be fixed over a 12 mm thick bed of cement mortar
1:6. The stone work shall start from bottom level maintaining equal joints
between the stones and filled up with 1:4 cement mortar. The stone work shall
be sunk pointed 1:2 cement mortar with pigment machine the colour of stone.
The entire work shall be carried out in line and level to the approval of
Engineer-In-Charge as per the mock-up for the said work.

10.

VINYLE FLOORING / SKIRTING

2 mm thick vinyle flooring / skirting of approved make and shade shall be laid
in required pattern and design, laid in linear as well as curvilinear portion, all
complete as per the drawing fixed using VC 3 Acrylic Glue of Pidilite
Industries Ltd. or equivalent adhesive as per the manufacturers specifications
on the existing I.P.S. floor. The work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of
Engineer-In-Charge in all respect.

11.

LOCAL STONE FLOORING, CLADDING

Local stone Maw-Thup / Maw-Jeen of approved type of required size, hand
dressed shall be used for flooring and cladding work. The joints between the
stone shall be provided with 1:2 cement mortar / grass joints and fixed over 1:6
cement mortar bedding / consolidated ground as shown. The work shall be
carried out as directed by Engineer-In-charge.

12.

VITRIFIED CERAMIC TILE FLOORING & DADO WORKS:

Vitrified Ceramic tiles, of 1st quality, of approved manufacture with nominal
size of 600 x 600 mm of required colour and shade (pastel shades) shall be
used in the work. The tiles shall conform to ISO 13006 / EN 176 Group BIa.
However, the dimensional tolerance of the vitrified tiles shall be 0.10% in
length, 1.0% in thickness, 0.1% in rectangularity, 0.1% in surface
flatness.
The Contractor shall procure and submit the samples of the tiles, of required
colour, shade, design & make, for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge prior
to the execution of the item. The mock up , protection etc. shall be as specified
above for the granite stone work.
The entire material shall be procured preferably, in one lot from one
manufacturer to avoid any variation in the colour, shade and design of the tiles.
Any tile with variation in the colour, shade and design, not acceptable to the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall not be used in the work and shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor.

CW- 93

The Contractor shall obtain and submit to the Department the manufacturers
certificate for compliance of the material as per the manufacturers
specifications and also a copy of the manufacturers test report for the record.
The tiles shall be transported to site well packed in boxes. These shall be
handled carefully to prevent any damage. The tiles procured shall be free of
any surface defect, edge damage and any other such defects. The defective /
damaged tiles shall not be allowed to be used in the work. So the contactor
shall procure additional quantity of tiles to cover such contingencies. However
nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
The work shall be carried out as per the architectural drawings and as per the
directions of the Engineer-in- Charge / Consultant. The work may be carried
out in design and pattern in linear as well as curvilinear portions of the
building, as per the architectural drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on
account of any wastage, incidental costs etc.
The flooring / dado should be set out such that the perimeter/ corner tiles are in
excess of half a tile so that the edge panels on both the sides are of equal sizes,
as far as possible. The tiles shall be cut to required size and shape in a
workman like manner but with all precautions as per the manufacturers
specifications.
The floor tiles shall be laid to required pattern with 3 mm space between the
tiles using approved spacers as recommended by the manufacturers. After
allowing 3 to 4 days wet curing, the joints shall be filled with polymer
modified cementitious grouts with polymer modified cementitious adhesive of
BAL ENDURA or equivalent approved brand and with pigments of approved
colour and shade as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The excess grout shall
be wiped off with a damp sponge after fifteen minutes of application.
Adequate care shall be taken before installation as well as afterwards till
handing over the building for occupation. The flooring shall be free of any
scratches, stains etc. at the time of handing over. Abrasive cleaners shall not be
used to clean the marks.
The preparation of base surface, laying, frequency of testing shall in general be
as that of Glazed tile flooring & dado as per CPWD Specifications.

CW- 94

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR

WOOD WORK, FACTORY MADE DOOR SHUTTERS:
A

WOOD WORK

1.1

The woodwork in general shall be as per the CPWD Specifications.

1.2

The wood shall be selected best quality second-class teak wood.

1.3

The work shall be carried out in accordance with the architectural drawings
issued by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge. The architectural drawings shall
at all times be properly correlated and architectural requirements have to be
fully satisfied.

1.4

All the wood used for the manufacturing of the door shutters including the
door frames, internal & external lipping, beading for fixing glazing etc. shall
be seasoned as per the requirements of the CPWD Specifications.

1.5

The surface of the frames abutting the masonry or concrete and the portion of
the frames embedded in floors shall be given Solignum or equivalent
treatment as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The care shall be taken that
the treatment does not streak and does not come over to the exposed face of the
wooden frames; otherwise the woodwork shall be rejected and redone by the
Contractor at his own cost. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

1.6

All the screws used for woodwork shall be fully threaded, counter sunk brass
oxidised and they shall be suitably concealed or plugged.

1.7

All the hinges to be used for fixing shutters shall be brush finished brass
oxidized hinges of the make as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The sizes
and the number of the hinges per shutter shall be as per the schedule of
drawings.

1.8

The glue used for the joinery work in the woodwork, for ply wood board, for
fixing the laminates/ veneers etc. shall be PVAc based adhesive, Fevicol SWR
of Pidilite Industries Ltd., or Korlok-472 of National.

1.9

The fittings such as hinges handles, locks, lock cum latch, door closer, floor
door stopper, panic bar, tower bolts etc. along with necessary brass oxidized
screws shall be provided. If any damage is caused to the fittings and the
screws, the same shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and of the same specifications and
brand of manufacture.

CW- 95

1.10

Veneers and Laminates

1.10.1 The work in general including testing etc. shall be carried out as per the CPWD
specifications and IS 1328 except for the wood species.
1.10.2 Each type of laminate and veneer shall be obtained from only one of the
approved manufacturers as specified and in one lot. Adequate spare quantity
shall be ordered to cover for any damaged sheet and for replacement by the
Contractor till the completion of the work.
1.10.3 The laminates shall be made out of superior quality paper impregnated with
melamine and phenolic resin and shall have scratch/ wearing resistant
melamine plastic surface. The laminates shall be resistant to boiling water,
stain and chemicals.
1.10.4 The veneers shall be natural wood decorative veneers made out of hard and
durable quality wood. The grains and colour of the veneers shall be well
matched and there shall not be any visible variations. The thickness of the
veneers shall not be less than 0.4 mm.
1.10.5 The Contractor shall ensure that the edges of the laminates do not come out or
chip / peel off during cutting and fixing of the laminates. Defective work on
this account shall not be accepted and shall be redone by the contractor at his
own cost.
1.10.6 The wooden lipping, laminates, veneers, beadings etc. shall be fixed to the
plywood board using high strength cross linked PVAc based adhesives,
Korlok 472 of National or Fevicol SWR of Pidilite Industries Ltd.
B

FACTORY MADE DOOR SHUTTERS:

1.1

Factory made doors shall be procured from one of the approved manufacturers
as specified. The Contractor shall, within a period of one month after the issue
of letter for commencement of work, intimate the name of manufacturer from
whom, the factory made shutters for doors are to be procured.

1.2

The work shall be carried out in accordance with the architectural drawings. The
architectural drawings shall at all times be properly correlated and architectural
requirements have to be fully satisfied.

2.0

SPECIFICATION FOR SHUTTERS:

2.1

The factory made flush door shutters shall be ISI marked. For the flush door
shutters with laminate and veneer, flush door shutters shall conform to ISI
parameters except for laminate and veneer. The material used for manufacture
of shutter shall be as follows: -

CW- 96

2.1.1 TIMBER: As specified in the items and conforming to I.S: 2202 (Part-I). The
Contractor shall obtain the species of timber to be actually used by the
manufacturer of the shutters and submit the same for the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
2.1.2 The face panel shall be of BWP grade ply conforming to IS-2191 (Part-I).
2.1.3 The shutters shall have external lipping of second class teak wood of minimum
10mm thickness. The veneer / laminate shall mask the external lipping as per
the details given in the architectural drawings. For the shutters fixed on floor
springs, the thickness of the external lipping shall be 20mm including
moulding and making necessary grooves as per the architectural drawings. The
lipping shall be fixed using adhesive as specified and shall be factory pressed.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
2.2

SEASONING AND PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT:

2.2.1 Timber shall be kiln seasoned by a suitable process conforming to IS: 1141
before being planed to the required sizes.
2.2.2 The maximum permissible moisture content in timber shall be 10 percent
except for frames where it can be upto 12%.
2.2.3 The preservation of timber shall be done with Copper-Chrome-Arsenic
composition as per IS-401 with minimum absorption of preservative as 6.5
Kg/cum of treated timber.
2.3

DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES:

The shutters shall be supplied as per the specified size with allowable tolerance
of 3mm over the specified dimension for which no extra payment shall be
made. No tolerance on the lower side will be allowed on the overall
dimensions of shutters. The manufacturing tolerance of individual members of
shutters will be +/- 1mm in thickness and +/- 2 mm in width.

3.0

INSPECTION:
The Contractor shall get fabricated six shutters of each type of door and give a
written intimation to the Engineer-in-Charge who shall arrange for the visual
inspection of the samples at the factory premises. The samples inspected by the
Engineer-in-Charge or his representative shall be signed by him as a mark of
identification. These inspected samples of each type shall be delivered by the
Contractor at site. Contractor should give notice , 10 days in advance before
every consignment is ready at factory site for inspection and testing at factory
site before dispatch. The final approval of the door and windo w shutters is
subject to testing as per Para 4.

CW- 97

4.0

TESTING:

4.1

In any consignment all the shutters of the same type and size and manufactured
under similar conditions of production shall be grouped together to constitute a
lot. Samples shall be selected and inspected separately for each lot for
determining its conformity or otherwise, to the requirement of the
specifications.

4.2

NUMBER OF TESTS AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY:

4.2.1 The numbers of shutters to be selected for inspection / testing from a lot shall
be as in the table given below:

LOT SIZE

FOR CHECKING DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCE

CONSTRUCTION, WORKMANSHIP AND
FINISH
Sample size

26 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
151 to 300
301 to 500
501 to
10000
1000 to
above

SAMPLE
SIZE FOR
TESTING OF
MATERIAL
S.

Permissible no. of
Defective shutters

5
8
13
20
32

0
0
1
2
3

1
1
1
2
4

50

80

10

4.2.2 The sample size indicated in column 2 of table shall be inspected for
dimensional tolerance, construction and workmanship and finish. A lot shall
be considered as having satisfied the requirements of the specifications in these
respects, if the number of defective shutters in the sample does not exceed the
corresponding permissible number of defective shutters given in column 3 of
the table above. If the number of defective shutters exceeds the permissible
number of defective shutters, the lot as a whole shall be rejected and the
Contractor shall have no claim whatsoever on this account.
4.2.3 The sample size as per column 4 of table shall be tested in an approved test
house. The timber shall be tested for the moisture content (IS- 1708) and
preservative treatment (IS-401 and other relevant IS standards). A lot shall be
considered as having satisfied the requirements of the specifications in these
respects only if all the tests are satisfactory. If any sample fails to meet the
CW- 98

requirements of the specifications in respect of any test, the whole lot shall be
rejected and the Contractor shall have no claim whatsoever on this account.
4.3

The cost of sample, packaging, sealing and transportation of samples to the

laboratory, shall be borne by the Contractor. Testing charges shall be borne by
the Contractor.

4.4

Flush doors shall be tested as per IS-4020

TYPES OF DOORS
All doors shall be provided as per the detailed drawings with ironmongery as
specified and as instructed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

D)

MIRROR WITH TEAK WOOD MOULDING

Approved type of 4 mm thick glass mirror shall be provided in the toilet blocks
above washbasin as per the size specified. Teak wood second class moulding
shall be provide d all around the mirror as shown on drawing. Mirror shall be
fixed to the wall with stainless steel screws.

CW- 99

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR METAL WORKS

1.

The work in general shall be carried out as per the CPWD specifications.

2.

All steel work, shall confirm to IS-800 and rolled steel to IS-226 AND IS-1977.
All pressed steel sections shall be heavy duty.

3.

Supplying all materials, fabricating, hoisting and fixing in position complete

with expansion fasteners, coach screws, hold fasts, screws etc.for R.C.C.

4.

Glazing should be as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

5.

Supplying and fixing all hardware of specified and approved type and make,
confirming to standard practices followed by approved manufacturer.

6.

Door, rolling shutters, fire doors shall be fabricated from manufacturer,

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

7.

Members joints shall be mechanically cut to length, mitered and electrically

welded with true corners.

8.

Providing Silicon sealant in gaps between frames and masonry / concrete faces
after erection.

9.

Painting with a coat of zinc chromates primer and three coats of synthetic
enamel paint of approved make including supplying putty to obtain even and
smooth finish.

10.

Before fabrication, the contractor must take approval of the Engineer-in-Charge

for type of sections, hardware, glass etc. to be utilised. Contractor should take
actual measurements at site and fabrication shall be done accordingly.

11.

Providing necessary coupling, transomes and mullions wherever required as per

relevant I.S. Code (I.S. 1038).

Steel Doors, Rolling Shutters, M.S. Grills, etc.

Steel used in the manufacture of rolled steel sections shall not have more than 0.060
per cent of sulphur and 0.065 percent phosphorous. The carbon content shall not
exceed 0.30 percent and steel shall be of weldable quality. In all other respects, the
rolled steel sections shall conform to IS 226 and IS 1977.
Frames shall be square and flat. Both the fixed and openable frames shall be
constructed of section which have been cut to length, mitered and electrically welded
at corners. Subdividing bar units shall be tenoned and riveted into the frames. All
CW- 100

frames shall have the corners welded to a true right angle and welds shall be neatly
cleaned off. Coupling, mullions, transome and weather bar shall be provided as
directed by Consultants.
Outer frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in the web of the sections
and fixing screws and lugs shall be used for fixing the frame to masonry. Mastic
cement shall be used for making the joints watertight.
Hinges shall be strong projecting type. If directed friction type hinges shall be used in
which case windows shall not be fitted with peg stays.
Projecting type hinged shutter shall be fitted with bronze or brass peg stays, 30 cms.
long with pegs and brackets welded/riveted to the frame.

ROLLING SHUTTERS
Shall be of approved manufacture suitable for fixing in the position ordered i.e.
outside, inside, or below lintel or between jambs.
Shutters upto 12 sq.m. in area shall be manually operated or Push up type while
bigger sizes shall be of reduction gear type, mechanically operated by chain or
handles.
These shall consist of 18 gauge sheet or as specified with 75mm M.S. laths of best
quality mild steel strip machine rolled and straightened with an effective bridge depth
of 16mm, and shall have convex corrugation. These shall be interlocked together
throughout their entire length with end locks. These shall be mounted on specially
designed pipe shaft.
The springs shall be of approve d make coiled type. These shall be manufactured from
tested high tensile spring steel wire or strip of adequate strength to balance the
shutters in position. The spring pipe shaft etc. shall be supported on strong M.S. or
malleable cast iron brackets.
Top cover of shaft, spring etc. shall be of the same material as lath. Both side guides
and bottom rail shall be jointless and of single piece of pressed steel. For rolling
shutter with wicket gate night latch shall be provided free of cost.
The shutter, cover etc. shall be painted with one coat of anticorrosive paint and two
coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.

CW- 101

Barbed wire fencing

Galvanised iron barbed wire at 200 mm centre to centre roll of dia 600 mm shall be
fixed to M.S. frame work of compound wall as shown on the drawing. The barbed
wire shall be fixed to framework by galvanized wires.

CW- 102

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR

STRUCTURALLY GLAZED ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, CURTAIN
WALL WITH CURTAIN GLAZING, ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE
PANEL CLADDING AND LOUVERS, FULLY GLAZED DOORS /
PARTITIONS.
GENERAL
In general, the work of curtain wall with curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel
cladding and louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed
partitions shall be carried out as per the specifications given below:
1.0

SCOPE OF WORK:
The scope of work under this sub-head includes structural analysis and design,
preparation of shop drawings, setting out, fabrication, supply, installation,
aligning, fixing and protection of the curtain glazing, aluminium composite
panel cladding and louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully
glazed fixed partitions etc. It also includes performance testing and guarantee
for the works under this sub head as described above, for the system, materials
and performance requirements, for a period of 3 years from the date of
completion of the work. For executing the work, the contractor shall associate
with / engage specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator as approved by the
Engineer-in-charge. The specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator should have
satisfactorily completed atleast 3 similar works of curtain wall (including
curtain glazing and aluminium composite panel cladding) each costing not less
than Rs. 50 lacs during the last three calendar years ending June 2006.
The work under this section includes cost of all inputs of labour, materials
including wastages, T &P, equipments, cranes or cradles, scaffolding, other
enabling temporary structures and services and all other incidental charges, if
any, not specifically mentioned here, but as required for complete design,
engineering, fabrication, assembling, delivery, anchorage, installation,
protection of curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding and
aluminium louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed
partitions etc. and making the curtain glazing , aluminium composite panel
cladding, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions
etc. water tight, all complete, all in accordance with the true intent and
meaning of the specifications and the drawings taken together, regardless of
whether the same may or may not be particularly shown on the drawings and /
or described in the specifications , provided that the same can be reasonably
inferred there from. The curtain wall with curtain glazing, aluminium
composite panel cladding and aluminium louvers,
structurally glazed

CW- 103

aluminium
windows,
fully
glazed
fixed
partitions
shall
have framing which shall be structurally and mechanically designed to achieve
the architectural elevations as well as performance parameters specified herein.
Anchorage shall include all supporting brackets & anchor fasteners, as required
to rigidly secure the structural framing to the RCC / Masonry / structural steel
members of the building.
The curtain wall with curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding and
louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions
etc. described hereafter shall include but will not necessarily be limited to the
following:
a.

Frames, fixed vision panels, spandrels, hard wares, open able panels, as
indicated in the drawings inclusive of all accessories and fittings. The
scope of work also includes replacement of any defective and / or
broken glass panes [single, laminated or Insulated Glazed Units (IGUs)]
( breakage not attributable to vandalism or accident), evident due to
condensation or dirt between the lites, failure of seal and damage to
internal glass panes, staining, damage to the soft coating etc. for a
period of 3 years from the date of completion of work for which nothing
extra shall be payable. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge as regards
for reason for breakage of glass shall be final and binding on the
contractor.

b.

Glass wool Insulation panel (shadow box), fire stop( barrier) - cum smoke seals, splice plates, connectors, sleeves, anti-buckling clips etc.

c.

Aluminium louvers, wherever indicated in the drawings, along with the

required framework.

d.

Access panels and inspection of lightening protection and test clamps

including ironmongery and accessories to all the openable panels of
curtain glazing, structurally glazed aluminium windows etc.

e.

Structural, weather and other silicone sealants within and all round the
perimeter of all the work under this sub head for fabricating IGUs,
holding the glass to the aluminium & glass to glass and to provide water
tightness to the curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding,
structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions
etc.

f.

Ozone resistant EPDM / silicone gaskets, trims, shims, setting blocks,

double sided spacer tape, spacer blocks, weathering strips etc.

CW- 104

g.

All caulking, sealing and flashings including sealing at junctions with

the building members.

h.

All brackets, anchor fasteners, screws, inserts, nuts, bolts & washers,
and attachments required for complete installation and fixing to the
RCC, Masonry and / or the structural steel members of the building.

i.

All accessories, fasteners, screws, nuts and bolts, toggles, rivets etc. and
other items implied in the drawings and the specifications though are
not specifically indicated or mentioned here.

j.

Isolation of all dissimilar metal surfaces as well as moving surfaces by

use of TEFLON (PTFE) separators.

k.

Aluminium composite panel cladding, coping, soffit, ceiling, canopy,

trimmers etc. as per the drawings.

l.

Engineering proposals, design, drawings and Architectural data.

m.

Shop drawings, engineering data and structural calculations (analysis &

design) of all systems including aluminium structural framing, fasteners,
sealants etc.

n.

Scheduling and monitoring of the work.

o.

Cost of all samples of the individual components for testing, mock-ups

at site and mock ups at approved laboratory and the testing charges for
all laboratory and field tests for individual materials / components and
system as a whole, as specified.

p.

Coordination with work of other agencies / contractors employed on

site.

q.

Protection, during storage and construction until handing over the

building for occupation, of curtain wall with curtain glazing, aluminium
composite panel cladding and louvers, structurally glazed aluminium
windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc.

r.

All final exterior and interior cleaning of the curtain glazing, aluminium
composite panel cladding and louvers, structurally glazed aluminium
windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc. before handing over the
building for occupation.

s.

Hoisting, staging, scaffolding and temporary enabling structural work/

services, cranes and cradles etc.

CW- 105

t.

All the loading, unloading, cartage, insurance and other incidental

charges of any kind on account of transporting material to site / factory /
shipment etc. all complete as required for the execution of the work.

u.

Specified tests, inclusive of necessary records, reports, logbook etc.

including all certifications and documentations from the contractor /
curtain wall fabricator / specialist agency / manufacturer / suppliers /
processors etc. as specified.

v.

Maintenance manuals.

w.

Design and Performance guarantees in the enclosed formats.

x.

The information about the Principals of the structural window glazing /

curtain wall system and the details of the present arrangement of the
specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator with the Principals shall be
submitted by the contractor, before approval of the specialist agency /
structural window glazing / curtain wall fabricator by the Engineer-inCharge.

y.

Checking of all the functional and structural design and vetting of all the
shop drawings for the curtain wall with curtain glazing, aluminium
composite panel cladding and aluminium louvers, structurally glazed
aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc. shall be done by
the Principals of the curtain wall system, for the specified quality and
performance and they shall provide all the required advice & technical
guidance during design, any stage of execution of the works under this
sub head to the specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator engaged by the
contractor for achieving the required performance parameters and also
during the guarantee period of 3 years.

z.

Construction monitoring for regular quality control and technical

inspection to ensure the work conforms to the approved shop drawings
and details (including any modifications made after initial / mock up
testing) and acceptable standards of quality including monitoring the
progress of the work.

2.

STANDARDS

2.1

Materials and workmanship shall, in general, comply with the latest editions of
the following standards as a minimum.
ANSI Z97.1
ASTM C 1036
ASTM C 1048

Safety Glazing materials used in Buildings

Specification for float glass
Specification for Heat-treated Float Glass

CW- 106

ASTM E 774
ASTM C 1172
ASTM C 864
ASTM C 1115
ASTM C 920
ASTM C 509
CPSC16 CFR 1201
GTA Specification
No. 89-1-6
BSCP 118
AS 1664
2.2

Specification for sealed Insulating Glass Units

Specification for Laminated Architectural Glass
Specification for compression Seal Gaskets
Specification for Silicone Rubber Gaskets
Specification for Sealants
Specification for sealing material
Specification for Safety Glass
Specification for environment durability for
heat strengthened Spandrel Glass with
Applied opacifiers.
Structural use of Aluminium
- Do -

International Standards
In general, the Contractor shall follow either of the latest Indian/ International
Standards issued by BIS, ASTM, SAA, AAMA, BSS, ISO & SSIR. The
contractor shall state reasons for adopting particular standards / codes. Nothing
in this clause shall relieve the contractor of his obligations to provide high
standard of quality and workmanship as required.

2.3

Submittal of Codes
All relevant codes proposed to be followed for design, materials, installation
and testing etc. shall be procured by the contractor and submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge within 2 months of the issue of letter for commencement
of work failing which these shall be purchased by the Engineer-in-Charge and
cost shall be recovered from the contractor.

2.4

Building Regulations
Design of the Curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding and
louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions
etc. shall comply with all Government codes and regulations. The design for
dead loads, wind loads, seismic loads and other loads, shall comply with the
requirements of the relevant National Building Code and Indian Standard
Code/ International Standards, unless specified otherwise.

3.

PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
a.

The contractor shall be solely responsible for the design including shop
drawings and performance of the installed curtain wall with Curtain
glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding and louvers, structurally
glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc. The
installations shall be guaranteed by the contractor during the guarantee
period for materials used, workmanship, water tightness (wherever

CW- 107

specified), structural design, performance requirements and other

requirements as gi ven in the specifications. The contractor shall submit
in the enclosed format a written guarantee for the same for a period of 3
years from the date of completion of the work. In addition, the
contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge a similar
back-to-back guarantee for same duration from the specialist agency /
curtain wall fabricator engaged by them.
b.

The design, fabrication, supply and installation of the curtain wall with
curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding, aluminium
louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed
partitions etc. shall be to the best of national / international standards
and shall be guaranteed to take the dead loads, wind and seismic loads,
storms, air pollution, thermal stresses, building movements and the
consequent deflections without compromising the performance
characteristics . It shall be water tight, wherever specified and prevent
ingress of water/ moisture, pollutants etc. Further, the individual
members of the structural framing shall not deflect beyond permissible
limits as specified.

c.

In addition, guarantee for 3 years for all the material used and their
performances shall be submitted by the contractor. Besides, the
contractor shall obtain and submit similar back to back guarantees from
the specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator and also from the
manufacturers / suppliers / processors, as applicable, of various
materials to the tune that they conform to the specifications and other
criteria as specified herein for:
I)

Glass (Single, laminated or IGUs) substrate, coatings,

lamination, assembly of IGUs etc. and that regarding suitability
of single soft coated glass in the spandrels.

II)

Sealants usage as per requirement of structural design and

functional requirements, compatibility with different substrates
and sealants, bite size, quality assurance during sealing of IGUs
and fixing glass to glass and glass to the aluminium frame, etc.

III)

EPDM / Silicone gasket for ozone resistance and other

properties as specified etc.

IV)

Aluminium material quality, tempering requirement,

suitability of aluminium grade and anodizing etc.

V)

Anchor fasteners suitability and strength requirement as per

manufacturers specifications etc.

CW- 108

VI)

4.

Aluminium composite panel cladding PVDF coating etc.,

Material quality and

d.

The contractor shall also submit guarantee in the enclosed format for
replacement of glass during the guarantee period of 3 years from the date of
completion of work. All the Guarantees shall be submitted before final
payment is released after the date of the completion of work and shall not in
any way limit any other rights, which the Engineer-in-Charge may have
under the Contract.

e.

If any defect is noticed during the guarantee period, it shall be rectified by

the contractor within seven days of issue of notice to the contractor, at least
temporarily, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge, till the
permanent rectification of the defects / replacement of defective materials is
carried out by the contractor, in maximum four months period. If not
attended to, the same shall be got done by the Engineer-in-Charge through
other agency at the risk and cost of the contractor and the cost, which shall
be final and binding on the contractor, shall be recovered from the amount
withheld or any other amount due to the contractor. In any case, during the
guarantee period, the contractor alongwith specialist agency/ curtain wall
fabricator shall inspect and examine the work atleast once in every year and
make good any defects observed. The contractor shall submit a written
certificate in this regard. The defects, if any, shall be rectified in a
workmanlike manner, retaining the same aesthetics and other functional
parameters of the original work.
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGN
a.

Architectural drawings and specifications only indicate the required

basic dimensions, profiles and performance criteria.

b.

The contractor shall design the curtain wall with curtain glazing ,
aluminium composite panel cladding, aluminium louvers, structurally
glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc. as per the
parameters specified and submit the same for the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge. If required, the contractor shall re-design the
system based on the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge and / or based
on the outcome of the mock up test(s) in the laboratory. Nothing extra
shall be payable on these accounts.

c.

The Contractor may, at his own cost, have the option of minor
modifications and addition of details and profiles subject to the approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge, provided the architectural concept and
performance requirements are achieved.

CW- 109

d.

The acceptance by the contractor, of any modification(s) suggested by

the Engineer-in-Charge, shall not relieve the Contractor from his sole
responsibility for the structural design and performance.

e.

The contractor shall be solely and fully responsible for proper structural
analysis and design for various load cases and their combination,
fabrication, supply and installation and its satisfactory performance.
This shall include design and proper sizing of all sections, meeting
structural and architectural requirements. The anchor assemblies shall
meet the performance and design requirements including installation of
all inserts, fasteners, clips, bracing and framework, as required for the
proper anchorage to the structure, unless otherwise specified.

f.

The approval of the structural design and shop drawings by the

Engineer-in-Charge shall not relieve the contractor from his
responsibility for the structural design.

g.

In the end, the contractor shall be solely and fully responsible for design
of the curtain wall with curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel
cladding, aluminium louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windo ws,
fully glazed fixed partitions etc., including providing and installing a
stable, safe and completely water tight (wherever specified) curtain
glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding, aluminium louvers,
structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions
etc. which shall perform to the required standards during the guarantee
period of 3 years from the date of completion of work. The Contractor
shall indemnify the Department against all claims, of whatsoever nature,
due to defective designing and / or non-performance during the 3 years
Guarantee period. The provisions of this clause shall not in any way
limit the rights of the Engineer-in-Charge to take action under other
clauses of the contract agreement.

SHOP DRAWINGS

5.1

Submittals
a.

Within two months after the issue of letter for commencement of work,
the Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings by incorporating
necessary modifications to the preliminary architectural drawings and
four (4) copies of all shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineerin-Charge for review and approval.

b.

The review of the shop drawings by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be

limited to their conformity to the architectural and structural design
concept & specifications. However, the approval of the shop drawings

CW- 110

by the Engineer-in-Charge shall not relieve the contractor from any of

his responsibilities and requirements as specified herein.

5.2

5.3

c.

No fabrication shall be taken up until the shop drawings and all other
related submittals, documentation, certification, samples and the mockup for that work have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer-incharge.

d.

On approval by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall submit 6

sets of the approved shop drawings to the Engineer-in-Charge within
three weeks. After the completion of work, two (2) sets and two (2)
CDs each of the final approved shop drawings incorporating all the
approved modifications, if any, as per the site requirements, shall be
submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge within two mont hs from the date of
completion of work.

Scope of Shop Drawings

a.

Shop drawings shall incorporate scaled and dimensioned plans,

elevations, sections and complete size details for all the works.

b.

The shop drawings shall indicate the required dimensional profiles and
modules, function, design and performance standards and in general
cover all dimensions and details required to fabricate and install the
curtain wall at site.

c.

The contractor shall verify and co-ordinate the shop drawings with all
applicable and inter-related trades, drawings and specifications.

d.

All dimensions / modules, etc., shall be field checked and the drawings
shall be modified, if required, based on actual measurements at site.

e.

Details shall show and specify all metal sections, types of finishes, areas
to be sealed and sealant materials, gaskets, applicable construction
materials including fasteners and welds, all anchorage assemblies and
components, fabrication and erection tolerances for the work.

f.

All details shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge,

after incorporating all the modifications as suggested by the Engineerin-Charge or otherwise.

Section Profiles
Profile adjustments, if required as per the site conditions may be allowed by
the Engineer-in-Charge subject to meeting the architectural / performance
requirements. However, this shall be carried out only with the approval of the

CW- 111

Engineer-in-charge provided that the general design and intent of the drawings
and specifications are also maintained. Also, if any new / non-standard
aluminium extruded section is required as per the site requirement and / or the
architectural drawings for the structural , functional and / or aesthetic reasons,
the contractor shall procure the same from the approved manufacturers for the
aluminium sections, even if it entails preparing new die, etc. Nothing extra
shall be payable to the contractor on this account.
6.

STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS

a.

The Contractor / specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator shall employ

a competent curtain wall design engineer to design the system and its
components for curtain wall with curtain glazing , aluminium composite
panel cladding, aluminium louvers as well as sky lights, structurally
glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions, frameless
glass doors with patch fittings, glass solid paver block work, canopies
etc. The design engineer shall have rich past experience of successfully
designing and detailing of similar system installed for at least three
prestigious projects during last five calendar years ending June 2006.

b.

During the design stage, the Contractor shall interact actively with the
Engineer-in-Charge, concerning all aspects of design and detailing and
shall obtain the relevant information on architectural and structural
design parameters concerning the structure, probable deflections and
other building movements etc.

c.

The design shall account for all design considerations, codal provisions,
possible loads & building movements as well as the movements within
and relative movements etc. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge for the provisions made in his design in this
regard.

d.

The Contractor shall submit his detailed structural analysis and design
calculations for the system and each of its typical and non-typical
components along with the shop drawings for the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Also, the contractor shall guarantee that his design
ensures the structural stability, safety, integrity and required
performances against all natural forces, superimposed loads, building
movements and environmental effects, as specified and as called for
under various codal provisions. The contractor shall also get the
structural designs checked and the shop drawings vetted from the
Principals of the curtain wall system.

CW- 112

7.

e.

The Contractor shall modify his design as required by the Engineer-inCharge for meeting the various provisions as specified and re submit the
same for the approval till the design is finally approved. Nothing extra
shall be payable on this account.

f.

The Grade of R.C.C. in the building structure is as specified in

DESIGN DATA. The Contractor shall design anchorages (capacity
and numbers of the anchor fasteners) for this grade of concrete.

DOCUMENTATION AND CERTIFICATION

The contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge the
manufacturers certificate for compliance of the various parameters for the
various components / materials to be used in the work (under this sub head) as
per the manufacturers specifications. A copy of the manufacturers test report,
for each lot of material procured and supplied for the work, shall also be
obtained from the respective manufacturers and submitted to the Engineer-inCharge for the record.

7.1

7.2

Glass and Glazing Documentation

a.

Before taking up the work, the glass manufacturer / processor shall

submit written certification for the review of the Engineer-in-Charge
and record, stating that all glass (properties as specified such as U value,
shading coefficient, light transmission, light reflection (internal as well
as external), solar factor, relative heat gain etc.) and glazing
requirements (including heat strengthening / toughening, reflective soft
coating, low E coating, lamination, fabrication of IGUs including
sealants etc.) as per the shop drawings are recommended by them for
use related to their specific applications and design parameters and that
they are in conformity with the specifications.

b.

Tests shall be carried out for glass, including properties after processing,
for each lot supplied, by the glass manufacturer / processor in his
factory / laboratory or any other accredited international laboratory at
his own cost and the copies of the test results shall be obtained by the
contractor and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for the record.

Sealant Documentation
a.

All sealant applications must be clearly designated on shop drawings.

Before taking up the work, a master sealant schedule shall be prepared
and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge specifying materials, special
instructions and application procedures.

CW- 113

b.

The sealant manufacturer shall certify that all sealant requirements as

detailed and specified on the shop drawings have been reviewed and
approved for use related to their specific applications and / or design
intent, compatibility to adjacent materials and in conformity with
specifications including size of the structural silicone bite for tensile and
shear requirements and for accommodating design building movements.
Also, the performance requirement of the weather silicone sealant and
its compatibility with adjacent materials shall also be certified by the
sealant manufacturer. The sealant manufacturer shall also certify against
streaking of the silicone. The contractor shall obtain certificate from the
sealant manufacturer for the performance requirements of the sealant
during the 3 years guarantee period from the date of completion of work
and submit the same to the Engineer-in-Charge for records.

c.

The sealant manufacturer shall certify that the Contractor/ specialist

agency / curtain wall fabricator / glass processor has followed all
application and quality assurance procedures recommended by them for
fabrication and installation of panels including cleaning, curing sealants,
storage, application at a controlled temperature and clean dust free
environment as per the relevant specifications. The sealant manufacturer
shall also carryout field and laboratory tests on the samples of the
sealants being used and collected from the factory / workshop of the
Contractor / specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator / glass processor
like butterfly test and snap-time tests on pump start-ups, peel and pull
adhesion tests by deglazing, compatibility test, water immersion test,
UV chamber test, weatherometer test, etc., as specified and submit the
copies of the test reports to the Engineer-in-Charge for records.

d.

The deglazing tests for sealant adhesion on the working glazed panels
shall be performed by the sealant manufacturer / supplier who shall
certify the test results and the quality assurance of the same.

e.

The contractor shall maintain a log book indicating the details of glass
panel number, batch number of silicone sealants and the solvents
including its shelf life and the name of the operator who fabricated the
particular panel which shall be reviewed periodically and countersigned
by the sealant manufacturer who shall also carry out deglazing test on
the working panels , as specified and prepare deglazing summary report.
The logbook and the deglazi ng summary report, duly authenticated by
the sealant manufacturer, shall be handed over to the Engineer-inCharge, for record, after the completion of the work. This logbook and
the deglazing reports shall also be available for the review by the
Engineer-in-Charge during the execution of the work.

CW- 114

7.3

Aluminum Composite Panel Cladding Documentation

Before taking up the work, the Aluminium Composite Panel manufacturer
shall submit written certification for the review of the Engineer-in-Charge and
record, stating all the quality parameters and other characteristics for the
material for the use related to their specific application and design parameter
and that, they are in conformity with the specifications. The test shall be
carried out for the PVDF / lumiflon-based fluoropolymer resin coating to the
Aluminium Composite Panel Cladding material, for each lot supplied, by the
manufacturer in his factory / laboratory or any other accredited international
laboratory at his own cost and the copies of the test results shall be obtained by
the contractor and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for the record.

7.4

Quality Control Documentation

a.

The contractor shall submit the methodology and quality assurance

statement for in-plant and job site quality control procedures for the
review and approval of the Engineer-in-Charge before taking up the
work to ensure the design integrity and performance of the curtain wall
with curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding, structurally
glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc.

b.

Documentation shall include schedules, details, isometric and / or

schematic explanatory sketches cross-referenced to the shop drawings,
data sheets, etc., all as required to assess methods and materials and to
ensure that both the fabrication and installation are in conformity of the
specifications.

c.

The Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representatives may, time to

time, visit the plant / workshop / factory to inspect material, fabrication
and quality assurance procedures.
i)

The in-plant quality control procedures shall include but not be

limited to the following items:
- Material

Visual inspection and other field

tests

- Fabrication

Tolerances, Joinery,
screws, cleats, etc.

- Finish Match

Approved finish and controls

required for matching the
exposed surfaces.

Sleeves,

CW- 115

ii)

- Assembly

Welds,
fasteners,
sealants,
gaskets,
separators,
setting
blocks,
glazing,
structural
silicone bite

- Protection

Handling, protection, shipping

The job site quality control procedures shall include, but not necessarily
be limited to the following items:
- Anchorage

Lines, grades
tolerances.

- Installation

Setting-out, tolerances, finish

match, connections, sleeves,
flashing,
welds,
fasteners,
sealants, bolt tensioning.

- Sealing

As recommended by the sealant

manufacturer.

- Storage

As
recommended
by
the
respective manufacturer(s) /
processor(s).

As
recommended
by
the
respective material manufacturer
(s) / processor(s).

Protection &
Cleaning

8.

SAMPLES AND MOCK-UP AT SITE

8.1

Submittals

and

related

The samples of the following materials together with detailed technical data /
catalogues shall be submitted in triplicate for review of the Engineer-in-Charge
and approval along with the shop drawings. Any omission of an item, or items
which require the compliance of the contractor shall not relieve him from
responsibility.
(a)

Aluminium Composite Panel

: Each type and thickness

600 mm x 600mm

(b)

Aluminum extrusions: Each section : 500mm long.

(c)

Glass

: each type 600 mm x 600 mm.

CW- 116

(d)

Glass paver block

: Unit

(e)

Gaskets, separators, glass setting blocks, double sided spacer tape,

backer rods etc: Each section or unit, 300mm long or unit.

(f)

Brackets of each type (material), anchor fasteners and connecting

devices: Each type and size.

(g)

Finish samples: After approval of the final finish coating, the Engineerin-Charge shall be provided with three (3) approved samples.

(h)

Window and door ironmongery and accessories, as applicable.

(i)

Finished flashing samples.

(j)

Finished samples of shadow boxes, fire stop (barrier)-cum smoke seals

(k)

Structural and weather silicone sealant

In addition to the above, the contractor shall also submit one sample of
the assembly of various components forming a typical fixing detail of
curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding and louvers,
structurally glazed aluminium window.

8.2

Mock-up at site
Before the fabrication and site installation is taken up and within 2 months
after the approval of shop drawings by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor
shall prepare mock-ups of the proposed curtain wall and fix it on the building.
The width of the mock up for structural glazing / curtain glazing (including one
openable panel) shall be not less than three typical adjoining wall panels /
units. The height of the mock up test sample of curtain glazing shall be not
less than 2 storeys high and must contain full height modules. The mock up
shall also incorporate all types of in-fill panels, fire-stop / barrier-cum-smoke
seal, flashings, shadowbox, bracketry, hardware and fixtures etc . A mock-up
of Aluminium Composite Panel cladding shall also be put up at site. The
width of the mock up for Aluminium composite panel cladding shall be not
less than three typical adjoining wall panels/units (including aluminium
louvers). The height of the test sample aluminium composite panel shall be not
less than 2 storeys high and must contain full height modules. A mock up shall
also be put up for the structurally glazed aluminium windows. The width of the
mock up shall be not less than three typical adjoining panels / units (including
one openable panel). The height of the mock up shall be one panel height in a
typical floor and must contain full height modules including fittings and the
other hardwares. The mock-ups shall be essentially put up at site for final
approval of all materials and installation details by the Engineer-in-Charge.

CW- 117

The mock up shall not form part of the work and shall not be paid for
separately. It shall be dismantled and taken away by the contractor at his own
cost , with the prior permission of the Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall
be payable on this account.
8.3

Maintenance Manual
After the completion of the work, the contractor shall submit two (2) copies
each, of detailed procedures for the periodic inspection, maintenance and
cleaning of all the curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel cladding, doors,
open able windows and aluminium louver elements, finishes, structurally
glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc to the Engineerin-Charge.

9.

WORK SCHEDULE
Immediately after award of work, the Contractor shall submit the final
programmed work schedule for the completion of whole of the work under this
sub-head of curtain wall with curtain glazing, aluminium composite panel
cladding and aluminium louvers, structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully
glazed fixed partitions etc, including submittals, mock up test at site as well as
in the approved laboratory , approvals, fabrication, supply of materials at site
& installation etc.

10.

STORAGE, PROTECTION AND PROGRAMME

a.

The contractor shall submit a schedule of procedure for inspection

during installation so as to control and assure quality on the job site.

b.

The Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for the

protection of the surface of the curtain glazing including aluminium
frame work, aluminium composite panel cladding and louvers,
structurally glazed aluminium windows, fully glazed fixed partitions etc
during delivery and erection, with description as to when the protection
can be removed. The protection paper shall not be kept for more than 45
days and shall be replaced with the fresh protection paper. Further, it
shall not have acid content, which in any manner may affect the
substrate.

c.

The Contractor shall submit fortnightly reports on supplying, fabrication

and installation as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

d.

Delivery and Storage of Materials: All materials delivered to site shall

be stored in allocated spaces where the stored materials shall not get
exposed to rainwater, moisture or damage, and shall permit easy access

CW- 118

to and handling of the materials. Materials shall be stored neatly and

properly stacked.
i)

Factory made Aluminium composite panel cladding / glazing

units and / or their components shall be transported, handled and
stored in a manner to preclude damage of any nature.

ii)

Accessory materials, required for erection at the site shall be

delivered in labeled containers by the manufacturer / supplier.

iii)

All units or components, which are cracked, bent, chipped,

scratched or otherwise defective and unsuitable for installation
shall be removed and replaced by the contractor. Nothing extra
shall be payable on this account.

PARTICULARS SPECIFICATIONS FOR

STRUCTURAL GLAZED
WINDOWS / CURTAIN WALL CURTAIN GLAZING, ALUMINIUM
COMPOSITE PANEL CLADDING AND ALUMINIUM LOUVERS ONLY
11.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
All components, assemblies and completed work shall conform to the
following performance standards and all applicable and governing building
codes and regulations.

11.1

11.2

Thermal Movement of the curtain wall

a.

Provide for noiseless contraction and expansion of component materials

and assembly for an ambient temperature range of +10oC to +70oC and
a material temperature range of 100oC without buckling, loss of seal,
loss of integrity, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners, or other
detrimental effects.

b.

Make allowance for vertical and horizontal movements due to

temperature variation within the curtain wall, relative to other cladding
and also along with and relative to the building movements.

c.

For fabrication, assembly and erection procedure shall take into account
the ambient temperature range at the time of the respective operations.

Building Movement and Related Building tolerance

The design and installation of the curtain wall system shall accommodate all
inherent building movements and deflections and the fabrication and
installation tolerances of all related work not involved in this section, without

CW- 119

the loss of, or any detrimental effect to, the performance requirements herein
specified. The contractor shall verify and coordinate, all such movements and
tolerances with the Engineer-in-Charge, before designing the components of
the curtain wall so that movements and deflections in the structure do not in
any way affect the structural & functional integrity and safety and aesthetics of
curtain wall and vice versa.
11.3

Thermal property
All insulation materials, fire stop (barrier)-cum-smoke seals shall comply with
the requirements of the Chief Fire Officer, Mumbai and any other concerned
authorities.

11.4

Structural Properties
a.

The design parameters of structural framing of the windows / curtain

wall and all related components shall comply with the requirements of
all relevant codes, as specified and where applicable, National Building
Code and Indian Standard Codes - I.S. 456 & I.S. 875.

b.

The windows / curtain wall and its components shall be designed for a
wind load of 2 KN/ sqm of pressure or suction wherever applicable,
rainstorms, seismic, impact and all other forces likely to be imposed
during the lifetime of the building.

c.

The windows / Curtain wall and its elements including sealants and
sealed joints shall not sustain permanent deformation or failure under
loading equivalent to 1.5 times the design wind pressure herein
specified.
Failure means breakage, component disengagement or permanent
distortion.

d.

Deflections: The specified permissible deflections must be reduced if

they are in any way detrimental to the structural framing of the windows
/ curtain wall and its elements and sealants and any other functional
parameters.
i)

The maximum horizontal deflection of mullions for the design

wind pressure shall not exceed 1/240 of height or 15 mm
whichever is lesser.

ii)

No vertical deflection shall exceed 1/300 of span of transom / sill

/ head / gutter members.

CW- 120

iii)

There shall be no permanent deflection of transom/ sill/ head/

gutter members under 1.5 times the design dead load.

iv)

For a typical windows / curtain glazing panel, the maximum

deflection of glass under design wind pressure at centre of any
panel shall not exceed 12 mm or as calculated by the
manufacturer, whichever is lesser.

e.

The windows / curtain glazing shall be anchored to the R.C.C floor

through serrated Hot Dipped Galvanized M.S brackets. However, the
contractor may provide serrated aluminium or stainless steel brackets
(for the same load capacity and size requirement) instead of GI brackets
( for aligning the curtain glazing vertically and as specified as per the
GI brackets) for which nothing extra shall be payable. The surface of the
bracket in contact with R.C.C. floor slab shall not be polished. As far as
possible, the contractor shall take all precautions to avoid cutting
through any reinforcement bars while fixing the brackets. The
contractor may at his own cost provide insert plates, sleeves / leave slots
at appropriate locations during casting of the concrete itself for making
provision for fixing brackets for the curtain glazing and to avoid
chipping / dismantling of concrete and consequent damage to the
reinforcement bars. The slot shall be filled up with concrete of the same
grade in a workman like manner, after fixing the brackets. Any defect in
alignment / plumb in the building face shall be rectified by chipping /
dismantling of the concrete / masonry and repairing the same, as
specified to achieve the required alignment of the curtain wall, as
specified. The brackets shall be provided of such lengths as required for
keeping the alignment as specified. However, sections required for
fabrication of brackets shall be as per the design requirements for the
specified loads and such lengths of brackets. Nothing extra shall be
payable on these accounts.

f.

Transom/railing (where not backed by an R.C.C. parapet) shall be

designed for a horizontal UDL of 1.00 KN/m run, UDL supplied to the
infill of 1.0 KN/ sqm and a point load applied to any part of the infill at
0.5 KN.

g.

No holes shall be burned, punched or drilled in any structural steel/

RCC members unless expressly approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

h.

Member shapes and/or profiles, if schematically shown on the

Architectural drawings, may not necessarily be the exact shapes
required or best suited for the particular conditions. Final shapes and
locations shall be as designed by the contractor / specialist agency/
curtain wall fabricator and shall be subject to the review and approval of
the Engineer - in - Charge.

CW- 121

i.

11.5

All framing members shall be factory / workshop fabricated and

finished as specified.

Concrete Tolerances
The contractor shall take all precautions to construct the building within
specified tolerances in concrete and masonry faces. Any defects beyond the
permissible tolerances shall be rectified by the contractor at his own cost to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. While fixing the brackets for
curtain wall, the contractor shall take into account the variation in the concrete
and the masonry faces to which the structural framework of the curtain wall are
to be fixed and such variations shall be adjusted in the lengths of brackets to
align them in perfect plumb. The bracket shall be designed accordingly.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

11.6

Lightning protection
The whole structural framing of the curtain wall shall be suitably bonded, as
directly as possible, to the lightning protection system of the building. At each
end of each continuous length of curtain wall , provision shall be made by the
contractor, at top and bottom , for suitable bonding to the lightening protection
system of the building and the details shall be specified in the shop drawings as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

11.7

Fire stop (barrier)-cum-smoke seals and Interface with building

a.

Gaps between the building face and the windows / curtain glazing at
soffit level between the successive floors shall be closed, as specified,
with fire stop (barrier)-cum-smoke seals. It shall have the required fire
resistance for integrity, for 2 hours, to the approval of Chief Fire
Officer, Mumbai. Suitable gap for accommodating deflections of the
aluminium framing of the curtain glazing as per the approved shop
drawings shall be maintained between the with fire stop (barrier)-cumsmoke seals and the aluminium framing members of the curtain glazing.
The gap between the G.I tray of fire stop (barrier)-cum-smoke seals and
the aluminium framing members of the curtain glazing shall be sealed
by using backer rod and weather silicone sealant, as specified and as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

b.

The fire stop (barrier)-cum-smoke seals shall consist of minimum 1 mm

thick plain G.I. sheet tray with 100 mm thick layer of non inflammable
heat insulating material, rock wool, having density of minimum 64 Kg.
per Cum. of the make as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The rock
wool layer shall be attached to G.I sheet using stainless steel rivets/
nuts, bolts and washers etc. The tray shall be fixed to the RCC /

CW- 122

Masonry surface by using stainless steel fasteners / nuts, bolts, screws,

washers etc. dipped in weather silicone sealant as per the approved shop
drawings. Screws with plastic sleeves / wooden rawl plugs shall not be
allowed to be used for the above fixing.

11.8

11.9

c.

Unless otherwise specified in the item description, the contractor shall

provide aluminium flashing made out of minimum 1.0 mm thick solid
aluminium sheet of the approved design and profile at the window sill
level throughout the length and also fill the gap between the aluminum
flashing and the curtain glazing using weather silicone sealant as
specified and as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Also, the
fasteners / screws to be used for fixing flashing to the building as well
as the aluminium framing members of the curtain glazing shall be of
stainless steel and dipped in weather silicone sealant before use.

d.

All interfaces of the windows / curtain wall with the building structure
and other elements shall be sealed using aluminum flashing made out of
1.0 mm thick solid aluminium sheet and weather silicone sealant to
make it water proof. Also, the fasteners / screws to be used for fixing
flashing shall be dipped in weather silicone sealant before use.

Acoustics
a.

Provisions shall be made (like capping of all extreme ends of hollow

mullions) to prevent sound transmission through the system and also to
prevent noise due to air whistles and to prevent entering of vermins.

b.

Gaps between the mullions and the partition wall of the cabins shall be
suitably closed by using double skin gypsum board partition as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge including making provision for
accommodating permissible deflections of mullions as per design
requirements but without affecting the partitions and the curtain wall.
The payment for this partition work shall be made under relevant item.

c.

Provisions shall also be made to prevent metal to metal rubbing, any

rattling and noise due to thermal changes and wind pressure by using
Teflon (PTFE) separators.

Visual Appearance
The Contractor shall ensure that the elevations are strictly as per the
Architectural drawings and that the intent of the architectural design is
retained. Visual appearance shall be a key consideration for acceptance of
work.

CW- 123

MATERIALS
12.

MATERIALS ( GENERAL )
a.

All the materials and various components to be used in the work shall be
of the first / superior quality and suitable for the purpose.

b.

All the materials shall be free from any defects that may impair the
strength, functional performance or aesthetic of the curtain wall.

c.

Testing in an approved laboratory or review of data by the Engineer-inCharge shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to verify and
ascertain for himself that the materials conform to the specifications and
intent of the contract documents.

13.

METALS

13.1

In general, metals shall comply with CPWD specifications, particular

specifications and special conditions specified herein and the relevant Indian
and International Standards

13.2

Moulded Solid Aluminium Extruded Capping

The capping shall be of extruded aluminium section of the required profile as
per the architectural drawing and shall have the provisions for fixing it in the
grooves in the curtain glazing .The aluminium capping shall be PVDF, coil /
spray coated (of minimum 30 microns thickness) to the required metallic
colour and shade, as approved, all complete as per the architectural drawings
and the approved shop drawings, cut, bent / moulded to the required profile,
shape and size , as required. It shall be snap fitted / mechanically fitted using
stainless steel screws (grade 304) dipped in weather silicone sealant, in the
horizontal grooves in the curtain wall including providing and fixing backers
rod and weather silicone sealant as per the approved shop drawings. Metallic
colour coatings shall be coil / spray coated to ensure superior colour uniformity
and quality. The coating shall be UV resistant exterior grade PVDF (poly
vinylidene fluoride ) for colour & gloss retention, flexibility and film adhesion,
besides resistance to humidity, impact, salt spray, pollution, abrasion and
graffiti. For solid (opaque) colours, the total dry film thickness of the coating
shall be 20 micron (minimum) consisting of a conversion coat, an inhibitive
primer layer and a top colour coat (two coat, two bake system). For metallic
colours, the total dry film thickness of the coating shall be 30 micron
(minimum) consisting of conversion coat, an inhibitive primer, metallic colour
coat colour coating and clear top coat (three coat, three bake system).

CW- 124

13.3

Aluminium Composite panel Cladding

Aluminium composite panel cladding shall be fabricated from aluminum
composite panel sheets as specified and shall conform to the relevant
specifications specified herein and also to relevant international standards. It
shall be with closed grooves . The aluminium structural framing for the
aluminium composite panel cladding shall have extruded aluminium sections
colour anodized to the approved colours and shade minimum 20 micron
thickness, as specified.

13.4

Fasteners
The type, size, alloy, quantity and spacing of all anchor fasteners and / or
anchorage devices shall be as required as per the design loads and for the
specified performance standards.
a.

Bolts, anchors and other fastening devices like screws, nuts, washers
etc. shall be of approved types, as required for the strength of the
connections, shall be self-locking, unless otherwise specified. These
shall be of austenitic stainless steel of specified grade and shall be
torque tightened, wherever required, to achieve the maximum torque
tension relationship in the fasteners. Washers, nuts and all accessory
items shall be of the same material as fasteners. The rivets/ nuts, bolts
and washers for fixing insulation layer to the shadow box or with fire
stop (barrier)-cum-smoke seals shall be stainless steel of approved
grade. Unless otherwise specified in the item description or the
specifications for the particular item of work under this sub head, the
fasteners shall be of stainless steel grade as mentioned below:
Type of fasteners
1. Anchor fasteners
2. Screws, Nuts, Bolts, Washers
3. Rivets, toggles and the like

b.

13.5

Grade of stainless steel

Stainless steel grade 316
Stainless steel grade 304
Stainless steel grade 304

The anchor fasteners shall not be provided using PVC sleeves. Only
expandable type self locking anchor fasteners shall be provided.

Extrusions
a.

All aluminium extrusions shall conform to the specifications for

tolerances, which shall, in any case be equal to or better than DIN
standards. Any section not conforming to the tolerances specified
shall be rejected.

CW- 125

13.6

b.

In general aluminium alloy for extrusions shall be 6063 T5 or T6 grade

as per BS 1474. However, the grade and tempering specifications shall
be, as recommended by the supplier for each application.

c.

All the extruded aluminum sections shall be anodized in approved

colour to a minimum thickness of 20 microns and satin finished or shall
be PVDF coil / spray coated in approved colour and shade with metallic
colours to a minimum thickness of 30 microns, as
specified .The
colour and the finish shall be uniform and free of streaks. The
aluminium sections, before coating / anodizing, shall be suitably
cleaned, rinsed, buffed properly and sealed and protected after
anodizing / PVDF coating, till the completion of the work.

d.

All surfaces of the aluminium sections designed to receive the sealants

shall be finished properly to match the finish of the parent section as
used for initial testing of sealant and aluminium surface adhesion.
Further, it shall be ensured that the entire aluminium surface has
adequate sealant contact and adhesion.

e.

Sill sheets, plates and extrusions shall be visually flat under all lighting
conditions.

f.

The members of aluminium extruded sections for mullions, transoms,

members of sub frames & sash frames shall be in single piece and not
be splice jointed in the panel length and height.

g.

Certification and tests shall be as specified.

Aluminium Flashing
Unless otherwise specified in the item description, all flashings shall be made
out of 1.0 mm thick solid aluminium sheet. It shall be fixed using stainless
steel screws dipped in weather silicone sealant.

13.7

Top capping
Top capping, as per the architectural drawings, shall be made from P.V.D.F /
lumiflon-based fluoropolymer resin coated 4 mm thick Aluminum Composite
Panel cladding material of the colour and shade as approved, bent to the
required profile as per the specifications and the approved shop drawings.

13.8

Soffits and Suspended Ceiling System

Soffits and suspended ceiling system in the walkways / entrance canopies /
atria ceilings etc., as per the architectural drawings, shall be of aluminium

CW- 126

composite panel cladding material sheet , bent to the required profile as per the
architectural drawings and the approved shop drawings.
13.9

Fire stop ( barrier) cum smoke seals

a.

Fire stop ( barrier) cum smoke seals shall be provided at soffit level
of all floors and shall have two hours fire resistance. Insulation shall be
100mm thick rockwool of 64 kg/ cum density of the brand as approved
by Engineer in- Charge. The insulation panels shall be fixed to the G.I
backing sheet using stainless steel rivets/ nuts, bolts and washers as per
the approved shop drawings.

b.

Metal sections of the fire stop (barrier) - cum - smoke seals shall be
plain G.I sheet minimum 1 mm thick as per the details in the
architectural / approved shop drawings.

13.10 Brackets
The brackets shall be fixed with high degree of accuracy to achieve the
elevation as per the architectural drawings. The brackets shall have suitable
lengths and sections to align aluminium composite panel cladding, curtain
glazing and aluminium louvers in one face, as required as per the architectural
drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account. For curtain glazing,
the brackets shall be fabricated from M.S rolled sections / plates to have the
design strength. The quality of the weld shall also be ensured as per the
standards. These shall be provided corrosion protection treatment by Hot
Dipped Galvanizing to have zinc coating not less than 610 gms. per sqm. Slots
of elliptical or circular shape in the brackets shall be pre-drilled / machine
punched and not flame-cut and it shall be done before galvanizing. The
surface of the brackets shall be serrated for additional grip before galvanizing.
Washers made of serrated plates of the corresponding material shall also be
provided for additional grip. The directions of the serration and the slot shall be
such that they allow movements as per the design requirement and at the same
time prevent any movement in the other direction. For fixing the aluminium
structural framework of the aluminium composite panel cladding and the
aluminium louvers to the building structure, aluminium brackets shall be
fabricated and provided for the required capacity and size as per the design
loads and from considerations of verticality. Each bracket shall be fixed to the
R.C.C / Masonry using anchor fasteners of suitable capacities and in numbers
as required as per the design requirements. The brackets shall be fixed to the
structural steel members of the building using stainless steel bolts & nuts /
fasteners of required capacity and in numbers as per the design requirement.
The holes of the required sizes shall be pre- drilled in RCC / Masonry /
structural steel for fixing anchor fasteners / bolts etc. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account.

CW- 127

13.11 Fittings
a.

All hardware and fittings such as patch fittings, handles, locks, floor
springs, friction stays etc. for doors , windows and open able panels
shall be heavy duty and of approved make as specified.

b.

Hinges for open able panels shall be heavy duty top hung stainless steel
friction hinges selected for specified wind load and dead loads.

c.

All fittings and locks shall be as specified.

d.

Each open able panel of the Curtain glazing shall be provided with:
i)

1 No. - 4 point cremone locking set with die-cast handle turning

900 , of approved colour, of GIESSE or equivalent brand as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and fixed with stainless
steel fixing plate and stainless steel screws.

ii)

2 nos. heavy duty top hung stainless steel friction hinges

openable upto 150 of COTSWOLD or equivalent brand as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and fixed with stainless
steel screws,

iii)

1 no. triangular sign (with perforations) of Birla 3 M film or

equivalent brand as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge (side of
the triangle minimum 70 mm) and fixed on glass surface # 1.

14.

SEALANTS & GASKETS

14.1

Documentation
All sealant applications must be clearly designated on the applicable shop
drawings with reference to a master sealant schedule specifying materials,
special instructions and application procedures. Documentation shall be done
as specified. It shall be ensured that all the silicone sealants, for various
applications in the work, are used well within the shelf life.

14.2

Selection of Sealants
a.

The compatibility and sequence of installation for all sealants must be

carefully considered in all proposals in order to ensure the required
curing and performance.

CW- 128

14.3

b.

Sealants must not degrade and / or fail under any or all design
conditions including wind, thermal and seismic movements, exposure to
water and humidity, ultraviolet exposure and / or other adverse
environmental conditions.

c.

The designations of sealant types specified herein are intended for

general design guidance only. The contractor may, however, use sealant
equivalent to or superior than that specified herein. Nothing extra shall
be payable on this account.

d.

Final selection by the contractor for the sealant types shall be based on
their conformity with the performance requirements specified herein
and as per the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. The
contractor may use sealant of equivalent grade and characteristics,
manufactured by the manufacturer other than those specified herein,
based on recommendations of those sealant manufacturers for specified
use but with the prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The
contractor shall submit the documentary evidence in this regard.

e.

All precautions shall be taken during design of structural silicone bite

and also during fabrication of the curtain wall to prevent failure of
sealant during the guarantee period of 3 years from the date of
completion of work and even beyond, upto the expected service life of
the curtain wall. The contractor shall obtain from the specialist agency /
curtain wall fabricator / sealant manufacturer and submit in writing the
precautions and preventive measures, if any, to be taken by the
Engineer-in-Charge after the completion of 3 years guarantee period.

f.

Sealants and gaskets shall not leach, discolour, stain or dry.

Structural Silicone Sealant

a.

The sealant manufacturer shall design the silicone bite for the design
loads as specified and likely to come during the life of the curtain
glazing for arriving at bite size of the structural silicone sealant. This
shall be substantiated by suitable laboratory and field test carried out by
the sealant manufacturer on the actual samples of the substrates (glass,
backer rod, aluminium, spacer tape etc.).

b.

The structural silicone sealant bite as designed by the sealant

manufacturer and as per the approved shop drawings shall be provided.
If the contractor provides larger bite than that specified, nothing extra
shall be payable. As far as possible, three-sided adhesion of structural
silicone bite shall not be provided. Wherever unavoidable, the specific
recommendations and approval of the sealant manufacturer shall be
obtained in this regard and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge.

CW- 129

c.

The Structural sealant shall be two part pump-filled Silicone sealant DC

983 of Dow Corning or equivalent recommended by manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. For site applications of the
Structural silicone sealant, one part Silicone sealant DC 995 of Dow
Corning or equivalent recommended by manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge, shall be used. The weather silicone sealant shall
be one-part Silicone sealant DC 795 of Dow Corning or equivalent of
other approved brand as per the list of approved materials. The weather
silicone sealant to be filled in the grooves of the aluminium composite
panel cladding shall be one-part, non streaking high performance
silicone sealant DC 991 HP of Dow Corning or equivalent of other
approved brand as per the list of approved materials. The weather
silicone sealant to be used for fully glazed fixed partitions in the butt
joints between the glass panels shall be transparent one-part Silicone
sealant DC 799 clear of Dow Corning or equivalent of other approved
brand as per the list of approved materials.

d.

The structural sealant to be used, as specified, for all exposed and

concealed metal to metal (including tight or butt type metal to metal
assembly prior to assembly) or glass to glass shall be 2-part silicone
sealant, conforming to the manufacturers recommendations for the
specific uses and performance criteria. The sealant shall be applied
using two -part pump for the same. All the sealing shall be done in a
clean and controlled environment as specified by the silicone sealant
manufacturer. The initial curing shall be done by laying the panel in the
horizontal position only and the panel shall not be disturbed till the
initial curing period is over. It shall be tooled in a workmanlike manner
within 30 minutes of its application and shall not be disturbed / tooled
after initial curing.

e.

The substrate surface (glass, anodized aluminium etc.) shall be cleaned

properly using isopropyl alcohol and swapped dry with clean dry cloth.
Then, the coupling agent (primer) having adhesion to silicone and the
substrate shall be applied for better bonding of the silicone sealant.

f.

The sealant manufacturer shall conduct all the laboratory and field-tests
as required for sealant for aluminium sections and glass substrates.
Laboratory reports shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for
record before taking up the actual work.

g.

In unavoidable circumstances, where it is required to provide structural

silicone sealant in - situ, 1-part structural silicon sealant 995 of Dow
Corning or equivalent of other approved brand shall be used with prior
approval from the Engineer-in-charge. Mechanical supports shall be

CW- 130

provided, if required, till the final curing of the structural silicone.

Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
h.

14.4

The contractor / specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator of the curtain

wall may at their own cost provide structural silicone sealant DC 995 /
DC 983 of Dow Corning or equivalent as weather silicone sealant as
well for water tightness also, apart for structural requirements, instead
of weather sealant - 795 of Dow Corning or equivalent as required and
as specified. However, nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

Weather Silicone Sealant

The grade of weather silicone sealant, wherever required like for concealed
metal to metal, metal to glass and metal to concrete/ masonry such as
embedment and lapping of flashings etc. where elements are to be installed or
embedded, the weather sealant shall be of grade 795 of Dow Corning or
equivalent for the other approved brand, as per the recommendations of the
sealant manufacturers. Where it is not practicable to provide aluminium
flashing, the gap between the aluminum sections and the glass / concrete /
masonry, if so required, shall be filled with weather sealant as specified above,
including providing and fixing backer rod, wherever required, as per the
approved shop drawings. The weather silicone sealant shall be of approved
colour and shade. The weather silicone sealant for fixing the butt jointed glass
for the fixed partitions shall be transparent DC 799 clear of Dow Corning or
equivalent of other approved brands.

14.5

Back-up Materials
Back-up materials like Backer rod etc. shall be open cell polyurethane, closed
cell non-gaseous polyethylene foam or non gassing polyolefin as per the
written recommendations from the applicable sealant manufacturer for each
specific application. Where the joint is too shallow to allow foam rod ,
polyethylene tape may be used subject to written recommendations from the
applicable sealant manufacturer for specific application. Shape, size, hardness,
compatibility and bond breaking requirements shall be as per the approved
shop drawings.

14.6

Compatibility
All sealants must be non-staining and compatible with adjoining sealants,
backup materials, substrate materials and their respective finishes and / or
applied colour coatings. Care shall be taken to ensure that two different types
of sealant do not come in contact with each other unless compatibility is
satisfied as per manufacturers specifications.

CW- 131

14.7

14.8

Guarantee
a.

The Contractor shall give Guarantee for materials, workmanship and

performance of sealants for a period of 3 years from the date of
completion of the work in the enclosed format.

b.

The sealant manufacturer shall confirm in writing that

i)

The sealants used are the best suitable for the purpose intended
and are compatible with materials in contact with sealants.

ii)

The sealants are UV resistant and shall not deteriorate on the

exposure to solar radiation.

iii)

The silicone bites are correctly designed.

iv)

The sealants are suitable for ambient conditions and have been
applied under controlled environment specified by the
manufacturer. The Structural silicone bites provided are as per
the approved design and the approved shop drawings.

v)

That all necessary laboratory and field tests have been conducted
as specified and that the sealants conform to the required
standards.

Certification and Tests

Certification and tests shall be as specified.

14.9

Caulking compound
Dow Corning weather silicone sealant DC 795 or equivalent as approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge, (of approved colour and shade to match adjacent
material wherever exposed and visible) shall be used around frame / flashings
or between frame / flashing and RCC / masonry surface.

14.10 Gaskets
a.

Gaskets shall be extruded micro wave/ steam cured EPDM / silicone

gasket of approved quality compatible with substrates, finishes and
other components, they are in contact with. All gaskets exposed directly
on the exterior face shall be silicon gaskets, which are UV resistant.
They shall not degenerate, discolour or leach on exposure to solar
radiations / rains / pollutants etc.

CW- 132

b.

Extruded EPDM sections shall have the following properties:

Shore Hardness
Tensile strength
Elongation
Ozone Resistance

70 5A
Min. 70kg/cm2
300%
No crack at 50 5 pphm, test temp. of
40 2 0C, test Duration of 96 hours and
20% strain.

c.

Spacer block / spacer tape shall have a Shore hardness of 80, or as

recommended by supplier.

d.

Gaskets for any lites shall be in one piece with injection-moulded

corners, free of flashing and burrs.

e.

Manufacturers test Certificate shall be submitted as specified.

14.11 Setting Blocks

Setting blocks, used to support the dead load of the glass, shall be ozone
resistant extruded neoprene / EPDM compound or fully cured silicone material
conforming to the design criteria, all as recommended by the glass
manufactures. The dead weight of the glass shall not be transferred directly to
the aluminum panel frame.
14.12 Jamb Shims
Jamb shims used to centre and station the glass shall be ozone resistant
extruded neoprene / EPDM compound or fully cured silicone material
conforming to the design criteria, all as recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
15

SEPARATORS
a.

The separators shall be provided at all metal to metal surface contact for
dissimilar materials to prevent any bi-metallic charge generation /
reaction. Separators, wherever required, shall be PTFE (Teflon) of rigid
type, with high impact resistance with a minimum thickness of 0.8mm
with smooth surfaces on both sides as approved by the Engineer in
Charge.

b.

Test Certificates shall be as specified.

CW- 133

16.

GLASS

16.1

General
a.

All glass and glazing materials shall be as specified.

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.

v.

16.2

6 mm thick Annealed clear float glass.

6 mm thick Heat strengthened clear float glass.
6 mm thick laminated clear float glass.
6 mm thick Heat strengthened Azurlite coloured (tinted) float
glass having reflective soft quoting on surface # 2 of

SS-08 Emicool of Emirate Glass.

VS 7 08 Viracon

Solarbel SS A07 of Glaverbel.

6 mm thick heat strengthened Azurlite coloured (tinted Float
glass having reflective soft coating on surface # 2 of

SS-20 Emicool of Emirates Glass

VS 7 20 of Viracon

Solarbel SS A 17 of Glaverbel.

b.

Vision and spandrel glass shall have characteristics as specified. The

performance characteristics of glass panels, have to be ensured by the
contractor within the constraints of aesthetic requirements like colour,
shade, reflectivity etc. and performance requirements like light
transmission, U value, shading coefficient, relative heat gain etc. , as
specified. Minor variations in the characteristics of glass on superior
side shall be allowed, if required by the contractor with the approval of
Engineer-in-Charge, but without any extra cost to the Department on
this account.

c.

Samples of glasses are available in the office of the Engineer in Charge. The contractor shall offer glasses from one of the approved
glass manufacturer / processor.

Installation
a.

The Contractor shall procure and install glass panels and carry out
glazing work as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

b.

All glass panels shall be of accurate sizes as required.

c.

All glass panels shall have clear undamaged edges and surfaces, which
are not disfigured.

CW- 134

16.3

d.

Any glass panel that does not fit in the curtain glazing shall be rejected
and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost. Therefore, all care and
precautions shall be taken by the contractor while procuring the glass
panels from the manufacturer / processors of the glass. No claims of
any kind or any hindrance shall be entertained from the contractor on
this account.

e.

Glass panels shall not be in direct contact with the aluminum

framework.

Heat Strengthened Glass

Heat strengthened glass shall be as per ASTM C 1048 and shall not deviate in
surface flatness by more than 0.23 mm within 265mm of leading or trailing
edge, or 0.076mm peak to valley within the main body of the sheet. Direction
of ripples shall be consistent, in conformity with the architectural / aesthetic
requirements and their extent shall be within acceptable limits of tolerance as
per manufacturers specifications. Distortion of glass shall be controlled as
much as possible during heat strengthening. Sag distortion shall be unidirectional. Surface compression shall be in the range of 27-48 N/mm2 .

16.4

Identification
Permanent identification marking on glass shall be accomplished by a
technique selected by the manufacturer. The location of the marking shall be
proposed by the Manufacturer and approved by the Engineer in - Charge.
All glass shall be delivered to site with the manufacturers label of
identification attached.

16.5 Glass Analysis

The manufacturers wind pressure analysis and thermal analysis showing that
the specified maximum deflections and probabilities of breakage not exceeding
the prescribed limits as specified, shall be submitted by the contractor for the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
16.6

Submittals
a.

The contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge for

approval a complete list of materials to be used, including the sealants
proposed and such samples based on the list of approved materials
attached with the tender document. The contractor shall also submit
manufacturers / processors data describing the product characteristics,
installation instructions, handling, maintenance procedures and
recommendations for each product.

CW- 135

16.7

b.

Also, the contractor shall submit methodology and quality assurance

statement for all glass and glazing work including the design and profile
dimensions of glazing pockets for approval. The same shall be
supported by such statements from applicable glass manufacturer /
processor and sealant manufacturers.

c.

A seal ant-substrate test report shall be submitted for each type of sealant
for adhesion and compatibility.

d.

Certification that the glass thickness and the heat treatment have been
selected to provide the strength required to meet the specified structural
and thermal performance requirements.

e.

Glass analysis report

Curing of Sealants
Structural / weather silicone sealants in workshop / factory glazed panels shall
be fully cured prior to shipment to project site and installation. Also, care shall
be taken while doing the glazing work as not to disturb the panels for minimum
initial curing period for the sealant as specified by the sealant manufacturer.
All the glazing work shall be carried out in the clean and controlled
environmental conditions as specified by the sealant manufacturer.

16.8

Breakage
All glass with any breakage, any damage to the coatings or any other defects
caused due to the negligence of the contractor or caused by the installation of
faulty work by him shall be rejected. Such defects shall be rectified and / or
glass shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. No delay or claim whatsoever of
any kind shall be entertained from the contractor on this account.
After completion of work and during guarantee period as specified, the
Contractor shall replace at his own cost any broken glass panes ( breakage not
attributable to vandalism or accident), defective insulated glazed units (evident
due to condensation or dirt between the lites, failure of seal and damage to
internal glass panes, staining, damage to the soft coating etc.) for a period of 3
years from the date of completion of work. The decision of the Engineer-inCharge as regards the cause of breakage of the glass shall be final and binding
on the contractor.

CW- 136

16.9

Loads
Glass panels shall be designed to withstand specified lateral imposed loads and
other specified loads and comply with requirements of the relevant Indian and
international codes.

16.10 Thickness of Glass

The Contractor shall verify the thickness of glass in accordance with AS 1288
Glass in Buildings Selection and Installation to satisfy design performance
requirements and design codes.
16.11 Selection of Glass
a.

Glass shall be free from defects and non-visible foreign inclusions /

impurities such as un dissolved lime stone particles, brick particles,
nickel sulphide or other impurities detrimental to its performance. The
contractor shall obtain and submit test report from the manufacturer /
processor of the glass for heat soaking test for the lot of glass supplied
as per the manufactures specifications / relevant standards. Defects
such as bubbles, waves, spots, scratches, spalls, discolouration, visibly
imperfect coating, chipping, and bubbles or delamination of opacifier
film shall be limited in accordance with the Manufacturers / trade
guidelines. The glass is to be produced / processed in such a way that
the rollers are parallel to the horizontal position of the glass. Glass shall
be consistent in colour.

b.

Glass panels shall be selected on the basis of product quality standards

specified by the manufacturer / processor and as specified herein. The
glass panels with scratches, pinholes, clusters, distortion, colour
variations, flaws in coating, damage to the coating and other defects
shall be defected.

c.

Each type of glass shall be obtained from only one manufacturer /

processor and in one lot. Adequate spare quantity shall be ordered to
cover for breakage and for replacement by the contractor during the
guarantee period of 3 years from the date of completion of the work.
The contractor shall also make necessary provision and suitable
arrangement for replacement of broken / defective glass during
guarantee period of 3 years from the date of completion of the work as
specified herein.

CW- 137

16.12 Glazing
Manufacturers / processors glazing instructions regarding installation,
dimensional tolerance, bite and edge clearance etc. shall be followed.
16.13 Protection during storage before installation
All glass panels shall be stored with particular care and protected against
abrasion, sun and moisture prior to installation. It shall be ensured by the
contractor that the glass is covered with the protective paper free of any acids
to prevent surface etching. Also, such protective papers shall generally be
changed within 45 days to prevent etching / damage. It shall be stored in a dry
place. No welding work shall be allowed to be carried near to the glass to
prevent any permanent strains. Any cement slurry splash on the glass surface
shall be instantly cleaned to prevent etching / damage. Strong detergents, acids
or scrapper blades shall not be used for cleaning the stains. Tinted or coated
glasses shall not be cleaned during direct sun light. Any water splash near to
the storage place shall be avoided.
16.14 Thermal Stress
a.

Precautions specified by glass manufacturers / processor to minimize

thermal stress must be followed.

b.

A thermal stress analysis shall be obtained from glass manufacturer /

processor prior to fabrication and their recommendations shall be
followed.

c.

Allowance shall be made for thermal movements due to an air

temperature range of 60oC (+ 10 C to + 70 C) and a material
temperature range of 100oC.

16.15 Float Glass

The float glass shall of approved make as per the list of approved
material enclosed with the tender.
a.

Quality and finishes : q3 unless otherwise indicated. ASTM C

Type I

1036

b.

Heat strengthening

: ASTM 1048 HS type I;

Surface compression 27 - 48 N/ mm2,

c.

Heat treatment shall be adequate to provide strength to resist specified

loads and induced stresses within safety glazing standards.

CW- 138

d.

No tong marks shall be permitted.

e.

The processing of the float glass for soft coating, i.e. applying reflective
/ low E offline coating with metal alloys by magnetron sputtering
process by a continuous electromagnetic process in a vaccumized
atmosphere, shall be done on the glass to achieve the performance
characteristics as specified.

16.16 Insulated Glazed Units (IGUs) in the vision panels

a.

Insulated glazed units shall be obtained only from approved

manufacturers / processors as per the approved list.

b.

Insulated units shall be factory assembled, with multiple panes,

hermetically sealed, separated by and sealed to spacer tubes perforated
on inner exposed face forming airtight dehydrated airspace inside the
insulated units as per ASTM E 774 Class I. The IGUs shall be
assembled (prepared) by the manufacturer/ processor of the glass as per
the approved list, in their dedicated workshops / factory abroad. The
contractor shall import assembled IGUs from the manufacturer /
processor of the glass and assembling of IGUs at site or in the workshop
of the specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator shall not be permitted.

c.

Space between two glass panes: 12 mm dehydrated air or argon gas.

d.

Spacer: Aluminum spacer tube 12 mm x 12 mm perforated on inner

exposed face shall be provided. Primary silicone (Polyisobutylene)
sealant shall be applied on the faces of Aluminum spacer tube in contact
with the glasses. Primary silicone (Polyisobutylene) sealant shall keep
in position, the glass panes at required spacing and alignment till the
curing of the secondary structural silicone sealant besides providing
barrier having high moisture penetration resistance and low MVTR
(Moisture Vapour Transmission Rate). The spacer tube shall be jointed
at corners using PVC sleeve of suitable size or shall have mitered joint
by cutting right-angled notch in a workman like manner. Also,
desiccants of molecular sieves shall be filled inside the spacer tube to
dehumidify the air entrapped inside the IGU and keep it perfectly dry. It
shall have capacity to prevent any condensation of moisture inside the
IGU for 10 years guarantee period from the date of completion of the
work. No damage of any kind shall be accepted for IGUs, which in any
manner compromise their integrity and IGUs in which any condensation
is noticed shall not be accepted. Such IGUs shall be rejected and
replaced by the contractor at his own cost. No delay or claim of any
kind shall be entertained from the contractor on this account. If required,
capillary tubes may be provided to prevent passage of moisture into the
IGUs and to prevent premature saturation of the desiccants.

CW- 139

e.

Spacer seal : Dual seal

Primary seal :

Polyisobutylene sealant on bearing surfaces of the

spacers in contact with the glass panes to keep in
position the glass panes at required spacing and
alignment till the curing of the secondary structural
silicone sealant. The primary seal shall also provide
barrier having high moisture penetration resistance
and low MVTR (Moisture Vapour Transmission
Rate).

Secondary seal :

The IGUs shall be hermetically sealed by use of

two part pump filled Structural Silicone sealant 983
of Dow Corning or equivalent as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge for bonding the glass panes
and sealing the IGUs.

f.

Edge Deleting / stripping: The edge deleting shall be carried out by

complete removal of the soft coating in narrow strips at the edges on the
perimeter of the reflective/ low E coated glass panels as per the
recommendations of the glass manufacturer / processor and the sealant
manufacturer. The width of the strip shall be equal to the width of the
structural sealant that will be in the contact with the glass after
fabrication of the IGU. The manufacturer/ processor of the glass shall be
suitably instructed to offer soft coated glass, wherever required, with pre
deleted edges by using protective tape / film. Otherwise, the stripping
shall be carried out by grinding operation or any other approved method
with coated face up. The fabrication of IGU shall be done within 24
hours after the stripping operation is completed.

g.

Sightlines The sightline dimensions shall be established after the sizes

of the structural silicone sealant bite have been designed for the required
loads. This imaginary line around the perimeter of the glazing panels
correspond to the line to which the sealant contacting the lites are to be
finished off to ensure the requirements of the silicone bite during
fabrication of IGUs. The tolerance in the sightlines dimensions shall be
1.60 mm.

h.

If the glass has to be temporarily returned to the pallet before fabrication

of IGU after washing and drying, interleaving should be maintained
between the glass panes. A fine powder containing Lucite beads with no
acid shall be used for interleaving. When this glass is needed for
production of IGU, it shall again be washed and dried. Any glass that
has been washed and dried shall be fabricated into an IGU within 24
hours.

CW- 140

i.

The sealed insulated units which are fabricated at an elevation ( above

MSL) significantly different from that of the project site, shall be
provided with temporary venting of internal airspace and subsequent
sealing off vents or it shall be fabricated at similar air pressures to
prevent any warping of IGUs.

j.

The insulated glazed units shall be fabricated in the factory of the glass
processors / manufacturers in the controlled environment as specified by
the sealant manufacturers before shipment to site.

k.

All care shall be taken while fabricating IGUs as not to disturb the
panels for minimum initial curing period for the structural silicone
sealant as specified by the sealant manufacturer.

16.17 Laminating units

a.

The lites shall be laminated with interlayer of Polyvinyl butyral (PVB)

sheet of specified thickness in an autoclave with heat and pressure

b.

The laminated glass shall comply with ASTM C 1172

c.

The interlayer material (PVB) shall be clear or as specified with no

tendency to bubble, discolour or lose physical and mechanical
properties after laminating glass lites.

d.

The laminated panels shall be free of foreign substances, air or glass

pockets and shall not delaminate at edges.

16.18 Quality assurance

a.

The insulating units shall comply with ASTM E773 & E 774 CLASS I
with compliance certified by the manufacturer/ processor.

b.

The manufacturer/ processor for laminated glass shall certify

compliance with ASTM C 1172 , float glass with ASTM C1036, heattreated glass with ASTM C1048.

c.

The glasses shall comply with inspection and acceptance standards of

ASTM C 1376

16.19 Material Procurement

a.

Glass of one type shall be procured only from one manufacturer /

processor in a single lot including provision for spares / damaged
glasses.

CW- 141

b.

Each unit shall be labeled on spacer or pane as directed.

c.

The glazing panels (Monolithic Single, Insulated Glazed Units (IGUs),

Laminated Glass etc.) imported from approved glass manufacturer /
processor abroad, reach the factory / workshop of the specialist agency /
curtain wall fabricator in India subject to confirmations of quality and
other parameters, as specified. The contractor shall, on receipt of
consignment of glass at the factory / workshop of the specialist agency /
curtain wall fabricator, intimate in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge
requesting for inspection. The contractor shall be entirely responsible
for the safe custody, handling and watch and ward of the material. The
contractor shall also submit proof of procurement including invoices,
bills and payment of duties etc. for the material, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.

16.20 Glass certifications

a.

The manufacturer / processor shall certify that glass thickness, heat

treatment and all coatings have been selected and carried out to provide
required strength and performances as specified.

b.

Sealant - substrate test report shall be submitted for each sealant.

c.

Insulating and Laminated glass units shall be certified by the

manufacturer / processor for the required performances as specified.

16.21 Guarantee
a.

The Contractor shall guarantee the integrity and the coating of glass,
insulation of IGUs and lamination of laminated glass for a period of
three years from the date of completion of the work.

b.

The Contractor shall replace at his own cost any broken glass panes
(breakage not attributable to vandalism or accident), defective insulated
glazed units (evident due to condensation or dirt between the lites,
failure of seal and damage to internal glass panes, staining, damage to
the soft coating etc.) for a period of 3 years from the date of completion
of work. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as regards the cause of
breakage of the glass shall be final and binding on the contractor.

16.22 Tests
Tests shall be conducted as specified.

CW- 142

16.23 Edge Finish

a.

All structurally glazed panes shall have their edges matt finished-and
not highly polished to avoid any internal reflection of light around the
edges.

b.

Glass edges shall be protected against damage at all stages from

manufacturing to handing over of works. Panes with damaged edges
shall be rejected and replaced by the contractor at his own cost.

16.24 Precaution in storing and handling glasses

The glass manufacturer/ processor shall take necessary precautions as stated
below besides any other precautions not specifically mentioned herein :
a.

The reflective / low E coating on the glass shall be protected against

scratches, surface corrosion, staining and/ or any other abrasion.

b.

The glasses shall not be stored without a clean inter-leaving material.

Also they should not slide against each other.

c.

As the reflective / low E coated glasses are more susceptible to edge and
surface damage, they shall be suitably protected.
i)

The glasses shall be stored in a cool dry place away from direct
sunlight or freezing temperature. The glass shall not be wrap
stored in polyethylene sheets or other impermeable material to
prevent condensation and consequent staining.

ii)

The manufacturer / processor of the glass shall prevent extended

and undisturbed contact between glass and water that may come
in as condensation, rain or from sprinkler stream.

d.

The glass shall be protected from weld or grinding splatter.

e.

The reflective / low E coating shall be protected against contact with

acids or strong alkalies. Also, abrasive cleaners like fluorides salts and
hydrogen fluoride shall not be used for cleaning. Only isopropyl
alcohol, acetone, MEK, toluene etc. shall be used for cleaning the
surface as per the manufacturers recommendations. Petroleum products
shall not be used as cleaning agents. The glass shall be protected
against moisture from humidity, which can stain glass as well as
coating.

CW- 143

f.

Reflective / low E coating shall also be protected against splashes from

paints etc.

g.

While cleaning the glass by water before forming IGUs , the glass shall
be run through washer with coated surface facing up. Detergents shall
normally not be used. The coated glass shall never be stopped under
washer brushes, which may result in scratches. The washer assembly
itself shall be cleaned frequently by draining and flushing the water
tanks and by pressure washing all the washer sections. To effectively
remove the dirt, grease, fingerprints, smears, scum sealants residue,
Lucite separator or any other interleaving material, the glass shall be
pre-rinsed before passing through the washer. Worn out washer
brushes, which may cause damage to the soft-coated surface, shall be
replaced immediately and shall not be used for cleaning the glass. Nonhardened water only shall be used for cleaning the glass. The PH of the
wash water shall be close to 7 as far as possible. If hot water is used for
cleaning the glass, temperature of about 140 degree F is recommended.
A final rinse shall be done with de-ionized water and then the surface
dried by blowing air to prevent any water spots.

h.

To evaluate the washing of reflective / low E coated glass and to see

that there are no water spots, scratches, other marks etc., proper
inspection of the glass under suitable lighting shall be done after the
glass exits from washer and the drier, as per inspection guidelines of the
manufacturer and ASTM C 1376.

i.

Two washed glasses shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with
each other. Moreover the washed glass shall be used within 24 hrs. to
form IGUs.

j.

The soft coated glasses especially the low E glass shall be used to form
IGU within the shelf life of the coating as specified by the manufacturer.
Also special care shall be taken for cleaning and handling the low E
glass. The low E glass shall be touched only using soft and clean
gloves. If Suction cups are used for handling the glass they shall be
applied on non-coated surface only.

17.

METAL COATINGS

17.1

Anodizing / PVDF coating

Aluminum extruded sections shall be satin finish colour anodized to minimum
20 microns thickness, as per the approved colour and shade or PVDF coil /
spray coated to approved metallic colour and shade to minimum 30 microns
thickness.

CW- 144

17.2

Galvanizing
The brackets for the curtain glazing shall be hot dipped galvanized to have
mass of zinc coating not less 610 gms per sqm of the steel area.

17.3 Samples
The Contractor shall prepare three samples, which shall define the colour and
gloss of anodizing and PVDF / lumiflon-based fluoropolymer resin coating and
submit them for approval of the Engineer in - Charge.
17.4

Matching of Finish
Wherever the same colour finish is specified for extruded aluminium sections
and composite aluminium sheets, the Contractor shall ensure that the colour of
both is matched as closely as possible to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.

17.5

17.6

Testing and Sampling Procedures for manufacturer

a.

In-process testing shall be performed on test specimens.

b.

All test samples shall be properly identified with date, batch number and
shift indication.

Field Touch-up and Repair

The contractor shall supply materials and carry out air dry touch up for spray
or brush application as per instruction of manufacturer and as directed by the
Engineer in - Charge. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

17.7

Guarantee
a.

The contractor shall give a written guarantee in the enclosed format

against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of Three (3)
years from the date of the completion of work.

b.

The following are considered as defects for PVDF / lumiflon-based

fluoropolymer resin coating without being limited thereto:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)

Peeling
Cracking
Blistering
Uniform Chalking in excess of #8 Chalk rating when measured
in accordance with ASTM D 4214.

CW- 145

v)

vi)

Uniform Fading or colour change in excess of 5 NBS unit when

calculated from measurement on a spectrophotometer or colour
meter capable of colour measurement by reflectance reading in
accordance with ASTM D2244.
Uniform gloss reduction in excess of 50%

18.

STRUCTURAL GLAZED WINDOWS / CURTAIN GLAZING AND

ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE PANEL CLADDING SYSTEMS

18.1

General
a.

The method of assembly, reinforcing and anchorage of the curtain wall

systems, wherever indicated, is schematic. Locations and method of
providing the same shall be the contractors responsibility, who shall
design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to suit each specified
condition in an acceptable manner complying with the requirements
specified hereinafter. The curtain wall system shall be with open groove
system for curtain glazing and with closed groove system for aluminium
composite panel cladding.

b.

Visible joints shall be as shown on Architectural / approved shop

drawings as instructed by the Engineer in - Charge.

c.

All parts shall be secured by concealed means wherever possible. Where

exposed to view, screw positions are to be indicated on the shop
drawings. Exposed screws shall be of the countersunk type coloured in
same finish as that of aluminium and shall be of non- magnetic stainless
steel and shall be evenly and neatly located in the approved manner and
shall be fixed after dipping in the weather silicone sealant to prevent any
ingress of water/ moisture into the curtain glazing.

d.

All components shall be assembled, secured, anchored, reinforced,

sealed and made structurally stable & weather tight in a manner not
restricting thermal & wind movements of the curtain wall and also any
relative movement between the building structure and the curtain wall
and / or within the curtain wall. Whereve r possible, sealants shall be
concealed.

e.

All fastenings into or through aluminium sections shall be by use of

non-magnetic stainless steel screws, nuts & bolts, washers, anchor
fasteners and toggle etc . The grade of the stainless steel to be used for
the anchor fasteners and screws, nuts & bolts and washers etc shall be as
specified. However, for fabrication of panels with Aluminium
Composite Panels cladding material where pop riveting is to be done,
the rivet shall be of aluminium alloy.

CW- 146

f.

18.2

Movement of building components to which the Curtain Wall is

attached including long term and short term movements due to thermal
effect, structural effect, wind pressure, seismic forces, erection or dead
loads, creep, column shortening, deflection, torsion and vibrations etc
shall be free and noiseless. This shall be achieved without any strain or
stress being transferred to the glass, without buckling of any
components, without excessive stress to any members or assemblies and
without compromising on any of the performance requirement of the
curtain wall.

Waterproofing
Following precautions shall be taken by the contractor to ensure that the
curtain glazing and aluminium composite panel cladding are completely water
tight during its guarantee period as well as expected service life besides any
other precautions, not specifically mentioned herein :
a.

A drainage system must be incorporated into the windows / curtain

glazing system. The windows / curtain glazing system shall have
provision for air pressure equalization (all the internal spaces shall be
vented by acceptable means to ensure air pressure equalization ) so that
water leakage and condensation, if any shall be drained or discharged to
exterior face of the curtain glazing. For aluminium composite panel
cladding, the rain screen principle of water tightness shall be adopted.

b.

Care shall be taken that the sections of the aluminum extrusions used for
structural framing of windows / curtain glazing provide for proper
drainage of water that in-filters into the system by gravity and for this
the section should have proper slope and weep holes as required. These
shall be clearly indicated on the shop drawings.

c.

Movement of water on exposed faces must be controlled to ensure that

water is not retained and that elements will not be damaged or corroded
by water and to minimize the potential for algae and fungal growth as a
result of standing or trapped water.

d.

Proper splice plates made out of minimum 1.5 mm thick solid aluminum
sheet of 200 mm lengths and width compatible with the section shall be
provided on the junction of mullion and transoms. The periphery of the
splice plate shall be sealed by weather silicone sealant of grade DC 795
of Dow Corning or equivalent as approved and directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The same shall be indicated on the shop drawings
also.

CW- 147

18.3

e.

EPDM gaskets of the quality as specified and of required size and

thickness shall be provided at all required locations to prevent ingress of
water or moisture. The same shall be indicated on the shop drawings
also.

f.

Weather silicone sealant of specified grade shall be provided in the

required manner to prevent ingress of water or moisture. The same shall
be indicated on the shop drawings also.

g.

Aluminum sheet flashing 1.0mm thick made out of solid aluminium

sheet , wherever required, shall be provided including sealing the gap
between the flashing and the other material like RCC, masonry,
aluminum etc. by using weather silicone sealant as specified.

Anchorage System and Building Frame

Each glazed unit shall be fixed to the R CC / structural steel member of the
building through brackets fixed only at the floor levels. No brackets shall be
allowed to be fixed on R.C.C parapet wall or facia / masonry in addition to the
ones fixed at the floor levels. The brackets at floor levels shall be designed to
take all the dead loads, wind and seismic loads, other imposed & incidental
loads, etc. as specified, on the curtain wall and transfer to the structure. In
exceptional cases in curtain wall in curvilinear profiles etc., due to structural
constraints of stability only, if the contractor proposes to introduce any
additional wind bracket on facia in addition to the main bracket at the floor
levels, he may be allowed but only with the prior approval of Engineer-inCharge. However, for design of aluminum structural framing (mullions) of
curtain wall, unsupported length between the main brackets at the floor levels
shall only be considered for the purpose of structural analysis and design. The
anchor fasteners of required capacity and in numbers, as required, as per the
structural design shall be provided for each bracket. All anchor fasteners shall
be of stainless steel and of specified grade. The contractor shall also take all
necessary precautions to fix the anchor fasteners without cutting the steel
reinforcement. Re-bar location detectors may be used to locate the existing
reinforcement. The holes of the required sizes shall be pre drilled in RCC/
structural steel for fixing anchor fasteners/ bolts etc. and anchor fastener put in
hole and torque tightened. Nothing extra shall be payable on these accounts.

18.4

Mullions and Transoms

The sections of mullions and transoms shall be designed to restrict deflection
under dead loads, wind load, seismic loads etc. as specified and shall be rigid
and stable enough to support and retain the in-fill panels in position under all
conditions. The mullions and transoms shall also be designed for additional
horizontal loads from the cleaning equipment and process besides horizontal
live loads as specified.

CW- 148

18.5

Spandrel Units
a.

Spandrel shall be of glass having same colour matching with vision

areas after using a shadow box as specified.

b.

Structural spandrel wall, fins, slab or beam, aluminium frame work,

anchor fasteners, brackets , shadow boxes, fire stop (barrier)-cumsmoke seals and other construction shall not be visible through the glass
in the spandrel portion of the curtain glazing from the exterior and shall
be fully concealed behind the shadow box.

c.

A shadow box shall be provided at a distance of minimum 50 mm

behind the spandrel glass panel to ensure that the insulation panel
material does not come in contact with the soft coating of the spandrel
glass to prevent any damage to the coating on account of any chemical
reaction or otherwise. It shall consist of an approved black fibre glass
non-woven tissue stuck on surface #1of 50 mm thick semi-rigid fibre
glass wool insulation panel of minimum density of 48 kg per cum., and
minimum 1.5 mm thick colour anodized (minimum 20 microns) solid
aluminum sheet tray, on surface #2 by using suitable stainless steel
rivets / nuts, bolts and washers to hold the insulation panel in position.
The periphery shall be properly sealed. Surface #1 shall be adequately
protected against damage until spandrel glazing is done. Further, care
shall be taken that the aluminum sheet backing of the shadow box does
not heave or warp due to thermal stresses and / or its self-weight. Proper
gaps at the edges of the tray shall be provided to accommodate
movements on account of thermal stresses besides making elliptical
slots, if required to facilitate movements. The shadow box shall be fixed
to the structural framing of the curtain glazing by using stainless steel
screws. The fixing arrangement shall be as per the approved shop
drawings.

d.

Fire stop (barrier) - cum - smoke seals at the soffit level of RCC facia
shall be provided and fixed continuously using stainless steel screws
dipped in weather silicone sealant to the approval of the Chief Fire
Officer, Mumbai and other authorities. The G.I sheet tray of the fire stop
(barrier) - cum - smoke seals shall be overlapped by minimum 25mm at
the continuity joints and the joints sealed using weather silicone sealant.
The aluminum flashing at the sill level as specified shall be installed
continuously in the spandrel portion using stainless steel screws dipped
in weather silicone sealant. The aluminium flashings shall be
overlapped by minimum 25mm at the continuity joints and the joints
sealed using weather silicone sealant. The fixing arrangement shall be as
specified and as per the approved shop drawings.

CW- 149

e.

18.6

18.7

18.8

Aluminum sheet flashing using 1.0mm thick solid aluminium sheet ,

wherever required , shall be provided at the sill level including
overlapping the flashing at the joint , sealing the joint as well as the gap
between the flashing and the other material like RCC, masonry,
aluminum etc. by using weather silicone sealant as specified.

Ventilators, Openable Windows and Doors

a.

Ventilators, open able windows and doors shall be provided at positions

as shown on the architectural drawings. The open able panels when in
closed position shall remain watertight under all weather conditions and
pass the water tightness tests as specified. Besides, the open able panels
shall appear similar to the fixed ones from outside.

b.

All hardware and accessories shall be provided and fixed by the

contractor and shall be as specified.

Coping and Soffit Trimmer

a.

All coping and soffit panels shall have aluminium structural frame fixed
rigidly to the structure.

b.

All joints between coping / soffit panels and vertical face of the curtain
wall and within coping / soffit panels shall be sealed by providing
suitable solid aluminium sheet minimum 1.0 mm thick flashings as
specified, wherever required using stainless steel screws dipped in
weather silicone sealant. Also the fine gap between the flashing and the
other material like RCC, masonry, Aluminium framework etc. shall be
properly sealed by filling weather silicone sealant, as specified to
provide complete water tightness.

c.

Coping and soffits shall be visibly flat in all lighting conditions.

Aluminum composite panel Cladding

a.

Aluminum composite panel cladding material shall be rigid and of

adequate strength. It shall have architectural flatness for creating smooth
monolithic surface. It shall satisfy all the performance parameters. The
panels shall be 4 mm thick composite units with aluminum sheet of 0.50
mm (minimum) thickness on each side and a sandwiched core layer of 3
mm thick non toxic, non-combustible, thermoplastic, low density
polyethylene (LDPE) or mineral core, to provide a monolithic
composite sheet. Metallic colour coatings to aluminium sheets shall be
coil coated to ensure superior colour uniformity and quality. The coating
shall be UV resistant exterior grade PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) or
lumiflon-based fluoropolymer resin coating, for colour & gloss

CW- 150

retention, flexibility and film adhesion for forming, besides resistance to

humidity, impact, salt spray, pollution, abrasion and graffiti. For solid
(opaque) colours, the total dry film thickness of the coating shall be 20
microns (minimum) consisting of a conversion coat, an inhibitive
primer layer and a top colour coat (two coat, two bake system). For
metallic colours, the total dry film thickness of the coating shall be 30
microns (minimum) consisting of conversion coat, an inhibitive primer,
metallic colour coat colour coating and clear top coat (three coat, three
bake system).
b.

The PVDF / lumiflon-based fluoropolymer resin coating shall meet or

exceed all the requirements of AAMA 2605.

c.

The resin content of the PVDF coating shall be minimum 70%.

d.

Specular gloss as per ASTM D523 shall be 30% 5%. The coated
surface shall comply with the Specification for Coated Coil for
Exterior Building Applications issued by European Coil Coating
Association.

e.

The reverse side of the panel shall be chromatised before primer and
shall have service coat of polyester based coating (total protection 3-7
micron thick).

f.

The cladding panels shall have uniform colour and gloss over the entire
installation.

g.

The fabrication and installation of the cladding systems shall be carried

out as per manufacturers instructions with invisible/ concealed
fastenings, aluminium structural framework, weather silicone sealants
and properly tooled etc.

h.

All cladding panel sheet shall be obtained in one lot from the
manufacturer including keeping provision for wastage and damaged
sheets.

i.

Each individual panel shall be true to line, level and square ness and
shall be guaranteed for a flatness of 0.8 mm from the true face after
installation under no-wind conditions.

j.

Deviations from the true alignment of adjoining panels shall not be

cumulative.

k.

Full load deflections shall be kept to the minimum possible. Each panel
shall be capable of withstanding 3 KN/ Sqm. wind pressure without any
permanent deformation.

CW- 151

l.

The cladding system shall be adequately ventilated. The air-gap

between the cladding panels and the concrete / masonry wall shall be at
least 50 mm to allow proper ventilation. The cavity shall be closed by a
perforated vermin-proof closer at bottom and by a flashing made out of
1.0 mm thick solid aluminium sheet at top with a vermin proof air outlet
built-in.

m.

The fabrication process including cutting, grooving, benching,

punching, shearing, brake- forming, roll-forming, folding, drilling,
joining, routing, bolting and riveting as well as installation shall be
performed as per manufacturers instructions and as specified herein.
The panel shall be fabricated in the workshop / factory in a workman
like manner with perfect mitered joints. The joints shall be strengthened
by using aluminum cleats of required size and thickness fixed to the
corners of the panels by way of drilling and pop riveting as per the
approved shop drawings.

n.

The panels shall be backed by aluminium support framework fabricated

for design loads, as per the approved shop drawings, fixed to R.C.C /
Masonry with aluminium brackets. The surface of the bracket in contact
with R.C.C / Masonry shall not be polished. As far as possible, the
contractor shall take all precautions to avoid cutting through any
reinforcement bars while fixing the brackets. Each Alumini um
Composite Panel cladding shall be fixed to the RCC / Masonry /
structural steel member of the building through brackets fixed only at
the floor levels. No brackets at intermediate level shall be allowed to be
fixed on R.C.C in addition to the ones fixed at the floor levels. If due to
structural constraints of stability, the contractor proposes to introduce
any additional wind bracket in addition to the main bracket at the floor
levels, he may be allowed but only with the prior approval of Engineerin-Charge. However, for design of aluminum structural framing
(mullions) of curtain wall with aluminium composite panel cladding,
unsupported length between the main brackets at the floor levels shall
only be considered for the purpose of structural analysis and design.
All anchor fasteners shall be of stainless steel and of specified grade.
The contractor shall also take all necessary precautions to fix the anchor
fasteners without cutting the steel reinforcement. Re-bar location
detectors may be used to locate the existing reinforcement. Nothing
extra shall be payable on these accounts.

o.

The aluminum composite cladding panel shall be visually inspected for

flatness, edge damage, dimpling, buckling, oil canning, bulge and / or
delamination, if any. Defective material, if any, shall be rejected. Also,
it shall be free of dirt, stains, grease marks, discolouration etc. These
shall be cleaned with Methyl Ethyl Ketone, if required. However,

CW- 152

defective panels shall be rejected and replaced by the contractor at his

own cost.
p.

The finished surface shall be protected with a 80 micron thick self

adhesive protective tape film tested to withstand at least six months of
exposure to local environment without losing the original peel off
characteristics or causing stains or other damages.

q.

The PVDF coating / lumiflon-based fluoropolymer resin coating shall

be guaranteed for colour retention, chalking resistance, humidity
resistance, hardness and gloss retention etc as specified.

r.

The composite Aluminium panels cladding material shall satisfy the

following mechanical properties, coating properties and fire codes
requirements. Tests shall be carried out for composite Aluminium
panels cladding material for each lot supplied, by the manufacturer in
an approved independent laboratories / in manufacturers test facilities
and shall submit test reports in duplicate to the Engineer in Charge:
Mechanical Properties
i)

Tensile Strength of
aluminium skin
(ASTM E-8)

ii)

0.2% proof stress

of aluminium skin
(ASTME-8)

iii)

Elongation of ACP
(ASTM E-8)

Not less than

160 N / sq.mm

Not less than130

N/ sq.mm

Not less than 5%

Coating Properties
a)

Weatherometer Test
:
of Coating Colour Retention
(ASTM D 822 )

Not more than 5

units after 5000 hours

* Gloss Retention
(ASTM D523)

Min. 50% after 4000

Hours.

* Chalking Resistance
(ASTM D 4214)

Max 8 units after 4000

hours.

CW- 153

b)

Salt Spray Resistance

* ASTM D B 117

Blisters 10 after 3000

Hours, 5% salt fog at 35
degree C.

* NCCA 11-2

Scribe 8, salt fog, 35

degree C

c)

Humidity Resistance
(ASTM D 2247)

No change after 3000 Hours,

100% RH, 35 degree C

d)

Formability (T- Bend)

test (ASTM D 1737)

0T, No cracking

e)

Pencil Hardness
(ASTM D 3363 A)

HB - H

f)

Adhesion
(ASTM D 3359-Method 8)
*

Dry

No change

Wet

No change after 24 hours

@ 37.8 degree C

Boiling water

No change after 20 minutes

@ 100 degree C

g)

Reverse impact
(ASTM D 2794)

No cracking or adhesion loss

h)

Chemical resistance to
HCL, H2SO4, Mortar,
Detergent

No change

i)

Abrasion Resistance
Falling Sand
(ASTM D 968)

130 litres (minimum)

Fire Codes Requirement

a.

BS476

Part 6
Part 7

Class 0
Class 1

CW- 154

b.

c.

19.

ASTM E-84 Flame Spread Index

Smoke developed Index

<

0
15

UBC 26-9 & NFPA for 30 Minute Intermediate Scale Multi-story

Apparatus test to prove no flame spread beyond the area directly
exposed to fire source.

ALUMINIUM EXTRUDED LOUVERS

a.

The louvers shall have elliptical blade profile and shall be made out of
extruded aluminium sections and PVDF coil / spray coated to the
required colour, shade and thickness as specified.

b.

The louvers shall be provided at positions as shown on the drawings.

c.

The louvers shall be fixed at inclination and spacing as per the item
description and the architectural drawings .A stainless steel vermin
proof wire mesh shall be fixed on the back face of the louvers internally
as specified and as per the item description.

d.

All the fasteners shall be of non-magnetic stainless steel of grade as

specified.

e.

Louvers blades shall be visibly straight and shall be storm resistant.

f.

The louvers shall not deflect or sag under self weight, therefore
adequate aluminum structural framing shall be designed and provided.
The fixing of the framing to the building structure shall be with
Stainless Steel anchor fasteners of the approved grade and as per the
approved shop drawings.

20.

FABRICATION

20.1

General
All assemblies shall be fabricated and assembled in accordance with the
architectural/ approved shop drawings and as specified. Deviations of any
nature shall not be permitted, without the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

20.2

Tolerances
The Contractor shall furnish a schedule of fabrication tolerances for all major
aluminium composite panel cladding components.
In addition to the
fabrication tolerances, the contractor shall provide for building movements
including assembly and installation tolerances for all major and / or applicable
aluminium composite panel cladding components and / or assemblies.

CW- 155

20.3

20.4

Workmanship
a.

All work shall be performed by skilled workmen, specially trained and

experienced in the applicable trades and in full conformity with the
specifications and approved shop drawings.

b.

All work shall be carefully fabricated and assembled with proper and
approved provisions for thermal expansion and contraction, other
building movements, fabrication and installation tolerances and design
criteria etc.

c.

All forming and welding operations shall be done prior to finishing,

unless otherwise noted.

d.

All work shall be true to detail with sharp, clean profiles, straight and
free from defects, dents, marks, waves or flaws of any nature impairing
strength or appearance; fitted with proper joints and intersections and
with specified finishes.

e.

All work shall be erected true to plumb, level, square to line, securely
anchored, in proper alignment and relationship to work of other trades
and free from waves, sags or other defects.

Joints in Metal Work

a.

All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of

line, design and finish. Joints in exposed work, unless otherwise shown
or required for thermal and other building movements, shall be
accurately fitted, rigidly secured with hairline contacts and sealed
watertight.

b.

Where two or more sections are used in building up members, the

surface in contact shall be brought to a smooth, true and even surface
and secured together so that the joints shall be absolutely tight without
the use of any pointing materials. Extrusions shall be within the
tolerance limits to eliminate any edge projection or misalignment at
joints.

c.

The Contractor shall furnish physical samples of all joinery elements as

for comparative appraisal and approval of the production materials.
Physical samples of all typical wall intersection assemblies shall be
colour coded on surfaces and/ or areas to receive sealants.

CW- 156

20.5

20.6

Shop Assembly
a.

As far as practicable, all fitting and fabrication work shall be done in the
factory / workshop.

b.

Work that cannot be factory / workshop assembled shall be temporarily

assembled in the factory / workshop and marked for conve nience of
assembly at site. The units shall then be disassembled and assembled
properly later in the building.

c.

All glazing shall be done in the factory/ workshop.

d.

Gaskets shall be pre-positioned in the factory / workshop as far as

possible.

e.

Site work shall be kept to a minimum required.

Sleeves
Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sleeves shall be extruded tabular
sections or roll formed from minimum 1.5 mm thick solid aluminium sheet,
200 mm long and width compatible with the section. It shall be provided on the
continuity joints of mullions / transoms and designed to accurately interlock
with adjacent sections and incorporate serrated surfaces for the secure bedding
of sealant between the parent metal and the sleeve, wherever required, as per
the approved shop drawings.

20.7

Anchor Fasteners
a.

All anchor fasteners shall be of stainless steel ( grade 316) with self
locking devices, unless otherwise specified, and of sufficient size and
strength to withstand the applicable design loads / forces with factor of
safety as specified for the various materials and of approved make as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The spacing and quantities of
fasteners shall be as required, as per the approved shop drawings to
secure or support the framing. Washers and / or other accessory items
shall be of the same material as the fasteners. All assembly fasteners
shall be torque tightened to achieve the maximum torque tension in the
fasteners.

b.

All fasteners shall be concealed unless otherwise shown or approved.

Exposed fasteners shall be finished to match surrounding metal finish.

CW- 157

c.

20.8

20.9

All fasteners including washers and accessory items shall be scheduled

and designated on the shop drawings showing designation, type, size
including diameter and length, material, numbers and spacing etc.

Protection of Metals
a.

Protection against bimetallic corrosion shall be provided wherever

dissimilar metals are in contact by using PTFE (Teflon) separators 0.80
mm thick.

b.

Extruded aluminium section of the structural framing of the curtain wall

which is to be in contact with concrete, masonry, mortar or plaster shall
have the contact surfaces protected by use of suitable separators
wherever crevices between the contact surfaces may entrap moisture
and corrosive elements. All metals, except stainless steel and
aluminium, which are to be in contact with concrete, masonry, mortar or
plaster, shall have the contact surfaces protected with epoxy paint.

c.

The Contractor shall furnish a schedule of all protective coatings and

related items along with the shop drawings, including the designation of
area and / or specific locations, materials used, special instruction,
specification data sheets, etc.

Welding
a.

All welding in mild steel work shall be done by the inert gas shielded
arc or fluxless resistant techniques and with electrodes and / or by
methods recommended by the suppliers of the metals being welded.
Type, size and spacing of welds, shall be as shown on approved shop
drawings.

b.

Welds behind finished mild steel surfaces shall be so done as to

eliminate distortion and / or discoloration on the finished side. Weld
spatter and welding oxides on finished surfaces shall be removed by
descaling and / or grinding. Low heat filled welds using chill bar on
finished side shall be used to eliminate dimpling, distortion and/ or
discoloration on the finished or exposed surface. Plug, puddle or spot
welding shall not be permitted. If weld beads are visible on exposed
finished surfaces, the surfaces shall be ground and polished to match
and blend with finish on adjacent parent metal.

c.

Structural welds shall be made by certified welders and shall conform to

the general recommendations and regulations of AWS Specification
D1.0-46.

CW- 158

i)

Dirt grease, lubricant, or other organic material shall be removed

by vapour degreasing or suitable solvent.

ii)

Joints rejected because of welding defects may be repaired only

by re welding. Defective welds shall be removed by chipping or
machining. Flame cutting shall not be allowed.

d.

Where ever welding is done in proximity to glass or finished surfaces,

such surfaces shall be protected from damage due to weld sparks,
spatter or tramp metal.

e.

All welds shall be scheduled and designated on the approved shop

drawings sho wing designation, type, size, spacing etc.

20.10 Soldering
Soldering and/or brazing, wherever required shall be done as recommended by
the suppliers of the metals involved.
21.

EXECUTION

21.1

General
a.

The architectural drawings supplied by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be

considered essentially schematic, except for profiles of exposed surfaces
which shall be as indicated. If in exceptional cases, in the opinion of the
contractor, a change of architectural profile is required in order to meet
the specifications / structural design requirement of the curtain wall, he
shall submit a proposal for change with specific reasons for
consideration and approval of the Engineer in Charge. No deviations
from the architectural profiles of the building shall be permitted without
prior approval by the Engineer in Charge. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account.

b.

The method of assembling, reinforcing and anchorage of the aluminium

structural framing of the curtain wall system, wherever indicated is
schematic. Location and method of providing the same shall be
responsibility of the Contractor, who shall design, assemble, reinforce
and anchor to suit each specified condition in an acceptable manner,
suiting main building structure.

c.

The curtain glazing shall have open grooves. Visible joints shall be as
shown on the architectural drawings. The aluminium composite panel
cladding shall have closed grooves filled with silicone sealant.

CW- 159

21.2

d.

All parts shall be secured by concealed means. Screws/ fasteners

exposed to view shall in general not be allowed unless otherwise
approved on the shop drawings.

e.

All components shall be assembled, secured, anchored, reinforced,

sealed and made weather tight, wherever specified, in the manner as
specified and as per the approved shop drawings. The structural framing
shall not restrict movements within the curtain wall and also relative to
building. The design should be such that it is able to absorb such
movements without compromising the performance requirements of the
curtain wall. Wherever possible, sealants shall be concealed.

f.

Free and noiseless movement of all components of the aluminium

structural glazing and aluminium composite panel cladding system due
to thermal, structural, seismic loads, wind load, or dead loads etc. shall
be achieved without strain to glass, without buckling of any components
and without excessive stress to any members or assemblies.

g.

The curtain glazing shall be assembled and installed so that there is no

leakage into the building. All leakage, penetration of moisture into the
system, and condensation shall be drained and discharged to the exterior
face of the curtain wall. For this, effective air pressure equalization shall
have to be designed and ensured while executing the curtain glazing
work.

h.

Movement of water within and on exposed surfaces shall be controlled

to ensure that water is not retained and that elements will not be
damaged or corroded by water and to minimize the potential for algae
and fungal growth as a result of standing or trapping water.

Dimensions
The dimensions given on Architectural drawings are indicative to enable the
contractor for preparing his shop drawings. However, these drawings may
require modifications based on the actual measurements on site. The
contractor shall revise the drawings accordingly and submit the same for
approval of the Engineer in Charge in case of any discrepancy between
measurements on site and in drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.

22

PERFORMANCE TESTING

22.1

General
The contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer-In-Charge the
manufacturers certificate for compliance of the various materials to be used in

CW- 160

the work, as per the manufacturers specifications and also copy of the
manufacturers test report for the record. The various tests, as specified for
different components, shall be carried out in the manufacturers testing
facilities / approved independent laboratories, as specified. The cost of all
samples of individual components as well as the mock ups at site and mock ups
at approved independent laboratory including all the testing charges shall be
borne by the contractor. All the materials to be used in the work shall comply
with the requirements of the specifications and shall pass all the tests. The
samples shall be taken for carrying out the tests stipulated in the particular
specifications and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall
at his own cost make all arrangements and shall provide all such facilities, the
Engineer-in-Charge may require for collecting, preparing, forwarding the
required number of samples for testing as per the frequency of test stipulated.
Nothing extra shall be payable for the above. The Contractor or his authorized
representative shall associate in collection, preparation, forwarding and testing
of such samples. The Contractor at his own expense shall supply all materials,
Labour for preparing and testing samples as required by the Engineer-inCharge. The testing shall be carried out in the presence of the representative of
the Engineer- in- Charge, if so directed.
22.2

The performance test shall be carried out as per the details below:
a.

Specifications and the conditions as mentioned under 22.1 and 22.3 to

22.12 apply for pre- execution performance tests in laboratory
conditions for the various components of curtain wall.

b.

Specifications and the conditions as mentioned under 22.1 and 22.13

apply for field tests.

c.

For conducting initial tests in the approved international laboratory on

mock up, the contractor shall supply copies of shop drawings and
calculations to the Test Laboratory (abroad) approved by the Engineerin-Charge prior to installation of the test units in the laboratory. These
drawings shall include:

Elevations and sections of the mock-up;

Full scale typical details of panels including intersections of

members;

Typical support details;

Size including thickness, width and length of structural silicone

sealant bite

CW- 161

d.

22.3

Size and number of pressure equalization / drainage slots or

holes;

Blanking off details;

Method of installation; and

Design parameters

Any deviations from the drawings shall be recorded and noted in the
final report. After approval of structural calculations and shop drawings
for the curtain wall, mock up test units for performance testing of the
curtain wall shall be constructed by the Contractor at the approved
testing laboratory.

Laboratory mock up test units

a.

Two mock ups for the curtain wall shall be prepared and tested in one of
the approved laboratories as specified in the tender documents. The
mock test units for the laboratory test shall comprise of components
representative both in size and shape of the curtain wall of the building
under examination. One of the mock ups shall be for the curtain glazing
in the south atrium and size of this mock up shall be 6 panel width and
two floor heights. The second mock shall be for north side with five
panels width and two floor height. This mock up shall also include
aluminium composite panel cladding (top panel of five panels width and
2.2 m height) with all its interface detailing with curtain glazing. Both
the mock up shall contain full height modules of the curtain wall
system. Vertical and horizontal movement joints shall be included in
the test sample. The mock up shall also incorporate all types of in-fill
panels including fixed and open able panels, fire stop (barrier) - cum smoke seals, flashings, shadowbox, bracketry, hardware and fixtures
etc.

b.

The materials of the test sample (glass, aluminum, reinforced cement

concrete / structural steel / masonry, brackets, fasteners, sealant, gaskets
etc.) shall be from the actual material to be used in the work. The fixing
details of the mock up shall be same as per the proposed curtain wall for
the building. The contractor shall also provide the same skilled labour,
for fabrication and installation of mock up at the laboratory, who shall
be carrying out the actual work at site and the contractor shall bear all
the cost and expenses in this account.

c.

The test sample shall be mounted and sealed into a simulated building
frame in the same manner and by the same fixings which are intended to
attach the curtain wall to the actual building structure. The supporting
CW- 162

frame shall have stiffness equivalent to that of the building to prevent

unrealistic deflection of the prototype sample.
d.

22.4

All panels and other interconnected joints in the faade shall be sealed
at the sample boundaries. This is to minimize the effects that the
surrounding construction will have on the test performance of the
sample. All pressure equalization and drainage slots or holes in the test
sample shall be left open.

Inspection of mock up test units in the laboratory

The Engineer in Charge or his authorized representatives shall inspect the
mock ups, during fabrication of modules as well as during testing. At this
stage, the adequacy and stiffness of the support structure shall be assessed
before the installation of the test samples is complete. The Engineer-in-Charge
or his authorized representatives shall also inspect the materials for mock ups
before shipment to the testing facility. The cost of the visit including other
expenses of the Engineer-in Charge or his authorised representative shall not
be borne by the contractor.
The representative/s of the contractor shall be available during the erection and
testing of the mock test units at the approved laboratory. The contractor shall
himself bear the cost and all other expenses of his visit or that of his authorised
representatives.

22.5

Test programme
a.

The test shall be conducted in accordance with test specifications and /

or to other approved codes and parameters of equal or greater severity.

b.

The following standards shall apply to the tests:

Air infiltration test
:
ASTM E 283
Water penetration test
:
ASTME 331
Structural performance test
:
ASTME 330
Seismic test
:
AS/NZS 4284

c.

The test programme shall be conducted in the following sequence:

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)

Preliminary loadings
Air infiltration test
Water penetration test (static pressure)
Water penetration test (dynamic pressure)
Structural performance test (design pressure)
Seismic test (serviceability limit state)
Structural proof load test
Seismic test (ultimate limit state)

CW- 163

22.6

Preliminary loading
The test unit shall be subjected to static pressures of +100 kg/m2 and 100
kg/m2 for a period of 30 seconds each.

22.7

22.8

Air infiltration test - ASTM E 283

a.

This test shall be performed by attaching the test specimen on one side
of the pressure chamber and sealing it. Air Pressure shall then be
applied from the chamber simulating pressure to the outer face of the
specimen at a pressure difference of 10kg/m2 in accordance to ASTM E
283. At the maintained specified test pressure difference across the
specimen, measurement for the resultant air flow through the specimen
shall be recorded. The results of the infiltration shall not exceed 1
liter/min per 300mm run of perimeter of open able panel, and for the
fixed glass panels, air leakage shall not exceed 1 liter/min/m2.

b.

A stabilized pressure difference of 10kg/m2 shall be maintained across

the test specimen with its opening being sealed for the first result and
then with the seal taken off for the second result. Measurement of air
flow shall be recorded via the air flow meters at the supply source and
near the specimen. The difference of the two measured air flows shall
give the resultant air flow which is converted into units of litres per
minute per unit length or area to be compared with the acceptance
criteria.

Water penetration test- ASTM E 331

a.

Static pressure
This test shall be performed by attaching the test specimen on one side
of the pressure chamber and sealing it with the same type of sealant as
would be used on site. Uniform pressure difference of 60kg/m2 shall
be introduced into the chamber in one step and maintained for ten
minutes. The test shall then be repeated with a pressure difference of
120kg/m2 (60% of positive wind pressure) for 5 minutes.
Water jet sprays shall be introduced onto the specimen at a rate of 3.40
liter per square meter per minute.

b.

Dynamic pressure
The procedure for the dynamic pressure test shall be similar to that for
the static pressure, the only difference being that for the dynamic

CW- 164

pressure test, pulsating/ cyclic pressure difference instead of uniform

pressure difference will be used. The pulsating pressure shall fluctuate
from 0 to 30 kg/m2 for fifteen minutes. The above test shall be repeated
for pulsation between 60 kg/m2 and 120 kg/m2 for 15 minutes. The
pulsating/ cyclic pressure shall be in cycles of between 3 to 5 seconds.
c.

22.9

For both the static and dynamic / cyclic water penetration tests, no water
leakage shall be acceptable.

Structural performance test ASTM E 330

22.9.1 General
a.

The test specimen shall be installed on one side of the pressure chamber
and sealed. Air pressure shall then be supplied to (positive pressure) and
exhausted from (negative pressure) the chamber. At specified
maintained pressure difference across the specimen, observation,
measurement and record of deflection shall be carried out. The design
wind pressure used for the test shall be +200 kg/m2 and 200 kg/m2.
Displacement transducers accurate to 0.25mm. shall be fixed to the
test unit at selected locations to be approved by the Engineer in
Charge.

b.

Transducers shall be attached to

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)

2 mullions at 9 locations on each mullions including at brackets,

at joints with horizontal members and mid spans
2 transoms at mid- spans and joints with vertical members.
2 sill / gutters at mid - spans and joints with vertical members
Centres of fixed vision panel, open able vision panel and 2
spandrel panels.
2 transoms and 2 sill/gutters at mid - spans for vertical
displacement.
Any other critical points if required by the Engineer in
Charge.

22.9.2 Static Pressure Test at Design Pressure

The proposed testing method shall be in accordance with procedure B of
ASTM E 300. There will be four incremental loadings at +50 kg/m2, +100
kg/m2, +150 kg/m2 and +200 kg/m2 for positive pressures and at -50 kg/m2, 100 kg/m2, -150 kg/m2, -200 kg/m2. for negative pressures.

CW- 165

22.9.3 Acceptance Criteria for Static Test at 100% of design pressure and load:
a.

Net deflection perpendicular to enclosure surface for framing members

shall not exceed span/240 or 15 mm whichever is less and shall not
exceed span/300 for horizontal members.

b.

In the plane of the wall, deflection of horizontal members shall not

reduce the glass silicone bite below 75% of the dimensions, and shall
not reduce the glass edge clearance below 25% of the design
dimensions.

c.

At connection points of framing members and supports, deflection at

support shall not exceed 1mm.

d.

Deflection at centre of the glass panel shall not exceed shorter span/90
or 12 mm or as calculated by glass manufacturer for each typical panel
of the curtain glazing, whichever is less.

22.9.4 Proof Load Test

The maximum pressure for the proof load test shall be 300 kg/m2.
The method of testing shall be as follows:+ 150 kg/m2
+ 300 kg/m2
- 150 kg/m2
- 300 kg/m2

To remove slack
At proof load
To remove slack
At proof load

22.9.5 Acceptance Criteria for Proof Load Test

Under proof load test, there shall not be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Dislodgement of any glass.

Dislodgement of any frame, panel or any part thereof.
Failure of any fixings (brackets, anchors etc.) that connect the curtain
wall to the building structure.
Failure of any accessory, locking device, hinge, etc. which would allow
an open able panel to open out.
Any permanent distortion of a panel shall be documented. The residual
deflection of any member shall be nil. The slippage at support shall not
exceed 1 mm.

CW- 166

22.10 Seismic Test AS/NZS 4284

22.10.1 Serviceability Limit State

The test unit shall be displaced by subjecting it to cyclic movement at the rate
of 1 cycle/sec. for a period of 30 seconds ( One cycle is movement from
original setting to one extreme, then to the other extreme and back to original
setting).
The test unit shall be subjected to and shall pass the criteria set for dynamic
water penetration test as per para 22.8 b, after the seismic test at serviceability
limit state displacements.
22.10.2 Ultimate Limit State
The test unit shall not collapse during or after the seismic test at serviceability
and ultimate limit state of displacements. Any damage to sealant, members or
panels shall be recorded. Collapse shall mean any one or more of the
conditions a. to e. described under Proof Load Test in 22.9.5 above.
22.11 Form of Report
a.

Details of the test samples (including an outline of the simulated

building frame) and the test apparatus, instrumentation and method shall
be clearly given in a report in triplicate.

b.

The report shall include the following:

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)

vi)
c.

An identification and general description of the curtain wall and

Certificate of Identity from the contractor.
Drawings of the actual test sample showing modifications, if any.
Test sequence and procedure with pressures applied in all tests.
Location of all transducers for the structural performance test and
moving support beam for seismic test.
Displacements span / deflection ratios, air infiltration rates and
water leakage details, permanent distortion or collapse, and
damage to sealants, members or panels etc.
Other pertinent observations.

The testing laboratory shall keep a copy of approved test unit, shop
drawings and calculations at testing laboratory. All changes, revisions,
modifications, etc. made to test unit shall be accurately and neatly
recorded on the shop drawings, which shall become the record
drawings.

CW- 167

d.

After the completion of testing, the testing laboratory shall submit test
reports along with final record drawings to the Engineer-in-Charge.

22.12 Cost of Performance Testing

The cost of samples, its fabrication, shipping, testing, erection, modifications
to and the demolition of the test unit etc. including all the incidental charges
for mock up tests in the approved test laboratory (abroad) shall be borne by the
contractor. If the test unit(s) fail(s) to pass the initial testing, the Contractor
shall make the necessary modifications in the structural design and the shop
drawings incorporating the necessary changes. The contractor shall again
procure the material and arrange for the mock up tests in the Testing
laboratory, as specified above and shall have the Test unit(s) retested in the
Testing laboratory until it passes the test. Cost of modifications to the test
unit(s) and cost of retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. No delay (or
claim of any other kind) from the contractor shall be entertained on these
accounts.
22.13 Site Tests

23.

a.

The Contractor shall carry out site tests at his own cost to determine
resistance to water leakage as per recommendations given in AAMA
501 for Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped
Glazing Systems for Water Le akage.

b.

The test areas shall be selected by the Engineer-in-Charge at random in

typical and non-typical locations, one for every 600 sq.m. approx. of
installed curtain glazing. In case of any test failing, more tests shall be
conducted by the contractor at his own cost as per the directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge. The work carried out under the test area which fails
in site testing, shall be rejected and redone or remedial action shall be
taken by the contractor to rectify the defects, whatever the case may be
at his own cost, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

c.

Each test area shall be approx. 25 sq.m. and shall include vision (fixed
and open able) and spandrel panels.

Incorporation of test results in the actual work.

The contractor shall incorporate the findings of the mock up test at the
laboratory, including modification in the aluminium extruded sections to be
adopted for fabrication of the curtain wall, change in detailing, joinery etc. If
required, the contractor shall again carry out the structural design and prepare
the revised shop drawings and get the structural design and shop drawings
vetted from the Principals of the Curtain Wall System and submit the same for
the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge after which a mock up test at the

CW- 168

approved laboratory shall be carried out as mentioned above. Nothing extra

shall be payable on this account.
24.

Installation

24.1

Workmanship
All work shall be performed by skilled workmen, especially trained and
experienced in the applicable trades employed and in full conformity with
specifications and approved shop drawings to execute the work in workman
like manner

24.2 Setting out

Bench marks for elevations and building line offset marks for alignment shall
be established on each floor level by the contractor. Should any error be found
in the alignment, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in - Charge in
writing and installation work shall not proceed in the affected area until the
errors have been corrected.
The Contractor shall submit the curtain wall bracket / anchorage plan to the
Engineer in - Charge. The Contractor shall co-ordinate his system of
anchorage in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge according to site
conditions.
24.3

Prior Inspection of the Structure

After the setting out has been established and before beginning installation in
any area, the Contractor shall examine all parts of the structure on which the
curtain wall is to be placed. Should any conditions be found which, in his
opinion, will preve nt the proper execution of his work or endanger its
permanency, he shall report such conditions in writing to the Engineer in Charge. Installation work shall not proceed in that area until such conditions
are corrected or adjusted to the satisfaction of the Engineer in - Charge.
Nothing extra shall be payable in this account.

24.4

Alignment
All parts of the curtain wall shall be erected true to plumb and in proper
alignment and in relation to established setting out, as shown on approved shop
drawi ngs.

24.5

Erection Tolerances
The installed curtain wall components shall conform to the following erection
tolerances under no-wind condition:

CW- 169

24.6

a)

Amount of total deviation and / or misalignment in any direction for

vertical members: 2mm maximum in a height of 4m (non-cumulative)
and maximum 6mm in full-height of curtain wall.

b)

Amount of total deviation and / or misalignment in any direction for

horizontal members: 2 mm max. in a length of 7m and 6mm in full
length

c)

Maximum offset from true alignment between two abutting members

shall be 1mm. No edge projection or misalignment shall be permitted.

d)

Deviation in spacing of brackets: 3mm

e)

Allowances for the cumulative effect of all tolerances (fabrication,

assembly, thermal, erection and other loads) must be made to ensure a
workmanlike installation. The documentation and distribution of this
information to all applicable installations and inspection personnel of
the contractor is essential in order to ensure the standard of quality and
workmanship required.

Installation within and / or adjacent to concrete

Where work is to be installed within and / or adjacent to concrete, no
component of the curtain wall other than built in anchor devices shall be put in
place until the concrete work is completed and finished.

24.7

Anchorage
a.

Anchorage of the curtain wall to the structure shall be by approved

methods and in strict accordance with approved shop drawings. After
the curtain wall is properly positioned and aligned, all connections so
designated on approved shop drawings shall be rigidly fixed as
specified.

b.

All anchorage assemblies and their related components shall be

thoroughly scheduled and described on the shop drawings. The
contractor shall also designate agencies responsible for fabricating and /
or installing materials. The description shall include the access,
removal, movement and tolerances of the related building and the
curtain wall, direction and magnitude of thermal expansion, materials,
sizes, quantities and any special instructions as may be required. All
components of the curtain wall including anchorage assemblies, space
frame/structural framing of the curtain wall shall receive a 100%
inspection by the contractor. A check list shall be prepared and
maintained by the contractor for entire execution of curtain wall work
and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge after the completion of the

CW- 170

work. It shall also be made available for inspection during the execution
of the work.
24.8

24.9

Use of sealing materials

a.

Sealing materials shall be used in strict accordance with the

Manufacturers printed instructions / specifications and shall be applied
only by workmen specially trained or experienced in their use. Before
applying sealants, all mortar, dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign
matters shall be completely removed from surfaces, it will contact.
Adjoining surfaces shall be masked when required to maintain a clean
and neat appearance. Sealing compounds shall be tooled to fill the joint
and provide a smooth finished surface.

b.

The manufacturer(s) of the applicable materials shall, when required,

render technical assistance prior to the application of any sealant and
witness the first application as well as periodic site inspections
thereafter. The Contractor shall witness and document all inspections
performed by the sealant manufacturer and provide close supervision of
all workmen deployed to apply the sealant. The record so maintained
shall be made available for the inspection of the Engineer-in-Charge
during execution of the work.

Tensioning of Bolts
All bolts / fasteners shall be correctly fixed / tensioned. The tension shall be
specified on shop drawings. 100% of fasteners / bolts shall be mechanically
checked for correct tension by the contractor and the contractor shall maintain
a check list in this regard which shall be made available for the inspection of
the Engineer-in-Charge during execution of the work.

24.10 Protection and Cleaning

a.

The Contractor shall adequately protect all aluminium sections, glazing,

cladding sheets, components and accessories from damage during
shipment, storage, erection and till the date of completion of the work
and handing over the building to the Department by use of protective
coverings of approved non-staining quality.

b.

At such time as may be directed by the Engineer in - Charge, the

Contractor shall remove all protective coverings and clean the surfaces.
All cleaning agents to be used shall not cause any damage to the
aluminium, glass, aluminum composite panel and coatings etc. Any
defective material shall be replaced by the contractor at his own cost.

CW- 171

25. (A) APPROVED LIST OF SUPPLIERS

1.

Glass Manufacturer (Annealed

Float Glass)

St. Gobain
Modiguard
Asahi Float

2.

Processed Glass Supplier (For

IGUs, Spandrel and Laminated
Glass)

Glaverbel (Europe)
Pilkington (USA, UK)
St. Gobain (France)
Viracon (U.S.A.)
Emirates Glass (UAE)

3.

Aluminium Extrusions

Hindalco , Indal, Jindal, Pankaj,

Bhoruka.

4.

Anodising

Ajit India, Alufin, Bhoruka or in

the factory of the specialist agency
/ curtain wall fabricator

5.

Stainless Steel

Salem Steel

6.

EPDM

AMEE Rubber Industries Pvt. Ltd.,

Bohra Rubber

7.

Fibre Glass Wool

U.P. Twiga Fiberglass Limited,

Lloyd Insulations (India) Limited.

8.

Rock Wool

Vetrotex Industries India Private

Limited, Lloyd Insulations (India)
Limited.

9.

Aluminium Cladding Panels

a) Composite

:
:

b) Solid

Alpolic
Alucobond.
Reynobond
Hindalco , Indal, Jindal

CW- 172

APPROVED LIST OF SUPPLIERS

10.

Expansion anchor fasteners

Hilti, Fischer (S.S. grade 316)

11

Screws, nuts, bolts, washers, :

rivets

Kundan, Arrow (S.S. grade 304)

12.

Chemical anchors

Hilti, Fischer .

13

Door & Window fittings

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Lockset
S.S friction hinges
Patch fittings
Floor springs, handles etc.
Adhesive film

:
:
:
:
:

GIESSE or equivalent
COTSWOLD or equivalent
DORMA or equivalent
DORMA or equivalent
Birla 3M or equivalent

14.

Structural Silicone Sealant

Dow Corning, GE

15.

Weather Silicone Sealant

Dow Corning ,GE

16.

Spacer Tapes

NORTON or equivalent

17.

Foam Spacers (Backer Rod)

NORTON, Supreme

CW- 173

25 (B)

APPROVED LIST OF TESTING LABORATORIES

Testing Laboratories for
Mock up of Curtain Glazing
and Aluminium Composite
Panel Cladding

Window Engineering Consultants Limited,

P. O. Box No. 100-340 - North
Shore Mail Centre, Auckland W,
NEW ZEALAND
Thomas Bell - Wright International
Consultants,
P. O. Box 26385,
Dubai
UAE
Win Wall Technology Pte Ltd.,
Mp. 21, TUAS AVE 8,
Jurong,
SINGAPORE
GHD Cladding Consultancy & Lab,
Dubai Branch,
Gold Park Offices, Floor 3,
P. O. Box 35972 Dubai, UAE
Schmidlin AG
Steinackerstrasse 69
Postfach 615
CH 4147 Aesch
Switzerland

CW- 174

26.

26.

DESIGN DATA

Temperature Range

60oC Ambient
100oC for Materials

Wind Load

2 kN/sqm. ( The system and all components

including glass in edge zones on each side
of building corners shall be designed for
heavier wind suction as required by the
design code)

Seismic load

As per I.S. codes

Deflections :
- Mullions

Max. L/240 or 15 mm whichever is less.

- Transoms, sills, heads,

gutters.

Max. L/300

- Permanent deflection
in Mullions.

Max. L/3000 at 300 kg/sqm. wind pressure.

Nil at 1.5 times dead load

- Permanent deflection in
cladding frame
members.

Nil at 3 kN /sqm. wind pressure.

Glass Panels

Deflection at centre shall not exceed shorter

span/90 or 12 mm or as calculated by glass
manufacturer for each typical panel of the
curtain glazing, whichever is less.

R.C.C. Grade

M 30 (with minimum cement content 420kg

/cum)

Permanent deflection in
transoms, sills, heads,
gutters.

CW- 175

Anticipated Building Movements:

The following building movements are anticipated after the building structure is
completed. The Contractor shall adequately allow for these movements in his design
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Differential horizontal displacement of building face

between consecutive floors due to wind or earthquake.
Differential vertical displacement of building face at any
floor.
Max. axial compression in columns per floor height.
Differential horizontal displacement between 2
consecutive steel floor trusses in atrium
Expansion / Contraction of R.C.C. facia per 10 m. length
per 10oC temperature difference.

8 mm
4 mm
1.50 mm
4 mm
1 mm

27.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF GLASS PANELS

27.1

The glass shall be as specified in the item description of one of the approved
make specified in the tender documents.

27.2

The samples of glass are available for inspection in the office of the Engineer
in - Charge.

28.

SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND CERTIFICATION

The contractor shall carry out the following tests in approved independent
laboratories/ in manufacturers test facilities / in his fabrication shop / on site
as applicable and shall submit test reports in duplicate to the Engineer in Charge. The cost of the tests including testing charges shall be borne by the
contractor and shall be deemed to be included in his prices even if mentioned
otherwise elsewhere in the contract documents. The manufacturers shall carry
out all other tests on materials during and after processing as required by
relevant codes / trade practice, if so directed by the Engineer in - Charge and
shall produce test certificates,.

28.1

Structural Windows / Curtain Wall System

a.

Performance Tests
The tests as specified in Specification 22.1 To 22.12 shall be performed
in an approved laboratory to prove the performance of the contractors
design and details prior to actual execution of the curtain wall at site.

CW- 176

The representative/s of the contractor shall be available during the

erection and testing of the test units at the approved laboratory. The test
shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer in Charge or his
representative. The cost of the visit including other expenses of the
Engineer-in Charge or his authorised representative shall not be borne
by the contractor.
b.

Site Tests for water penetration

Site tests shall be performed as specified in Specification 22.1 and
22.13.
Tests shall be performed on curtain glazing in locations selected by the
Engineer in Charge as specified on actual installations.

28.2

Glass
a.

The contractor shall carry out the tests as specified in approved

independent laboratories / in manufacturers (or processors) test
facilities and shall submit test reports in duplicate to the Engineer in
Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge shall select random samples and send
it for testing various characteristics of processed glass as specified, in
the independent laboratories / in manufacturers (or processors) test
facilities. The test shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineerin-Charge or his authorised representative, if so directed. Nothing extra
shall be payable on this account.
3 samples of each type of reflective glass shall be tested for:
i)
ii)
iii)

b.

American summer U- Value in W/m2.K (ASHRAE standard)

Shading coefficient (ASHRAE standard).
Relative heat gain.

Certification by Manufacturer
For each lot and each type of glass supplied, the Manufacturer /
Processor shall certify the following and submit along with the copies of
test reports:
i)

Characteristics
- Light transmittance (380 to 780 nm.) :
- Light reflectance (external ) :
- Light reflectance (internal ) :
- UV transmittance (280 to 380 nm):
- Direct energy transmittance (300 to 2150 mm) %

%
%
%
%

CW- 177

- Energy reflectance :
- Energy absorption :
- Shading coefficient
=

Total solar energy flux entering thru glass.

0.87 x incident solar energy

- U- value (American summer):

ASHRAE conditions
ii)

%
%
%

w/m2.K

Compliance with Codes

- ASTM C 1036 for vision glass
- ASTM C 1048 for spandrel glass
- CBA rating with IGCC in accordance with ASTM E 773
and E 774 for insulating glass
- ASTM C 1048 for heat-processing
- ANSI Z 97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 for safety glazing.

iii)

Sealant Substrate test report

iv)

Surface compression in heat strengthened glass

v)

Manufactures / processors certification of cyclic thermal stress

test as per ASTM C 1048 on heat processed glass.

vi)

Manufacturers/ processors report on heat soaking test for each

lot of glass supplied, if conducted by the manufacturer /
processor for the lot.

vii)

Visual Inspection Reports.

v
v
v
v
v

28.3

Thickness and dimension tolerances

Pinholes
Uniformity of colour and opacity
Distortion
Scratches

Structural Sealant
The contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge the copies of
the following tests carried out by the Manufacturer of the sealant, processor of
the glass and specialist agency / curtain wall fabricator.

CW- 178

28.3.1 Tests on one part sealant

a.

Skin over Time / Elastomeric Test :

Perform test in fabrication shop on each new lot and once a week to
check on shelf life of one-part sealant as recommended by the
manufacturer.

b.

Standard field adhesion Test :

Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of sealant application and 1 test for
every 300m thereafter in fabrication shop as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.

28.3.2 Tests on two part sealants

a.

Perform test every time mixing pump is started up to check on adequate

mix of base and curing agent components.

b.

Snap Time Test

Perform test daily to relate the mix proportion to the curing rate of
sealant as recommended by the manufacturer.

28.3.3 Deglazing
Deglaze complete panels from frame to confirm proper adhesion and joint fill.
Inspection of at least 3% of first 100 glazed panels and at least 1% of panels
thereafter shall be carried out after deglazing in presence of the sealant
manufacturer.
The following documentation shall be certified jointly by the sealant
manufacturer and the contractor:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Size of structural bite - design and actual.

Size of structural glue-line.
Adhesion of sealant with panel and frame
Joint type /condition/ penetration of sealant applied.

28.3.4 Laboratory Tests by Manufacturer

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Peel adhesion test as per ASTM C 794

Compatibility test for sub-strates as per ASTM C 1248
Indentation Hardness durometer test as per ASTM C 661
Adhesion & Cohesion test under cyclic movement as per ASTM C 719

CW- 179

(e)
(f)

Tensile adhesion test as per ASTM C 1135

Ultimate elongation & tensile strength as per ASTM D 412.
1 set of Test certificates shall be submitted for each lot supplied.

28.3.5 The sealant manufacturer shall submit laboratory test results for adhesion and
compatibility for each lot of aluminium extrusions and glass.
28.4

Weather sealant

28.4.1 Laboratory Tests by Manufacturer

a.
b.
c.

Durometer Shore hardness as per ASTM D-2240

Tensile strength @ 150% elongation as per ASTM D-412.
Staining test as per ASTM D 510

1 set of test certificates shall be submitted for each lot supplied

28.5

Aluminium Extrusions

28.5.1 Each lot and type of aluminium extrusions shall be accompanied with the
certificate from the manufacturer along with the test report of the following
tests carried out at the manufacturers test facility or an independent approved
laboratory:
a
b.
c.

Certificate of mechanical properties and chemical composition.

Certificate of dimensional tolerances to DIN standard.
Certificate of temper.

28.5.2 The contractor shall certify minimum anodising thickness for each lot and type
of aluminium extrusions.
28.6

Aluminium Composite Panels

Each lot and type of aluminium composite panel cladding material shall be
accompanied with the certificate from the manufacturer along with the test
report of the following tests carried out at the manufacturers test facility or an
independent approved laboratory:

28.6.1 Mechanical Properties

(a)
(b)
(c)

Tensile strength and yield strength of composite panels as per ASTM E-8
Tensile and yield strength of aluminium skin.
Elongation as per ASTM E 8

CW- 180

(d)
(e)

Punching shear resistance as per ASTM D 732

Impact test for denting (DUPONT) (0.5 kg and 1 kg steel balls at 500
mm height)

28.6.2 Fire resistance properties

(a)
(b)

Flame spread and smoke developed indices as per ASTM E 84.

UBC 26-9 & NFPA for 30 Minute Intermediate scale multi-storey
apparatus test to prove no flame spread beyond area exposed directly to
fire source.

28.6.3 Coating properties satisfying AAMA 2605:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

Corrosion resistance.
Salt spray resistance
Weathering
Colour retention.
Chalking resistance
Gloss retention
Resistance to abrasion
Hardness, adhesion and formability

28.6.4 The coating agency shall certify performance requirements of all tests as per
AAMA 2605 voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test
procedures for superior performing organic coating on Aluminium Extrusions
& Panels.
28.6.5 The coating agency shall certify the minimum thickness of PVDF / lumiflon
based fluoropolymer resin coating. The contractor shall also arrange for
checking the thickness of PVDF / lumiflon based fluoropolymer resin coating
in an independent laboratory / manufacturers test facilities and shall submit
test reports in duplicate to the Engineer in Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge
shall select random sample consisting of 3 specimens and send it for testing
various characteristics of the aluminium composite panel cladding material as
specified, in the independent laboratories / in manufacturers test facilities. The
test shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge or his
authorised representative, if so directed. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
28.6.6 The Manufacturer shall certify conformance with BS 476, Part 6, Class 0 and
Part 7, Class 1.

CW- 181

28.7

E. P. D. M. GASKETS
Each lot of E. P.D.M Gaskets shall be accompanied with the certificate from
the manufacturer along with the test report of the following tests carried out at
the manufacturers test facility or an independent approved laboratory:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

28.8

Shore hardness.
Tensile strength.
Elongation
Ozone resistance.

PTFE (TEFLON )
For each lot of polytetrafluoroethylene (TEFLON) separators, a set of
manufacturers test certificates shall be supplied for:
(a)
Tensile strength & elongation as per ASTM D-1457.
(b)
Compressive strength as per ASTM D-695.
(c)
Shore D hardness as per ASTM D-2240.
(d)
Flexural strength as per ASTM D-790.
(e)
Impact strength as per ASTM D-256.
(f)
Deformation as per ASTM D-621.
(g)
Coefficient of friction.

28.9

Foam spacers and Mounting Tapes

For each lot, manufacturers test certificates shall be submitted for
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

29

Weathering
Tensile strength.
Compression.
Elongation.

SUBMITTALS WITH TENDER (ALONG WITH THE TECHNICAL

BID):
The following details are required to be submitted along with tender:
a)

Detailed specifications, typical drawings and full details of tenderer's

proposed systems for curtain wall, cladding and glazing systems
(including aluminium sections, transoms, mullions, head / sill sections,
open able panels, brackets, sealants, gaskets, glazing, fire stop (barrier) cum - smoke seals, shadow box, flashings, drainage, cladding grooves,
interfaces etc.).

CW- 182

b)

Technical catalogues for all materials and systems with relevant offered
items highlighted.

c)

List of manufacturers/ suppliers for all materials including aluminium

sections, glass, sealants, EPDM gaskets, aluminium composite panel
cladding, anchor fasteners, stainless steel screws, nuts, bolts and
washers, rivets , toggles, double sided spacer tape, backer rod etc.
including proof of equivalence for any supplier / manufacturer's
product, wherever applicable, which is not listed in the approved List of
suppliers.

d)

Business and technical profile of the Principals of the curtain wall

system and details of tie-up of the specialist agency / curtain wall
fabricator of the curtain wall with the Principals. The contractor shall
submit a letter from the Principals confirming their association for the
work for their role as specified.

e)

The contractor shall submit installation schedule for the curtain wall to
fit in within the stipulated period for completion of the entire building
work. A statement that the procurement of all materials by the
contractor shall fit in the overall installation schedule shall also be
submitted.

f)

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET duly filled in

Note: Tender Submittals of drawings, details, samples, catalogues, suppliers'

names, programme etc. shall not form part of the contract Documents unless
specifically approved.
30

STAINLESS STEEL VERMIN PROOF WIRE MESH

30.1

The stainless steel wire mesh shall be made out of stainless steel wires of grade
316 and of diameter minimum 1.2 mm and with clear openings / perforations
of size 6.35 mm x 6.35 mm.

30.2

The panels of stainless steel wire mesh shall be pre-fabricated for installing in
the curtain wall and shall be finished size (after back folding the wire mesh at
all the edges to prevent opening out of the mesh) and shape as required as per
the site conditions.

30.3

The panels shall be prepared by cutting the wire mesh to the required size and
shape including making provision for extra 15mm on each side for back
folding the wire mesh and mechanically stitching so that it does not open out
and also making provision for overlaps required at continuity, if any.

CW- 183

30.4

The stainless steel wire mesh panels shall be fixed to the RCC / masonry /
structural steel members of the building and also to the member of the
aluminium structural framing of the curtain wall using stainless steel screws /
fasteners, nuts, bolts, washers, clamps, shims, separators, etc complete, all in a
manner so as not to restrict the movement of the curtain glazing within itself as
well as relative to the building structure as specified, as per the approved shop
drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

31

STRUCTURALLY GLAZED ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

31.1

The work of structurally glazed aluminium windows shall in general be carried

out as per the specifications for the curtain glazing.

31.2

The structurally glazed aluminium windows shall be with semi(grid) unitized

system of Curtain Glazing with open grooves. The structurally glazed
aluminium windows shall be fixed in linear as well as curvilinear portions of
the building as per the architectural drawings. The aluminium structural frame
shall be fixed to the building structure as per the approved shop drawings. The
fixed glazing panels shall be fixed in the aluminium sub-frame and the subframe shall be fixed to the aluminium structural frame work using stain less
steel screws, toggles, nut, bolts, washers, etc. as required. The openable glazing
panels, shall be fixed in the aluminium sash-frame and the sash-frame shall be
fixed to the aluminium structural frame work using heavy duty stainless steel
friction hinges, handles and 4- point cremone locking set, as specified for the
openable panels for the curtain glazing.

31.3

The structurally glazed aluminium windows shall be designed by the contractor

for the loads as per the relevant national and international standards. After
approval of the design by the Engineer-in-Charge, the shop drawings shall be
prepared by the contractor and got vetted from the Principals of the Curtain
wall System.

31.4

The aluminium framework for the structurally glazed aluminium windows

shall be fixed in location as per the architectural drawings by fixing the
transoms to the soffits and the sills using stainless steel anchor fasteners of
required capacity.

31.5

The mullions shall be fixed to the RCC sills using Aluminium channel bracket
of required size and in a manner so as to conceal the Aluminium brackets. The
transoms shall be fixed to the mullions using aluminium cleats of required size
and capacity using required number of counter sunk stainless steel screws
(grade 304).The transoms shall also be fixed to the RCC Soffits and Sills using
stainless steel anchor fasteners. The anchor fasteners shall be fixed in a
concealed manner by cutting hole in the transoms (on the face of the transom
away from the RCC) of required size and fixing the anchor fastener on the face
of the transom abutting the RCC and torque tightened. The cut hole shall then

CW- 184

be closed using rubber / PVC capping of the matching colour and shade in a
workmanlike manner. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
Howeve r, the contractor may suggest for approval alternative method for
fixing the aluminium frame work for the structurally glazed aluminium
windows to the R.C.C members of the building in a manner so that the brackets
are concealed, along with the design calculations and detailing. Nothing extra
shall be payable on this account. However, the contractor shall be solely
responsible for the safe fixing of structurally glazed aluminium windows.
31.6

The contractor shall ensure the orthogonality of the opening before fixing the
structurally glazed aluminium windows. Any chasing / chipping of RCC and/or
drilling hole in the Structural Steel frame member required for fixing
structurally glazed aluminium windows in position shall be carried out by the
contractor. After fixing it shall be made good by the contractor in a
workmanlike manner. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

31.7

The mock up of three adjacent panel including one openable panel, for the
structurally glazed aluminium windows shall be prepared by the contractor and
fixed in position at site as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge for the approval.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

31.8

The gap between the building and the aluminium frame work shall be suitably
sealed using coloured anodized (minimum 20 microns thickness) flashing
made out of 1mm thick solid aluminium sheet, fixed as per the specifications
for the curtain glazing. Where it is not practicable to provide aluminium
flashing, the gaps shall be suitably sealed using weather silicone sealant of
grade as specified and of transparent or required colour and shade.

31.9

No laboratory mock-up is required to be tested. However, the water test (field

test) shall be carried out for the working panels of the structurally glazed
aluminium windows as for the curtain glazing. Nothing extra shall be payable
on this account.

31.10 The other conditions, test criteria etc. for the individual components of the
structurally glazed aluminium windows as well as the assembled and fixed
structurally glazed aluminium windows shall be as for the curtain glazing
specified above. However the contractor shall provide structurally safe, stable
and watertight structurally glazed aluminium windows with all the
performance requirements.
32.

FULLY GLAZED FIXED PARTITIONS

32.1

The fully glazed fixed partition work shall, in general, be carried out as per the
specifications for the curtain glazing described above.

CW- 185

32.2

The fully glazed fixed partitions shall be fixed in linear as well as curvilinear
portions of the building as per the architectural drawings. The structural design
for the fully glazed fixed partitions shall be carried out by the contractor for the
loads as per the relevant national and international standards and as per the site
conditions and submit for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. After
approval of the design by the Engineer-in-Charge, the shop drawings shall be
prepared by the contractor and got vetted from the Principals of the Curtain
wall System and submit for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing
extra shall be payable on this account.

32.3

The aluminium structural frame shall be fixed to the building structure as per
the approved shop drawings. The partitions shall be fixed in a manner that the
glass is mechanically supported on two sides, i.e., at the top and bottom, and
the glass panels shall have butt joints on the vertical edges, with the joints
between the adjacent glass panels filled with weather silicone sealant,
transparent or of approved colour and shade.

32.4

The aluminium frame work shall be fabricated out of anodized extruded

aluminium channel section, colour anodized (20 microns thickness minimum)
to required colour and shade The sections shall be as per the shop drawings.
The channels shall be fixed to the RCC soffit and the sill (floor) in a manner so
as to conceal the framework. The channels shall be fixed to the RCC /
structural steel frame soffit and the sill (floor) using Aluminium brackets of
required size and shape. The Aluminium brackets shall be fixed to the RCC
using stainless steel anchor fasteners of required capacity and size and in
required numbers and the washers , as per the approved shop drawings. The
aluminium channels shall be fixed to Aluminium brackets using stainless steel
bolts nuts and washers .The Teflon separators shall be provided to prevent any
bi-metallic reaction as specified.

32.5

The glazing panels shall be fixed in location in the aluminium channel

framework. The glass shall not directly rest on the aluminium sections and
suitable setting blocks of cured silicone for supporting the glass panels shall be
provided. The temporary spacers of required size, shall be fixed on both faces
of the glass panel, on the portion of the glass inside the aluminium channels,
both at the top and the bottom to form uniform gap on both sides of the glass
for filling weather silicone sealant DC 795 of Dow Corning or equivalent of
other approved brands and of the required colour and shade as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The one part weather silicone sealant shall be applied as
specified above for curtain glazing. The weather silicone sealant of minimum
bite size 6 mm x 6 mm shall be filled continuously along the length of the
aluminium channels on both sides of the glass and shall be tooled properly.
The weather silicone sealant DC 793 of Dow Corning or equivalent of other
approved brand, transparent or of the required colour and shade, of minimum
bite size 6mm (width) and depth same as the thickness of the glass for the
partition work, as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be filled in the

CW- 186

vertical butt joints between the adjacent glass panels. The silicone shall be
allowed to be cured for the minimum time as per the manufacturers
specifications and shall not be disturbed. Also, no load shall be transferred to
the glazed partition till such time. All temporary measures as required shall be
taken by the contractor in this regard. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
32.6

The contractor shall ensure the orthogonality of the opening before fixing the
structurally glazed aluminium windows .Any chasing / chipping of RCC and/or
drilling hole in the Structural Steel frame member required for fixing fully
glazed fixed partition in position shall be carried out by the contractor. After
fixing it shall be made good by the contractor in a workmanlike manner.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

32.7

The brackets shall be concealed and the joints covered, wherever required
using anodized (minimum 20 microns thickness) to required colour and shade
1mm thick aluminium sheet flashing fixed to the frame and the RCC (building)
using stainless steel screws, washers etc. and sealed with weather silicone
sealant to make the fully glazed partition water-tight. Where it is not
practicable to provide aluminium flashing, the gaps shall be suitably sealed
using weather silicone sealant of grade as specified and of transparent or
required colour and shade.

32.8

The working panels of the glazed partitions shall be field tested for watertightness.

32.9

No laboratory mock-up is required to be tested. However, the water test (field

test) shall be carried out for the working panels of the fully glazed fixed
partitions as for the curtain glazing. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.

32.10 The other conditions, test criteria etc. for the individual components of the
fully glazed fixed partitions as well as the assembled and fixed in position fully
glazed fixed partitions shall be as for the curtain glazing specified above.
However the contractor shall provide structurally safe, stable and watertight
fully glazed fixed partitions with all the performance requirements.
33.

ALUMINIUM WORK, WINDOWS / VENTILATORS

33.1

The material for the work shall be procured from the approved manufacturer as
per the list attached with the tender documents. The Contractor shall procure
and submit samples of various materials to be used in the work for the approval
of Engineer-in-Charge and no work shall commence before such samples are
approved. Samples of un-anodized as well as anodized aluminium sections,
neoprene gaskets, glass, stainless steel screws, anchor fasteners, hardware and
any other material or components requiring approval of samples, in opinion of

CW- 187

Engineer-in-Charge, shall be submitted for the approval as mentioned above

.The above samples shall be retained as standards of materials and
workmanship. The cost of the above samples shall be borne by the Contractor.
33.2

The Contractor shall prepare the shop drawings for the aluminium windows
giving details of the various aluminium sections, neoprene gaskets, cleats,
anchor fasteners, hardware, sealants, glass etc. and submit the same for the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.

33.3

Only after the approval of the samples and the shop drawings by the Engineerin-Charge, the Contractor shall procure the material for the work. All materials
brought to the site by the Contractor, for use in the work, as well as fabricated
components shall be subject to inspection and approval by Engineer-in-Charge.
The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer-in-Charge, produce
manufacturers test certificates for any material or particular batch of materials
supplied by him.

33.4

The Contractor shall prepare a finished sample of the aluminium window along
with glazing panel and fittings etc. for approval of workmanship and material.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

33.5

The Contractor shall get the necessary tests carried out in an approved
laboratory, as specified. The tests carried out shall be as per relevant
specifications / Standard Codes. One test for each lot of anodized aluminium
section of each type shall be carried out. However, this is subject to at least one
test for every 1,000 Kg or part thereof, for each type of section.

33.6

Aluminium sections to be used for doors, windows, ventilators and fixed

glazing, partitions, false ceiling etc. shall be appropriate to meet technical,
structural, functional and aesthetic considerations. The anodizing shall be
carried out in an approved factory / workshop as specified in the tender
documents.

33.7

The aluminium extruded sections shall conform to I.S. Designations HEIWP /

HVIWP alloy, with chemical composition and technical properties as per I.S.
733 and I.S. 1285.

33.8

For sectional weight tolerance limits shall be (-) 0.5%.

33.9

FABRICATION

33.9.1 All joints shall be accurately fabricated and be hairline in appearance. The
finished surface shall be free from visible defects.

CW- 188

33.9.2 Taking into consideration varying profiles of aluminium sections being

extruded by approved manufacturers, the Contractor shall prepare detailed
shop drawings of his proposal using suitable sections based on architectural
design / drawings, adequate to meet the requirements / specifications laid down
and as proposed by the manufacturer and these detailed shop drawings shall be
subject to approval of the Engineer in Charge.
33.9.3 All hardware used shall conform to the relevant specifications and as per
samples approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Design, quality, type, number
and fixing of hardware shall be generally in accordance with architectural
drawings and as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before use.
33.9.4 All doors, windows, ventilators and glazing etc. shall be made water tight with
neoprene gaskets and weather silicone sealants to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge, for which nothing extra shall be payable.
33.9.5. The frames shall be strictly as per Architectural drawings, the corners of the
frame being fabricated to the true right angles. Both the fixed frames and
openable shutter frames shall be fabricated out of sections cut to required
length, mitered and mechanically jointed for satisfactory performance. All
members shall be accurately machine milled and fitted to form hairline joints.
The jointing accessories such as aluminium cleats, stainless steel screws etc.
shall not to cause any bi-metallic reaction by providing separators, wherever
required. Nothing extra shall be payable for jointing accessories.
33.9.6 Mitered joints of the doors, windows, ventilators shutters and frames shall be
either corner crimped or fixed with self tapping stainless steel screws of
approved make and quality to heavy duty extruded aluminium cleats and sealed
with weather silicone sealant, for which nothing extra shall be payable.
33.9.7 Vertical members of the aluminium frame work shall be embedded in the
floors, wherever required, by cutting and making good of the floor. Nothing
extra shall be payable on this account.
33.10 FIXING OF ALUMINIUM FRAME WORK
33.10.1 The screws used for fixing fixed aluminium frames of the aluminium
windows to masonry walls / RCC members and aluminium members to other
aluminium members shall be of stainless steel of approved make and quality
and of stainless steel grade 304. Threads of machine screws used shall conform
to requirement of I.S. 4218.
33.10.2The aluminium frames of the gypsum board partition and the wooden rafter
ceiling shall be fixed to masonry walls / RCC members using stainless steel
anchor fasteners of grade 316, of Kundan or Arrow make and aluminium

CW- 189

members to other aluminium members shall be fixed using stainless steel

screws of approved make and quality and of stainless steel grade 304.
33.10.3For the aluminium windows, the gap between the aluminium frames and the
R.C.C / Masonry and also any gaps in the various sections shall be filled with
weather silicone sealant DC 795 of Dow Corning or equivalent in the required
bite size, to ensure water tightness including providing and fixing backer rod ,
wherever required. The weather silicone sealant shall be of such approved
colour and composition that it would not stain or streak the masonry / R.C.C.
work. It should not sag or flow and shall not set hard or dry out under any
conditions of weather and shall be tooled properly. The weather silicone
sealant shall be used as per the manufacturers specifications and shall be of
approved colour and shade. Any excess sealant shall be removed / cleared.
Nothing extra shall be payable for the above.
33.10.4 Fixing of glass panes shall be designed in such a way that replacing damaged
/ broken glass panes is easily possible without having to remove or damage any
members or interior finishing materials.
33.11 ANODIZING
33.11.1 Aluminium sections shall be anodized as per I.S. 7088 1973. Anodizing to
be as per grade AC 20 and not less than 20 microns thick when measured as
per I.S. 6012, in colour and shade as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
33.11.2 The anodic coating shall be properly sealed by steam or dipping in de-ionized
water as per I.S. 1868-1982 and / or I.S. 6057. Sealing quality shall be tested in
accordance with the relevant standards. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
33.11.3 The Contractor shall satisfy himself by checking in the factory that the
thickness of the anodic coating is found to be minimum 20 microns and sealing
quality is appropriate everywhere. The testing shall be done in an approved
laboratory by EDDY CURRENT METHOD as per I.S. 6012 for thickness. For
testing the thickness of anodic coating of the anodized aluminium sections, the
calibration shall be done on bare ( un-anodized ) aluminium sections of same
type. If any material is found sub-standard, it shall be rejected.
33.11.4 All anodized aluminium works shall conform to relevant I.S. Codes relating
to materials, workmanship, fabrications, finishing, erection, installations etc. In
this connection I.S. Codes including I.S. 1868 1982, I.S. 733 1983, I.S.
1948-1961, I.S. 7088-1973, I.S. 6012-1970, I.S. 1285 1975, I.S. 740-1975
are considered relevant and applicable.
33.11.5The exposed surface of the aluminium sections shall be protected against
surface damage, dents, scratches etc. It shall, therefore, be provided with

CW- 190

protective tape. After fixing and assuring of proper functioning of doors,

windows, frame work for partitions / false ceiling etc. such protective tape
shall be cleaned out / removed as per the directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
Nothing extra shall be payable for above.
33.12 GLAZING
33.12.1 All glass panes shall be retained within aluminium framing by use of exterior
grade neoprene gaskets. Use of glazing or caulking compounds around the
perimeter of glass will not be permitted. There shall be no whistling or rattling.
Before installation of glass, Contractor shall ensure the following:
a)

All glazing rebates shall be square, to plumb, true to plane, dry and free
from dust.

b)

Glass edge shall be clean and cut to exact size and grounded

33.12.2Annealed float glass in windows, ventilators and fixed glazing etc. shall be of
approved make and standard quality conforming to PWD Specifications.
33.12.3 4mm thick glass panes shall be provided for openings not exceeding 0.5 sqm.
For openings exceeding 0.5 sqm in area, 5.0 mm thick glass panes shall be
provided unless specified otherwise.
33.13 PROTECTIONS AND CLEANING:
After erection and removal of protective layer, all aluminium works including
glass panes shall be moist cleaned with a de-ionized water to clean all marks,
stains and blemishes.

CW- 191

GUARANTEE TO BE EXECUTED BY CONTRACTOR FOR STRUCTURAL

WINDOWS / CURTAIN WALL AND OTHER RELATED WORKS.
This agreement made this _____day of _________________two thousand and
__________________________________________________________________
between___________________________________________________________
(Name of contractor, hereinafter call Guarantor of the one part) and the
____________ (hereinafter called the _______________of the other part).
WHEREAS THIS agreement is supplementary to a contract (hereinafter called the
Contract) dated________________ made between the GUARANTOR of the one part
and the________________ of the other part for construction of K. D. MALAVIYA
NATIONAL OIL MUSEUM at Guwahati whereby the Contractor, inter alia,
undertook to carry out structural analysis and design , preparation of shop drawings ,
getting the structural design and shop drawings vetted from the Principals of the
curtain wall system, setting out, fabrication, supply, assemble, install, align and fix to
the building structure the curtain wall and execute other related works , all as
specified and set out in the contract and as per the correct international / national
standards.
AND WHEREAS THE GUARANTOR agreed to give a guarantee (for all works as
stated above) for the following:
1.

System

1.1

Structural design has been carried out for design loads, as specified, thermal
stresses, building movements and the consequent deflections without
compromising the performance characteristics.

1.2

That deflections in the framing members shall be withi n permissible limits as

specified.

1.3

Structural stability, safety, integrity and required performances of the work for
all design loads and building movements as specified.

2.
2.1

Material
Glass (Single, Laminated or IGUs) Substrate, coatings, lamination of
laminated glass, insulation of IGUs. Replacement of broken glass panes
(breakage not attributable to vandalism or accident), defective insulated glazed
units (evident due to condensation or dirt between the lites, failure of seal and
damage to internal glass panes, staining, damage to the soft coating etc.) during
the guarantee period.

CW- 192

2.2

Sealants Material used, performance of sealant used, usage as per the

requirement of structural design and functional requirement, compatibility with
different substrate and sealants, bite size, quality assurance during sealing of
IGUs and fixing glass to glass and glass to the aluminium frame, etc.

2.3

EPDM / Silicone gasket for ozone resistance and other properties as specified
etc.

2.4

Aluminium material quality, tempering requirement, suitability of

aluminium grade and anodizing etc.

2.5

Anchor fasteners suitability and strength requirements as per manufacturers

specifications etc.

2.6

Aluminium composite panel cladding - Material quality and PVDF coating /

lumiflon-based fluoropolymer resin coating for colour retention, chalking
resistance, humidity resistance, hardness and gloss retention etc as specified.

3.

Performance

3.1

Water tightness, wherever specified in the Contract.

3.2

Workmanship

3.3

Integrity of system during movements within and relative to the building

structure.

3.4

Indemnify the Department against all claims of whatsoever nature due to

defective designing by the contractor, material & workmanship etc. and /or
non-performance of the work during the guarantee period.

NOW THE GUARANTOR hereby guarantees that the work executed by him shall
perform to the specified standards of quality and workmanship during the guarantee
period of three years to be reckoned from the date of completion of work.
During this period of guarantee, the guarantor shall make good all defects and if any
defect is noticed during the guarantee period, it shall be rectified by the contractor
within seven days of issue of notice to the contractor, at least temporarily, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge, till the permanent rectification of the defects /
replacement of defective materials is carried out by the contractor, in maximum four
months period, retaining same aesthetic and other functional parameters of the
original work. If not attended to, the same shall be got one by the Department through
other agency at the risk and cost of the contractor which shall be final and binding on
the contractor.

CW- 193

That is the Guarantor fails to execute the necessary rectification or commits breach
there under, then the Guarantor will indemnify the Principal and his successors
against all loss, damage, cost expense or otherwise which may be incurred by him by
reasons of any default on the part of GUARANTOR in performance and observance
of this supplementary agreement. As to the amount of loss and / or damage and / or
cost incurred by the OIL, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge will be final and
binding on the parties.
IN WITNESS WHERE OF these presents has been executed by the OBLIGOR
________________________________________________and
by
_____________________________and
for
and
on
behalf
of
the
__________________ on the day month and year first above written.

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED by OBLIGOR in the presence of:

1.
2.
SIGNED FOR AND ON BEHALF OF THE ________________________ BY
________________________ in the presence of:

1.
2.

CW- 194

34)

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET (TO BE SUBMITTED ALONG WITH

TECHNICAL BID)
Note: The contractor shall fill in data in the following format, complete in all
respects and attach it to his covering letter. Relevant squares shall be ticked.
Additional sheets shall be submitted for more details, if required.
The contractor should offer non preferred items only in case they do not have
the capability to offer preferred items. No alternatives should be offered for
items marked COMPULSORY unless approved prior to submission of tender.

I.

STRUCTURAL GLAZED WINDOWS / CURTAIN WALL

1.

SYSTEM
a) Technical Collaborator / Principal of the curtain wall system
Name
:
Country
:
Present arrangement of
the curtain wall fabricator /
specialist agency with
the Principal
:
b) Type

Fully unitized / Grid (Semi) unitized,

4 sided structurally glazed system
with open grooves as shown in
drawings (COMPULSORY)
NOTE:
Give horizontal and
vertical
sections in all typical and non- typical
locations.

c) Elevation

As per the Architectural drawings

(COMPULSORY)

All grooves of equal width

(COMPULSORY)

No aluminium edge and / or sealant

visible on the periphery of panels
(COMPULSORY)

CW- 195

Only aluminium visible in

grooves

Silicon gasket / sealant in

grooves (exposed to view)

?
?

No mechanical support
Mechanical support

e) Facility available for :

fabrication and anodizing /
PVDF Coating / Lumiflon
fabricators
based fluoropolymer resin
coating
(Give Details) ?

?
?
??

In own factory
Through dedicated fabricators
Through independent

f) Special Features

Specify if any

DIN Standard or better

(COMPULSORY) details

d) Mechanical Support
to glass

2.

ALUMINIUM EXTRUSIONS

a)

Make

b)

Grade & temper

i) For mullions, transoms etc.:
ii) For brackets & structural use:

c)

Tolerances

d)

e)

Give

Anodising

Min. 20 microns anodizing in

approved colour in satin finish
(COMPULSORY)

PVDF Coating

Min. 30 microns in approved

metallic colour
(COMPULSORY)

CW- 196

3.

MULLIONS, HEAD / SILL / INTERMEDIATE TRANSOMS

(Note: Submit data and profile for each section separately)
Mullions

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

Sill

Head / Gutter

Transom

Weight / metre
Ixx
Iyy
Zxx
Zyy
Max deflection (to be guaranteed)
Profile (Give sketches )

* All the sections shall be box sections.

4.

5.

6.

7.

OPENABLE PANELS & SUB-FRAMES

(Note; Submit data and profile for each section separately)
a)

Section(s) - wt./m

b)

Details

Give sketches of profiles

c)

Hard ware and fittings

Give comments

SHADOW BOX
a)

Details of insulation

b)

Details of construction

Give sketch

FIRE STOP (BARRIER)-CUM- SMOKE SEALS

a)

Fire stop (barrier) - cum - smoke seals:

b)

Detail

Min. 2 Hours or as
required by CFO
(COMPULSORY)
Give sketch

FLASHINGS & CAPPING

a)

Details

Give sketches for all locations

CW- 197

8.

BRACKETS
:?
(Give details for no. of
brackets required per mullion )

?
?

Hot Dipped Galvanized M.S

Aluminium Brackets

9.

(a)

ANCHOR FASTENERS :?

(b)

NUTS, BOLTS, WASHERS: ? Stainless Steel Grade 304

RIVETS
(COMPULSORY)

Stainless Steel Grade 316

(COMPULSORY)

10.

SHIMS

Same metal as for system component

requiring shims for alignment.

11.

SEPARATORS

:? ?

TEFLON (COMPULSORY) ?
(Give details)

12.

GASKETS

:?

EPDM Microwave - cured

13.

SOUND PROOFING

14.

EXPANSION / CONTRACTION / BUILDING MOVEMENT

15.

Silicone (COMPULSORY for exposed

gaskets)

Give details

a)

Max. Movement possible per horizontal and vertical groove

b)

Provision for noiseless movement :

Give details

SEALANTS
a)

Structural Silicone Sealant

i)
Make
:
ii)
Grade
:
iii)
Components :
?
o

b)

Weather Silicone Sealant

i)
Make
:
ii)
Grade
:

c)

2 Component Equipment: ?
?

2 Component (COMPULSORY)
1 Component (IN RARE CASES IF
APPROVED)

Available in Factory
Not available

CW- 198

16.

SPANDREL GLASS PANELS

a)
b)

Make of glass
Details of glass

Give catalogues with offered items

highlighted

Note : Give details for each type separately.

17.

VISION PANELS
a)
b)
c)

Make of outer glass :

Make of inner glass :
Details of glass
:

Give catalogues with offered items

highlighted.

d)

Name of Manufacturer :
of I.G.U.
Note : Give details for each type separately.

18.

19.

DRAINAGE

LABORATORY TESTS ON

Pressure
Equalization
(Curtain
Glazing) (COMPULSORY)
(Give details)

Other methods (Give details)

PERFORMANCE

II

Give details & results on performance

tests carried out on similar curtain
wall
Panels.

CLADDING
1. Make of Composite Units

?
?
?

ALPOLIC
REYNOLDS
ALUCOBOND

2. Coating

:?

PVDF / Lumiflon based

fluoropolymer resin coating
(COMPULSORY)

a) Resin Content
b) Total Dry film Thickness
c) Protection of back

:
:
:

3. Facility available for fabrication:

?(Give details)

Give details
?
?

In own factory
Through dedicated fabricators

CW- 199

III

IV

Through outside fabricators

4. Brackets

:??

Aluminium

5. Grooves

: ?

Open grooves without sealant

(COMPULSORY)

?6. Fixing details

Flashings

:?

Provided (COMPULSORY)
(Give details)

Sealing

Provided (COMPULSORY)
(Give details)

In own factory

Through dedicated sub-contractors

?
?
?

Through outside sub-contractors

In House Facility
Through independent designer

Give details with sketch

?
INTERFACES OF CURTAIN WALL AND CLADDING SYSTEMS
WITH STRUCTURE

FACILITIES FOR COATINGS

Anodising

V.

FACILITIES FOR
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
(Give details)

VI.

VETTING OF THE STRUCTURAL ?

DESIGN AND SHOP DRAWINGS
BY PRINCIPALS OF SYSTEM

VII.

APPROX. QTY OF ALUMINIUM FOR

FRAMEWORK
a) Curtain Glazing
?
b) Aluminium composite Panels
?

VIII. TESTS SPECIFIED

IX.

FIXING DETAILS
a) Structurally glazed windows
b) Fully glazed fixed partitions

Give details

Give details

Give details
Give details

Give details

?
?

Give details
Give details

The contractor to submit technical literature for the same.

CW- 200

GLASS PYRAMID
Pyramid
Design Brief
Geometry
The pyramid is 37.6 m x 37.6 m at base with total height of 21.20 m. Entire pyramid
has two tier configurations. The bottom tier is configured to have long & heavy
members assembled as a row of small pyramids. The total height of this tier is kept as
3.112m, which gives sufficient headroom for entrance doorway for the pyramid.
Upper tier is configured with double layered tensile space frame. Each large
triangular face of pyramid has been subdivided into diamond shaped panels. Each
panel consists of eight edge members in two layers. Outer & inner layer members are
interconnected with short members at each corner of panel gets additional strength
from a network of tie rods. Each panel consists of eight tie rods emerging from
corners of panels, which meet at a node positioned at mid point.
All members are pre fabricated & assembled at site with bolted connections only.
DESIGN LOADS
Following loads are considered for design of pyramid
Dead loads :
1. Self weight of structure as per actual (calculated by analyses software
automatically)
2. Loads due to 12 mm thick Glass @ 300 N/sqm.
3. Loads due to glass fixing accessories @ 50 N/sqm.
Live loads : As per IS: 875 (Part 2)
Minimum live loads for maintenance purpose @ 400 N/Sqm is considered over the
plan area.
Wind Loads : As per IS : 875 (Part 3)
Basic Wind speed in Gauhati = 50 m/s
Risk Coefficient
k1 = 1.00
Terrain, Height & Size factor
k2 = 1.05
Topography factor
k3 = 1.00
The structure has been designed considering the pressure coefficients as per IS:875
(part 3). Internal pressure coefficient is assumed as + 0.2.
CW- 201

EARTHQUAKE LOADS : AS PER IS:1893 (PART 1) 2000

Earthquake Zone V
Importance factor 1.50
Response spectrum method shall be used for seismic analysis. The pyramid structure
should be safe against earthquake loads as per IS : 1893 (Part 1) 2000.
ANALYSES & DESIGN
Entire pyramid structure shall be modeled & analyzed in commercially available
software NISA 2, developed & marketed by Engineering Mechanics Research Center
(EMRC), USA. All members & bolts shall be designed & checked for safety.
Important IS codes for design:
IS: 800-1984 Code of practice for general construction in steel
IS:806-1968 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building
construction
IS:875-1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for
buildings & structures.
Part 1
Dead loads
Part 2
Imposed loads
Part 3
Wind loads
IS:1893-2002 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
IS:816-1969 Code of practice for use of metal are welding for general
construction in mild steel.
IS:1161-1998 Steel tubes for structural purposes specification
IS:1239-1990 Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings (Part 1)
IS:1367-1992 (Parts 1 to 18) Technical supply conditions for threaded steel
fasteners
IS:2062-1999 Specification of steel for general structural purposes.
IS:4000-1992 Code of practice for high strength bolts in steel structures.
IS:4923-1997 Hollow mild steel sections for structural use.

CW- 202

DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR GLASS PYRAMID

Work description
i.

Design, Supply, Fabrication and Erection of Pyramid as per enclosed drawing

indicating the architectural intent comprising tubular members, tie-rods and
sleeves with forged and / or machined cones welded to tubes, forged hollow
spherical / truncated spherical node connectors CNC machined and drilled to
requirement with minimum tensile strength of 600 Mpa and minimum
elongation of 12%, high tensile fasteners of minimum 8.8 grade supplied in
zinc phosphated / zinc plated condition of TVS, Unbrako, Boltmaster or
equivalent make as per proprietary drawings, painted with two coats of enamel
paint over one coat of epoxy primer.
ii.

Design, Supply, Fabrication and Erection of Pyramid Base as per enclosed

drawing indicating the architectural intent comprising tubular members, with
forged and / or machined cones welded to tubes, forged hollow spherical /
truncated spherical node connectors CNC machined and drilled to requirement
with minimum tensile strength of 600 Mpa and minimum elongation of 12%,
high tensile fasteners of minimum 8.8 grade supplied in zinc phosphated / zinc
plated condition of TVS, Unbrako, Boltmaster or equivalent make, steel plates
as per IS 2062 as per proprietary drawings, painted with two coats of enamel
paint over one coat of epoxy primer.

iii.

Fixing of semi-unitized glazing panels to the Space Frame Structure including

fabrication of glazing sub-frames, fixing of glass panels to sub-frames and
sealing of the gaps between panels with weather sealant and fillers as per
proprietary drawings using anodized aluminium for sub-frames for Laminated
Glazing panel system 10 mm thick.

iv.

Supply of pre-cut panels of heat strengthened laminated glass of 6 mm ocean

blue, reflective out board with coating on surface, 0.76 mm PVB interlayer and
4 mm tinted / clear heat strengthened glass in board.

1.

GENERAL :
This specification covers the design, supply, fabrication, transportation to site
and erection on prepared foundations of structural steel work consisting of
tubular sections, nodes, end cones etc.
Fabrication, erection and approval of steel structures shall be in compliance
with this general specification, IS 800-1962, drawings and supplementary
drawings to be supplied to the contractors during execution of the work.
Providing painting for steel structures, Grouting to the complete satisfaction of
the engineer-in-charge.
CW- 203

2.

FABRICATION DRAWINGS :
The contractor shall prepare all fabrication and erection drawings on the basis
of basic design drawings supplied to him. The contractor shall however be
responsible to fabricate the structurals strictly conforming to specifications and
revised drawings.
Fabrication drawings shall include the following:
member sizes and details
types and dimensions of welds and bolts
Shapes and sizes of edge preparation for welding.
Details of shop and field joints included in assemblies.

3.

BILL OF MATERIALS :
Good Quality of structural steels, welding electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers
etc. are to be used.
Erection assemblies, identifying all transportable parts and sub-assemblies,
associated with special erection instructions if required.
However, if any variation in the scheme is found necessary later, the contractor
will be supplied with revised drawings. The contractors shall incorporate these
changes in his drawings at no extra cost and resubmit for review.
Architects / consultants review shall not absolve the contractor of his
responsibility for stability of the structure, the correctness of dimension,
adequacy of details and connections. One copy will be returned reviewed with
or without comments to the contractor for necessary action. In the former case
further six copies of amended drawings shall be submitted by the contractor for
final approval.
The contractor shall supply three prints each of the final approved drawings to
the architects within a week since final review, at no extra cost for reference
and records.
The architects will verify the correct interpretation of their requirements.
If any modification is made in the design drawing during the course of
execution of the job, revised design drawings will be issued to the contractor.
Further changes arising out of these shall be incorporated by the contractor in
the fabrication drawings already prepared at no extra cost and the revised
fabrication drawings shall be fully got reviewed as per the above clauses.

CW- 204

4.

MATERIALS :
ROLLED SECTIONS :
The following grades of steel shall be used for steel structures:
Structural steel will generally be of standard quality conforming to IS 226/ IS
1161/ IS 1239/ IS 4923.
WELDING ELECTRODES:
Welding electrodes shall conform to IS: 814. Approval of welding procedures
shall be as per IS : 823.
BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS:
High tensile fasteners shall conform to IS 1367 (Part3) 1991, shall be free
from defects, cracks, seams, burst, voids, folds nicks and thread discontinuities.
The material requirement shall conform to minimum 8.8 grade and supplied in
zinc phosphated / electroplated (IS 1573) condition manufactured by TVS /
Unbrako / Bolt master or equivalent make (Ref: IS 1364, IS 4218, IS 1363, IS
2269). The designation symbol of the property class should be marked on each
bolt. Each packed box to be clearly marked with grade, length and quantity of
bolts in the box
All materials shall conform to their respective specifications. The use of
equivalent or higher grades or alternate materials will be considered only in
very special cases subject to the approval of the engineer-in-charge in writing.
NODES
Forged hollow spherical/truncated spherical node connectors CNC machined
and drilled to requirement and tempered and normalized to achieve minimum
tensile strength of 500 MPa and minimum elongation of 7% and minimum
hardness of 255 BHN. Forging shall be manufactured from kilned steel.
Forging shall be free from deleterious defects like laps, cracks, folds, under
filling etc. Machined surface should be free from surface defects, cracks,
laminations, rough/tagged and imperfect edges. Forging shall be manufactured
from material of class 4 of IS 2004-1991.Material shall be of EN 8 forged steel
and manufacturers TC shall be produced. The supply condition shall be
normalized hardened and tempered, shot blast finished.

CW- 205

CONES / END CONNECTORS

Cones shall be hot forged and machined or machined from solid cylindrical
bar. Forging shall be free from deleterious defects like laps, cracks, folds,
under filling etc. Forging material shall conform to class 4 of IS 2004 -1991.
Bar stock shall conform to EN8 BS 970 or equivalent material. One
specimen each from site for each size shall be selected for testing and test for
dimension shall be visual. Test for physical and chemical properties shall be
carried out in approved laboratory and test certificate produced.
TIE RODS
Tie rods shall be of solid cylindrical bar conforming to EN8 BS970 or
equivalent material.
ANCHORS
Material shall conform to IS 2062 1992 grade Fe 410W A / B. Steel shall be
free from surface defects, rough/tagged, imperfect edges and other defects. All
flame cut edges shall be planed, unless they are clean, square and true to shape.
No holes shall be made by gas cutting process.
5.

RECEIPT AND STORING OF MATERIALS:

Steel materials supplied by the contractor must be marked for identification
and each lot should be accompanied by manufactures quality certificate,
conforming chemical analysis and mechanical characteristics.
All steel parts furnished and supplied shall be checked, sorted out, straightened
and arranged by grades and qualities in stores.
Structurals with surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations, etc. shall
be rejected if the defects exceed the allowable tolerances specified in relevant
standards or as directed by the engineer-in-charge.
Welding wire and electrodes shall be stores separately by qualities and lots
inside a dry and enclosed room in compliance with IS: 816-1968 and as per
instructions given by the engineer-in-charge. Electrodes shall be perfectly dry
and drawn from an electrodes even, if required.
Checking of quality bolts of any kind as well as storage of same shall be made
conforming to relevant standards.
Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturers
test certificate.

CW- 206

The contractor may use alternative materials as compared to the design

specification only with the written approval of the engineer-in-charge.
6.

MATERIAL TESTS:
The contractor shall be required to produce manufacturers quality certificates
for materials supplied by the contractor. Not withstanding the manufacturers
certificates, the engineer-in-charge may ask for testing of materials in approved
test houses. The test results shall satisfy the requirements of the relevant
Indian standards.
Whenever quality certificates are missing or incomplete or when material
quality differs from standard specifications the contractor shall conduct all
appropriate tests as directed by the engineer-in-charge at no extra cost.
Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test results
do not tally with the relevant standards specifications shall not be used.

7.

FABRICATION:
Fabrication shall be accordance with IS : 800 section V in addition to the
following :Fabrication shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings adhering
strictly to work points and work lines on the same. The connections shall be
welded or bolted as per design drawing. The work shall also include
fabricating built up sections.
Any defective material used shall be replaced by the contractor at his own
expenses, care being taken to prevent any damage to the structure during
removal.
All the fabricated and delivered items shall be suitably packed to be protected
from any damage during transportation and handling. Any damage caused at
any time shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost.
Any faulty fabrication pointed out at any stage of work shall be made good by
the contractor.

8.

PREPARATION OF MATERIALS:
Prior to release of material for fabrication, all sections warped beyond
allowable limit shall be pressed or rolled straight and freed from twists.
Minor warping, corrugations etc. in sections shall be rectified by cold warping.

CW- 207

The sections shall be straightened by hot working where so directed and shall
be cooled slowly after straightening.
Warped members like plates and flats may be used as such if wave like
deformation does not exceed 1/1000 but limited to 10 mm.
Surface of members that are to be joined by lap or fillet welding or bolting
shall be even so that there is no gap between over lapping surfaces.
9.

MAKING:
Making of members shall be made on horizontal pads of appropriate racks or
supports in order to ensure horizontal and straight placement of such members.
Making accuracy shall be atleast +or 1mm

10.

CUTTING:
Members shall be cut mechanically (by saw or shear) or by oxyacetylene
flame.
All sharp, rough or broken edges and all edges of joints, which are subjected to
tensile or oscillating stresses, shall be ground.
No electric metal arc cutting shall be allowed.
All edges cut by oxyacetylene shall be cleaned off impurities prior to
assembly.
Cutting tolerance shall be as follows:
a)
b)

For members cut at both ends 1mm

Else where 3mm

The edge preparation for welding of members more than 12mm thick shall be
done by flame cutting and grinding. Cut faces shall not have cracks or be
rough.
Edge preparation shall be as per IS 823
11.

DRILLING
Bolt holes shall be drilled.
Drillings shall be made to the diameter specified in drawings.

CW- 208

No enlarging of holes by filing, by hand drilling or by oxyacetylene flame shall

be allowed.
Allowed variations of holes (out of roundness, eccentricity plumbline
deviation) shall be as per IS: 800.

Maximum deviation for spacing of two holes on the same axis shall be
for 1mm.
Two perpendicular diameters of any oval hole shall not differ by any
more than 1mm.

Drilling faults in holes may be rectified by reaming holes to the next upper
diameter, provided that spacing of new hole centers and distances of hole
centers to the edges of members are not less than allowed and that the increase
of hole diameter does not impair the structural strength. Hole reaming shall be
allowed if the number of faulty holes does not exceed 15% of the total number
of holes for one joint.
12.

PREPARATION OF MEMBERS FOR WELDING

Assembly of structural members shall be made with proper jigs and fixtures to
ensure correct positioning of members (angles, nodes etc.)
Sharp edges, rust of cut edges, notches, irregularities fissures due to faulty
cutting shall be chipped or ground or filled over the length of the affected area,
deep enough to remove faults completely.
Edge preparation for welding shall be carefully and accurately made so as to
facilitate a good joint.
Generally no special edge preparation shall be required for member under
8mm thick.
Edge preparation beveling denotes cutting of the same so as to result in V, X,
K or U seam shapes as per IS 823.
The members to be assembled shall be clean and dry on the welding edges.
Under no circumstances shall wet, greasy rust or dirt covered parts be
assembled. Joints shall be kept free from any foreign matter, likely to get into
the gaps between members to be welded.
Before assembly the edges to be welded as well as areas extending for atleast
20mm shall be cleaned.

CW- 209

When assembling members, proper care shall be taken of welding shrinkage

and distortions, as the drawing dimensions cover finished dimensions of the
structure.
The elements shall be got checked and approved by the architects or their
authorized representative before assembly.
The permissible tolerance for assembly of members preparatory to welding
shall be as per IS 823-1964. After the assembly has been checked, temporary
tack welding in position shall be done by electric welding keeping in view
finished dimension of the structure.
13.

WELDING PROCEDURE
Welding shall be carried out only by full trained and experiences welders as
tested and approved. Any test carried out either by the architects or their
representative or the inspectors shall constitute a right by them for such tests
and the cost involved thereon shall be borned by the contractor himself.
Qualification tests for welders as well as tests for approval of electrodes will be
carried out as per IS 823. The nature of test for performance qualification of
welders shall be commensurate with the quality of welding required on this job
as judged by the engineer-in-charge.
The steel structures shall be automatically, semiautomatically or manually
welded.
Welding shall begin only after the checks mentioned under preparation of
materials, marking, cutting, drilling and preparation of members for welding
have been carried out and welding procedures and tests for welders skill have
been conducted as per IS:823 and approved by the engineer-in-charge.
The welder shall mark with his identification on each element welded by him.
When welding is carried out on open air, steps shall be taken to protect the
place of welding against wind or rain. The electrode wires and parts being
welded shall be dry.
Before beginning the welding operation, each joining shall be checked to
assure the parts to be welded are clean and root gaps provided as per IS
: 823.
For continuing the welding of seams discontinued due to some reason, the end
of the discounted seam shall be melted in order to obtain a good continuity.
Before resuming the welding operation, the groove as well as the adjacent parts
shall be well cleaned for a length of approximately 50mm.

CW- 210

For single butt welds (in V, 1/2V or U) and double butt welds (in K, double U
etc.) the rewelding of the root is mandatory but only the metal deposit of the
root has been cleaned by back gauging or chipping.
The welding seams shall be left to cool slowly. The contractor shall not be
allowed to cool the welds quickly by any other method.
For multilayer welding, before welding the following layer, the formerly
welded layer shall be cleaned metal bright by light chipping and wire brushing.
Packing strips shall not be allowed.
The order and method of welding shall be so that:
No unacceptable deformation appears in the welded parts. Due margin is
provided to compensate for contraction due to welding in order to avoid any
high permanent stresses.
The defect in welds must be rectified according to IS 823 and as per instruction
of engineer-in-charge.
14.

WELD INSPECTION
The weld seams shall satisfy the following:

Shall correspond to design shapes and dimension.

Shall not have any defects such as cracks, incomplete penetration and
fusion, under-cuts, rough surfaces, burns, blowholes and porosity etc.
beyond permissible limits.

During the welding operations and approval of finished elements, inspections

and tests shall be made as shown in Annexure B.
The mechanical characteristics of the welded joints shall be as in IS: 823.
15.

FIELD ERECTON
The erection work shall be permitted only after the foundation or other
structure over which the steelwork will be erected is approved and is ready for
erection.
The contractor shall satisfy himself about the levels, alignment etc. for the
foundations we ll in advance, before starting the erection. Minor corrections
shall be carried out by the contractor on his own expenses.

CW- 211

Any faulty erection done by the contractor shall be mode good at his own cost.
Approval by the architects or their representative s at any stages of work does
not relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees of the contract.
16.

STORAGE AND PREPARTION OF PARTS PRIOR TO ERECTION

The storage place for steel parts shall be prepared in advance and got approved
by the architects before the steel structures start arriving from the shop.
Platform shall be provided by the contractor near the erection site for
preliminary erection work.
The contractor shall make the following verifications upto receipt of material
at site:

For quality certificates regarding materials and workmanship according

to these specifications and drawings.
Whether parts received are complete without defects due to
transportation loading and unloading defects, if any are well within the
admissible limit.

For the above work sufficient space must be allotted in the storage area.
Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of items during unloading.
The parts shall be at least 150mm clear from ground on wooden or steel blocks
for protection against direct contact with ground and to permit drainage of
water.
If the rectification of members like straightening etc are required these shall be
done in a special place allotted which shall be adequately equipped.
The parts shall be clean when delivered for erection.
17.

ERECTION AND TOLERACES

Erection in general shall be carried out as required and approved by architects.
Positioning and leveling of the structure alignment and plumbing and fixing
every member of the structure shall be in accordance with the relevant
drawings and to complete satisfaction of the architects.
The following checks and inspection shall be carried out before, during and
after erection.

Damage during transportation

CW- 212

Accuracy of alignment of structure

Erection according to drawings & specifications
Progress and workmanship

In case there are any deviations regarding positions of foundations or anchor

bolts, which would lead to erection deviations, the architects shall be informed
immediately. Minor rectification in foundations, orientation of bolts holes etc.
shall be carried out as a part of the work at no extra cost.
The various parts of the steel structure shall be so erected as to ensure stability
against inherent weight, wind and erection stresses.
The structure shall be anchored and final erection joints completed after plan
and elevation positions of the structural members have been verified with
corresponding drawings and approved by the architects.
The bolted joints shall be tightened so that the entire surface of the bolt heads
and nut shall rest on the member. For parts with sloping surfaces tapered
washers shall be used.
18.

PAINTING
Painting surfaces to be treated shall be thoroughly cleaned and freed from all
scale, loose paint, rust and other deleterious matters. All welding areas shall be
given special attention for removal of weld slag.
Surface preparation:
Before the application of any paint, the surfaces to be treated shall be
thoroughly cleaned and freed from all scale, loose paint, rust and other
deleterious matters. Oil and grease shall be removed from the surface.
All welding areas shall be given special attention for removal of weld slag,
weld metals splatter, weld heat oxides, weld flux fumes, silvers other foreign
objects.
Two coats of enamel painting over a coat of epoxy primer as per manufacturers
specification shall be given.

19.

Semi-unitized glazing system

Supply, fabrication and fixing of glass accessories for aluminium semi-unitized
glazing system with colour anodized aluminium of approved available colour
with necessary section for sub-frame of Jindal / Indal / Bhoruka or equivalent
make and shall be compatible to all components and fabrication procedure of
structural glazing systems and shall be of approved quality and make with 19
CW- 213

anodizing as per BIS with necessary hardware fittings for glazing such as
structural sealant, weather sealant of GE/Dow Corning or equivalent make and
such adhesive and sealants shall be of a polymer based that is 100% silicon.
The silicon structural seal shall have a maximum modulus of elasticity not
more than 25% movement of the joint width at 20-psi (138 Kpa) stress. Spacer
tape of Grind well Norton or equivalent make, the sub-frame shall be fixed to
main structure using necessary SS screws at 500mm c/c. All glass-to-glass
joints shall be filled with weather sealant with necessary masking tape and
baker rod. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the adhesion
of the cured sealant periodically throughout the application to assure
compliance with the manufacturers specification and quality of application. A
minimum of 1% of structurally glazed panels shall be tested for load carrying
capacity. All joints shall be ensured for water tightness. The contractor shall
submit manufacturers Test certificates wherever applicable. Minimum ambient
temperature shall be maintained during installation of glazing components. The
quoted rates shall include the cost of glass handling, scaffolding, lifting etc.
complete
Details specified in section curtain wall glazing shall be followed for materials,
fixing, specifications, detailing, testing etc.
20.

Guarantee of Glass Pyramid

Guarantee period for glass pyramid shall be for 03 (Three) years after
completion of project.

CW- 214

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR

STAINLESS STEEL RAILINGS
1.

The scope of the work includes preparation of the shop drawings (based on the
architectural drawings), fabrication, supply, installation and protection of the
stainless steel railing till completion and handing over of the work.

2.

The stainless steel work shall be got executed through specialized fabricator as
per the list of the approved agencies having experience of similar works. The
Contractor shall submit the credentials of the fabricator for the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.

3.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, for approval of the Engineer-inCharge, for fabricating stainless steel railing with detailing of M.S. stiffener
frame work backing along with the fixing details of the M.S. frame work to the
R.C.C columns. The details of the joints in the stainless steel railing including
location, etc. shall also be shown in the shop drawings.

4.

The Contractor shall procure and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge, samples of

various materials for the railing work, for approval. After approval of samples,
the Contractor shall prepare a mock up for approval of Engineer-in-Charge /
Consultant. The material shall be procured and the mass work taken up only
after the approval of the mock up by the Engineer-in-Charge / Consultant. The
mock-up shall be dismantled and removed by the contractor as per the
directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.

5.

The stainless steel shall be of grade 316 L with brushed steel satin finish and
procured from the approved manufacturer. It shall be without any dents,
waviness, scratches, stains etc.

6.

The required joints in the railing provided as per the architectural drawings,
shall be welded in a workmanlike manner including grinding, polishing,
buffing etc. all complete and compacted. The temporary clamps provided and
fixed to hold the stainless steel railing, in position shall be removed after the
concrete has set properly. The junction of the flooring and the cladding shall
be neatly filled with weather silicone sealant of approved colour and shade.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

7.

One test (three specimens) for each lot shall be conducted for the stainless steel
pipe in the approved laboratory. Therefore, the material shall preferably be
procured in one lot from one manufacturer.

CW- 215

8.

The finished surface shall be free of any defects like dents, waviness,
scratches, stains etc. and shall have uniform brushed steel satin finish. Any
defective work shall be rejected and redone by the Contractor at his own cost.
The finished surface shall therefore be protected using protective tape which
shall be removed at the time of completion of the work. The surface shall then
be suitably cleaned using non abrasive approved cleaner for the material.
Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

9.

The item includes the cost of all inputs of labour, materials (including stainless
steel pipes, welding, brazing, concrete, protective film, weather silicone sealant
etc including cost of providing and fixing M.S. frames), T & P other incidental
charges, wastages etc. The items also included providing and fixing stainless
steel anchor fasteners for fixing railing.

10)

The railing shall be fixed in position using stainless steel pipes, stainless steel
posts of grade 316 L of required diameters and thickness as shown on drawing
and polished to satin finish including cutting, welding, grinding, bending to
required profile and shape, hoisting, butting, polishing etc. The 900 mm high
railing shall be provided with three horizontal pipes and hand railing with
vertical supports. The item includes the cost of all inputs of labour, materials,
T&P, other incidental charges, wastage etc. The entire work shall be carried
out to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.

CW- 216

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALSE CEILING

1.

The work shall be carried out as per the drawings and instructions of EngineerIn-Charge / Consultant.

2.

All necessary labour, materials and use of tools and equipment for the
satisfactory completion of the job.

3.

Work at all heights.

4.

Work in narrow widths and all locations as called for and working to specified
patterns and profiles.

5.

Carrying out work to correct line and level.

6.

Providing necessary cutouts and frame work for lights, fittings, A. C. grills,
trap doors, sprinkler heads, smoke detectors and similar including supports
from ceilings where directed for these.

7.

Necessary precautions to prevent damage to the flooring and other works.

A.

ALUMINIUM FALSE CEILING

1.

The Aluminium false ceiling system along with all components shall be
procured from an approved manufacturer as per the list of Approved make.

2.

The aluminium panels and the linear closed ceiling suspension system shall be
as specified in the item nomenclature .The Contractor shall prepare the shop
drawings for the False Ceiling based on actual measurements at site clearly
indicating the typical panel as well as edge panel on all sides with details to
adjust the minor variation in orthogonality. Also, junction details with different
types of false ceiling materials shall be prepared and submitted for the approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge before execution.

3.

The installation shall be got done through a Reputed Interior Contractor who
shall be engaged by the Contractor. The details of earlier works executed by
the Interior Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge in
advance. If required, those works shall be inspected to assess the Quality of
workmanship. The false ceiling shall be perfectly level after installation.

4.

The Contractor shall then prepare the mock-up at site for approval of material
and quality of workmanship by the Engineer-in-Charge. Only after the
approval of Mock-up, the Contractor shall start the mass work.

CW- 217

5.

The aluminium panels shall be roll-formed out of 0.6mm thick aluminium

sheet, 600 mm x 600 mm profile of LUXALON of HUNTER DOUGLAS or
equivalent brand generally as per the architectural drawings and as per the site
requirements. The panels shall have required profiles, with bevelled edges and
characteristics as per the manufacturers specifications. The panels shall be
machine perforated with 2mm perforations at 5mm centre to centre. The
aluminium panels shall be chromatised and polyester paint coil coated two coat
two baked (20 2 micron thickness) of the shade and colour as approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge on the face # 1 and polyester paint service coat (3-7
microns thick) on the face # 2 as per the manufacturers specifications. The
panels shall be spliced jointed wherever required using splice panel 300mm
long e qually overlapped on the adjacent panels and snap fitted into the panels.

6.

The panels shall have all the characteristics as per the manufacturers
specifications for colour, specular gloss, colour uniformity, film hardness,
impact resistance, paint film adhesion, flexibility test, U V resistance,
Humidity resistance, chemical resistance and visual appearance. The panel
shall be made of aluminium alloy AA 5050 and carrier frames from aluminium
alloy AA 3005. It shall have the mechanical properties as per the
manufacturers specifications. Atleast one sample shall be tested for each lot
of the aluminium panels brought by the contractor to the site of work. The test
shall be got done at reputed independent laboratory as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Howe ver, the contractor shall obtain and submit to the
Department the manufacturers certificate for compliance of the polycarbonate
sheets as per the manufacturers specifications and also copy of the mill-test
report for the record. The tolerances are as under:
a.
b.
c.
d.

7.

Gauge thickness 0.03 mm

Tolerance in width 0.20 mm
Camber shall not exceed 3 mm in 2 meters strip length.
There shall not be any defects on the surface (face # 1)

The panels shall have precise sizes and profiles including beveled edges as
required for the installation depending on the type of closed ceiling suspension
system grid Luxalon of Hunter Douglas or equivalent brand and
manufacture as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and as per the
architectural drawings. The openings of required size for light fittings, fire
detection devices, sprinklers, AC diffusers etc. shall be suitably made in the
ceiling, if required, by cutting in an approved and workmanlike manner. For
the purpose of measurement, no deduction shall be made in the area of false
ceiling on this account. Also, nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
The end panels shall be cut to the required size in a workmanlike manner as
per the site requirement. Nothing extra shall be payable on account of any
wastage in the material.

CW- 218

8.

These panels shall be fixed / snap fitted on to coordinated suspension ceiling

system with supporting grids system that fully integrates with the ceiling
panels. It shall be ensured that the suspension system shall be suitable to take
all the incidental and dead loads and other authorized loads efficiently and
shall not sag.

9.

Prior to installation, all care shall be taken while storage and handling of the
aluminium panels as well as suspension system. It shall be protected from all
damages, direct sun light, rains, excessive humidity & dampness, chemical
fumes, vibrations, dust etc.

10.

The suspension system shall consist of carriers frame of required size and
shape as per the item description & manufacturers specification roll-formed
from aluminium sheets of thickness as per the item description, coil coated on
both sides in black colour, with machine cut / punched notches and holes of
suitable sizes for fixing hangers and accommodating aluminium panels,
perimeter / edge profiles of different shapes to suit the site requirements,
splices/ connectors for the carrier of length 150 mm (minimum), level
adjusters, adaptor clips at the edge panel, wall connectors etc. The splices/
connectors shall be snap fit onto the carrier frames, over the joint. (The carrier
frame shall be generally 5 metres long and shall not be used in small pieces
unless specifically required as per the site constraints). The carriers shall not be
fixed at a distance more than 1000mm,ie. the aluminium panels shall not have
span more than 1000 mm .The hangers rods consisting of 4mm diameter G.I.
wires, mechanically pre-straightened and of lengths as required for keeping
minimum plenum depth as per the architectural drawing. These shall be fixed
to the RCC slab by using electroplated Galvanized M.S anchor fasteners 6mm
diameter, of required capacity to safely take all the design loads (dead &
imposed) and shall be of approved make. They shall be tied off to have atleast
3 turns of wire to form a tight coil. The suspension hangers shall be vertical or
near to vertical as far as possible. The hangers shall be suitably designed to
have capacity to take incidental loads of fixtures; suspended signage etc. within
the tolerance limit of deflection as specified in BS 8290.Increased load, if any,
may be accommodated by providing additional hangers. The contractor shall
ensure that the grid system is designed and installed to carry all incidental
loads and no other unauthorized load shall be transferred to this system. The
luminaries, air grills / diffusers, signage etc. shall be as far as possible
independently supported to avoid any over loading of the ceiling system which
may result in excessive deflection or twisting of grids. The hangers shall be
fixed at spacing not more than 1200mm centre to centre securely fixed to the
structural soffits / slab / beams for limiting the span of carrier frames to not
more than 1200mm centre to centre. The first hanger shall be fixed at distance
not more than 300 mm from the edge / face of the wall along the lengt h of the
carrier frame and not more than 150 mm along the length of the aluminium
panels. Also these shall be fixed at a distance of not more than 150 mm from
spliced joints on either side of the joint. Any strengthening of grid system or

CW- 219

providing additional bracing may be carried out as required for any specific
locations or for specific purpose for which nothing extra shall be payable.
Additional carriers, hangers and level adjusters shall be provided where change
of direction is required. All the hangers, level adjustors, adaptor clips, cleats,
brackets etc. shall be of anti-corrosive electroplated galvanized M.S sections.
Perimeter trims/ edge profiles of required size and shape, coil coated with
polyester paint to required colour and shade, shall be installed at the
suspension grid perimeter to completely enclose the ceiling .The perimeter
edge profiles shall be properly secured to the walls at not more than 450 mm
centre to centre using stainless steel screws, sleeves, rawl plugs etc. It shall be
neatly jointed at all external and internal angles with mitred joints and overlap sections in a workman like manner.
11.

The ceiling should be set out such that the perimeter panels are in excess of
half a module. The panels shall be cut to required size and shape with moulded
beveled profile on one edge to match the other panels as per the manufacturers
specifications.

12.

The entire installation shall have half an hour fire rating and integrity as
specified as per BS 476.

13.

The contractor shall ensure that the material is procured and delivered at
installation site without any damage. Adequate care shall be taken before
installation as well as afterwards till handing over the building for occupation.
The contractor shall ensure careful handling and storage and prevent any rough
handling, rolling of cartons or dropping cartons to prevent any edge damage or
breakage. Any panel with edge damaged or damage to the finish etc. shall not
be allowed to be used in the work and shall be replaced by the contractor.
Similarly, adequate care shall be taken by the contractor while placing or
removing and handling the panels so as not to cause any damage due to
bending etc.. Also, the contractor shall direct his fabricators / interior
contractors to take adequate precautions to prevent the panels from any dirt,
fingerprints, any other marks / splashes etc. The ceiling shall be cleaned after
the installation as per the manufacturers specifications. Abrasive cleaners shall
not be used to clean the marks.

14.

The item of false ceiling includes cost of all inputs of labour, materials,
wastage if any, T&P, scaffolding, staging or any other temporary enabling
structure / services etc. and all other incidental charges including making
necessary cut outs for A.C diffusers, Light fittings, grills, Fire detection, alarm,
sprinklers devices and fittings etc. No deduction in the area shall be made for
openings nor any thing extra shall be payable for making the openings. Also
nothing extra shall be payable on account of any wastage in materials. Also
nothing extra shall be payable on account of any strengthening of the
supporting suspension system for the false ceiling, around the openings in the

CW- 220

false ceiling by providing and fixing additional hangers, carriers, level

adjusters, adaptor clips, cleats, fasteners, perimeter trims, edge profiles etc.

B.

MINERAL FIBRE TILES FALSE CEILING

1.

The mineral fibre tiles shall be procured from an approved manufacturer as

directed by Engineer-In-Charge.

2.

The tiles and the suspension system shall be as specified in the item
nomenclature .The Contractor shall prepare the shop drawings for the False
Ceiling based on actual measurements at site and based on the architectural
drawings, clearly indicating the typical panel as well as edge panel on all sides
with details to adjust the minor variations in orthogonality. Also, junction
details with different types of false ceiling materials shall be prepared and
submitted for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge before execution.

3.

The installation shall be got done through a Reputed Interior Contractor who
shall be engaged by the Contractor. The details of earlier works executed by
the Interior Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge in
advance. If required, those works shall be inspected to assess the Quality of
workmanship. The false ceiling shall be perfectly level after installation.

4.

The Contractor shall then prepare the mock-up at site for approval of material
and quality of workmanship by the Engineer-in-Charge. Only after the
approval of Mock-up, the Contractor shall start the mass work.

5.

The mineral fibre tiles shall be of size 600x600 mm or as required as per the
architectural drawings and as per the site requirements and shall be of the
texture and physical & other characteristics as per the PRIMA DUNE
SUPREME 99 of the ARMSTRONG or equivalent approved brand. The
tiles shall have sound absorption, sound attenuation, humidity resistance,
impact resistance and fire resistance as specified as per the manufacturers
specifications. The thickness of the tiles shall not be less than 15mm.The tiles
shall have light reflectance not less than 83%, thermal conductivity not more
than 0.057W/m degree K and humidity resistance for atleast 99% Relative
Humidity and sound absorption (Noise Reduction Co-efficient) of minimum
0.50 with sound attenuation not less than 32dB.The weight shall not be less
than 3.5 kg per sqm without grid. The contractor shall obtain and submit to the
Department the manufacturers certificate for compliance of the mineral fibre
tiles & the suspension system as per the manufacturers specifications and also
copy of the manufacturers test report for the record.

6.

The tiles shall be made of non -combustible bio-soluble wool and shall have
finely granulated surface texture with virtually invisible micro-perforations as
specified & as required for its performance. It shall meet the various

CW- 221

performance parameters like aesthetics, acoustics (sound absorption), hygiene,

humidity resistance, impact resistance, fire resistance, durability etc.
7.

The tiles shall have precisely machined edges including edge treatment
required for the installation depending on the type of suspension system grid
like Silhouette of Armstrong or equivalent brand and manufacture as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge / Consultant and as per the architectural
drawings. The openings of required size for light fittings, fire detection
devices, sprinklers, AC diffusers etc. shall be suitably made in the tiles by
cutting in an approved and workmanlike manner. For the purpose of
measurement, no deduction shall be made in the area of false ceiling on this
account. Also, nothing extra shall be payable on this account. The end tiles
shall be cut to the required size in a workmanlike manner as per the site
requirement. Nothing extra shall be payable on account of any wastage in the
material and /or account of providing grid at closure spacing than 600mm c/c.

8.

These tiles shall be fixed on to coordinated suspension ceiling system with

supporting grids system that fully integrates with the ceiling tiles. It shall be
ensured that the suspension system shall be suitable to take all the incidental
and dead loads and other authorized loads efficiently and shall not sag .The
permissible sag shall be as per the British Standards BS 8290 - 1991. The
Contractor shall provide a guarantee for 10 years against sag on account of
defective material and / or workmanship.

9.

The suspension system shall consist of hangers, main runners, cross tees,
perimeter trims, wall connectors etc. The hangers shall be securely fixed to the
structural soffits / slab / beams at spacing not more than 1200mm centre to
centre by using electroplated Galvanized M.S anchor fasteners of 6 mm
(minimum) diameter of approved make and of adequate capacity to carry the
design loads. The main runners shall be fixed at spacing not more than 600mm
centre to centre. The last hanger at the end of each main runner shall not be
placed more than 450 mm from the adjacent walls. Additional hangers shall be
placed at a distance not more than 150 mm from the joint in the main runner on
either side. The cross tees 600 mm long shall be centrally inter-locked between
main runners to form 600 X 600 mm modules. The main runners shall have
central notches to accommodate mitred joint of 600 mm long cross tees.
Additional runners and hangers shall be provided where change of direction is
required as per the site conditions. All the hangers, runners, tees, cleats,
brackets etc. required for fixing the false ceiling suspension system shall be of
anti-corrosive hot dipped galvanized M.S sections with zinc coating not less
than 170 gms per sq.m and shall be as per BS 2989. The Galvanized M.S
runners, cross tees, perimeter trims/ edge profile etc. shall be powder/coil
coated (the coating as per the manufacturers specifications) matt finished, of
required colour and shade. The cross tees shall be connected to the main
runner by stab and hook type (clip in) installation. The runners and cross tees
shall have mechanical stitching for enhanced torsional resistance and shall

CW- 222

have mitred inter-section. Further, the grid system with main runners and the
cross tees shall have 15 mm wide flanges with a 6 mm central recess with
reveal profile, with colour all white with black or white reveal of Silhouette
of Armstrong or equivalent brand as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge /
Consultant. The hangers shall be mechanically pre-straightened and shall not
be less than 4 mm diameter and of lengths as required for keeping minimum
plenum depth as per the architectural drawings. It shall be suitably cut / tied
off. The stainless steel level adjuster clips (spring steel, butter fly clips having
suitable number and diameter of machine punched holes and bent to required
profile) shall be provided on the hangers to achieve the level ceiling. The
suspension hangers shall be vertical or near to vertical as far as possible. The
hangers shall be suitably designed not to have distributed load more than 12.5
kg. per sq.m and shall have capacity to take incidental loads of fixtures,
suspended signages etc. within the tolerance limit of deflection as specified in
BS 8290. Increased load if any, may be accommodated by providing additional
hangers.
10.

The contractor shall ensure that the grid system is designed and installed to
carry all incidental loads and no other unauthorized load shall be transferred to
this system. The luminaries, air grills / diffusers, signages etc. shall be as far as
possible independently supported to avoid any over loading of the ceiling
system which may result in excessive deflection or twisting of grids. Any
strengthening of grid system by providing additional hangers, fasteners,
runners, cross tees etc. or providing additional bracing may be carried out as
required for any specific locations or for specific purpose for which nothing
extra shall be payable. Perimeter trims / edge profiles of required size and
shape, powder/coil coated to required colour and shade, shall be installed at the
suspension grid perimeter to completely enclose the ceiling and shall be
properly secured to the walls at not more than 450 mm centre to centre using
stainless steel screws and PVC sleeves. It shall be neatly jointed at all external
and internal angles and over lap sections in a workman like manner with
mitred joints.

11.

The main runners and the cross tees shall be 15mm x 8mm x 42 mm roll
formed from G.I sheets (0.35 mm thick for main runners and 0.33 mm thick for
cross tees), powder/coil coated with 6 mm wide reveal profile. The main
runners and the cross tees shall not be fixed to the edge profile/ wall moulding
and should only rest on the edge profile/ wall moulding. The edge moulding
shall be 19 x 7 x 14mm roll-formed from 0.35 mm thick G.I sheet powder/coil
coated on the exposed face to the matching colour and the shade.

12.

The ceiling should be set out such that the perimeter boards or tiles are in
excess of half a module so that the edge panels on both the sides are of equal
sizes as far as possible. The tiles shall be cut to required size and shape with
rebates as specified using hand tools or mechanically operated tools in a

CW- 223

workman like manner but with all precautions as per the manufacturers
specifications regarding generation of dust and ventilation.
13.

The entire installation shall have minimum half an hour fire rating and integrity
as specified as per BS 476.

14.

The contractor shall ensure that the material is procured and delivered at
installation site without any damage. Adequate care shall be taken before
installation as well as afterwards till handing over the building for occupation.
It shall be protected from rains, excessive humidity, chemical fumes,
vibrations, dust etc. The contractor shall ensure careful handling and storage
and prevent any rough handling, rolling of cartons or dropping cartons to
prevent any edge damage or breakage. Any tile with edge damaged or crack
etc. shall not be allowed to be used in the work and shall be replaced by the
contractor at his own cost. Similarly, adequate care shall be taken by the
contractor while placing or removing and handling the tiles so as not to cause
any damage. Also, the contractor shall direct his interior contractors to take
adequate precautions to prevent the tiles from any dirt, fingerprints, any other
marks / splashes etc. The ceiling shall not be wet cleaned. Abrasive cleaners
shall not be used to clean the marks.

15.

The item of false ceiling includes cost of all inputs of labour, materials,
wastage if any, T&P, scaffolding, staging or any other temporary enabling
structure / services etc. and all other incidental charges including making
necessary cut outs for A.C diffusers, Light fittings, grills, Fire detection, alarm,
sprinklers devices and fittings etc. No deduction in the area shall be made for
openings nor any thing extra shall be payable for maki ng the openings. Also
nothing extra shall be payable on account of any wastage in materials. Also
nothing extra shall be payable on account of any strengthening of the
supporting suspension system for the false ceiling, around the openings in the
false ceiling by using additional hangers, fasteners, runners, cross tees, etc.

CW- 224

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR

WATERPROOFING TREATMENT
1.

WATER PROOFING TREATMENT

1.1

GENERAL

1.1.1 All the water proofing treatment shall be got executed through one of the
approved specialised agencies as per the list of approved agencies attached
with the tender.
1.1.2 The contractor shall furnish the following particulars immediately after the
issue of letter of acceptance by the Department.
a)
b)
c)
d)

The name of the specialized firm.

The trade names of the product, which would be used.
List of works where the treatment has been used.
Quantity of chlorides and sulphides used in the product.

1.1.3 The water proofing treatment for the U.G sump, terrace tank etc. shall be tested
by filling the tanks completely with potable water and observing for leakage
for minimum 72 hours. All the arrangements for testing including supplying
water, closing all the outlets temporarily , and restoring after the test etc. shall
be made by the contractor at his own cost. Any leakage noticed shall be
rectified by the contractor at his own cost. Nothing extra shall be payable on
this account.
1.1.4 The water proofing treatment over the terrace slab, in the sunk / depressed
slabs shall be tested by ponding water as specified for curing as well as
observing for leakage for minimum 2 weeks. All the arrangements for testing
including supplying water, making temporary bunds using mortar, removing
bunds after testing etc. shall be made by the contractor at his own cost. Any
leakage noticed shall be rectified by the contractor at his own cost. Nothing
extra shall be payable on this account.
2.

INTEGRAL CEMENT BASED WATER PROOFING TREATMENT

2.1

Treatment for roof surface:

2.1.1 The brickbats shall be from well-burnt bricks. The proprietary waterproofing
compound shall bear I.S.I. mark and shall conform to I.S. 2645. Before
execution of work, water proofing compound shall be procured and brought to
site from which random sample would be got tested for its conformance to I.S.

CW- 225

Code in an approved laboratory. The proprietary waterproofing compound

shall be added at the rate recommended by the specialist firms.
2.1.2 The finished surface after water proofing treatment shall have minimum slope
of 1 in 80. At no point, the thickness of water proofing treatment shall be less
than 65mm.
2.1.3 While treatment of roof surface is done, it shall be ensured that the outlet drain
pipes have been fixed and mouths at the entrance have been eased and rounded
off properly for easy flow of water.
2.1.4 The surface where the waterproofing is to be done shall be prepared by
thoroughly cleaning with wire brushes. All loose scales, laitance shall be
removed and dusted off and washed clean with water. The surface shall then
be treated with neat cement slurry @ 2.75 kg per sqm, admixed with
proprietary waterproofing compound, in proportion as recommended by the
manufacturer, to penetrate into crevices and fill up all the pores in the surface.
This cement slurry shall be applied at the junction of parapet and terrace slab
including the vertical face of the parapet upto 300 mm.
2.1.5 After the slurry coat is applied, a 20 mm thick layer of cement mortar not
leaner than 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary water
proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 shall be laid. Then a layer of well
burnt brick bats shall be laid in cement mortar of mix as specified by the
specialist firm but not leaner than 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with
proprietary water proofing compound. This layer shall be laid to required
gradient and joints filled to half the depth. The brick bat layer shall be rounded
at the junction with the parapet and tapered towards top for a height of 300mm.
Curing of this layer shall be done for 2 days.
2.1.6 After curing, the surface shall be applied with a coat of cement slurry admixed
with proprietary water proofing compound.
2.1.7 Joints of brick bat layer shall then be filled fully with cement mortar of mix as
specified by the specialist firm but not leaner than 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse
sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound and finally top
finished with average 20 mm thick layer of joint less cement mortar of same
mix and finished smooth with cement slurry admixed with proprietary water
proofing compound. The finished surface shall have marking of 300 x 300mm
false squares to give the appearance of tiles. Where the water proofing
treatment is to be finished with china mosaic tile flooring , the top surface of
the water proofing treatment shall be finished rough and false squares shall not
be made.

CW- 226

2.1.8 Curing and final test of water proofing treatment shall be done for a minimum
period of two weeks by ponding water. The water for this purpose shall be
arranged by the Contractor at his own cost. Nothing extra shall be payable on
this account.
3.

SUNKEN FLOOR SLAB , ITS TREATMENT ETC.

3.1

Brickbat aggregate shall be from well-burnt bricks. The proprietary

waterproofing compound and the quantity to be used shall be as per Para 2.1.1.

3.2

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brushes. All loose scales,
laitance shall be removed and dusted off. The surface bottom as well sides
shall be applied with a coat of cement slurry admixed with proprietary water
proofing compound to penetrate into crevices and fill up all the pores in the
surface.

3.3

After the slurry coat is laid, a 20 mm thick layer of cement mortar not leaner
than 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing
compound conforming to IS: 2645 shall be laid. Then a layer of well burnt
brick bats of about 40mm size shall be laid in cement mortar of mix as
specified by the specialist firm but not leaner than 1:5 (1cement: 5 coarse sand)
admixed with proprietary water proofing compound, the mortar being filled to
half the depth of the brick bat layer. The brick bat layer shall be rounded off at
junction with the beam / wall etc., and tapered towards top to a height of 150
mm along beam / walls etc. Curing of this layer shall be done for two days.

3.4

After curing, the surface shall be applied with a coat of neat cement slurry
admixed with proprietary water proofing compound.

3.5

Joints of brick bat shall be filled fully with cement mortar of mix as specified
by the specialist firm but not leaner than 1:4 (1cement: 4 coarse sand) admixed
with proprietary water proofing compound and top finished with average
20mm thick layer of same mortar. This layer of mortar shall be continued to
the sides of beam / wall of the sunk etc. The height upto that this treatment is
to be extended on the sides shall be as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The surface shall be finished smooth with cement slurry admixed with
proprietary water proofing compound. No chequers or false squares shall be
marked on the finished surface.

3.6

While the water proofing treatment is done, it shall be ensured that the outlet
pipes are properly fixed and the gaps between the wall and pipes are properly
filled with brick / stone aggregate and cement mortar admixed with proprietary
water proofing compound and grouted with cement slurry admixed with
proprietary water proofing compound.

3.7

Waterproof treatment shall be cured for a minimum period of two weeks.

CW- 227

4.

Water proofing treatment for the walls and raft

4.1

The water proofing items shall be got executed through one of the approved
agencies as per the list of approved agencies attached with the tender. The
integral cement based water proofing treatment shall be box type cement based
waterproofing as under and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
i)

Integral cement based treatment for water proofing on horizontal surface

at all levels and consisting of : (1) 1st layer of 20 mm thick approved
rough Shahabad / Tandoor stone slab over a 25 mm thick base of
cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) admixed with water
proofing compound conforming to IS:2645 in the recommended
proportion. Joints in the stone slab shall be sealed and grouted with
cement slurry admixed with water proofing compound. (2) 2nd layer of
25mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) admixed with
water proofing compound in recommended proportions. (3) Finishing
top with stone aggregate of 10 mmto12 mm nominal size spreading @ 8
cudm /sqm thoroughly embedded in the 2 nd layer.

ii)

Integral cement based treatment for approved water proofing on the

vertical surface by fixing rough Shahabad / Tandoor stone slab 20 mm
thick with cement slurry admixed with water proofing compound
conforming to IS:2645 in recommended proportions with a gap of 20
mm (minimum) between stone slabs and the receiving surfaces and
filling the gaps with neat cement slurry admixed with water proofing
compound and finishing the exterior of stone slab with cement mortar
1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) 20 mm thick with neat cement punning
admixed with water proofing compound in recommended proportion
complete at all levels.

4.2

The specialist agency for water proofing work shall provide necessary sleeves
made out of G.I pipe ( payment for which shall be made under relevant item) in
the water proofing treatment at base and the raft for release of uplift pressure
till the pressure is taken by the rock anchors and the dead weight of the
building. The necessary provisions shall be made for filling these sleeves with
cement concrete of same grade and then pressure grouting these holes with
polymer modified cement slurry using aluminium nipples etc. at a later date.
However, the agency shall ensure complete water tight ness of the raft and the
water proofing treatment below raft.

4.3

The specialised agency for water proofing shall also grout the junctions of the
rock anchors with the concrete of the basement raft. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account and shall not be measured separately for payment.

CW- 228

4.4

The specialist agency for water proofing work shall also grout the junctions of
the various service lines entering or coming out. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account and shall not be measured separately for payment.

4.5

The plain cement concrete layer provided at the base over the raft as well as
over the top of the slab shall be admixed with water proofing compound
confirming to IS 2645. The guarantee for the water proofing treatment shall
include dismantling and re-laying the plain cement concrete, if required for
rectifying any defect in the water proofing treatment. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account and shall not be measured separately for payment.

5.

GUARANTEE FOR WATER PROOFING TREATMENT

Ten years guarantee in prescribed proforma attached shall be given by the
contractor for all the water proofing treatment. If any defect is noticed during
the guarantee period, it should be rectified by the contractor within seven days
of issuing of notice by the Engineer-in-Charge and, if not attended to, the same
shall be got done through other agency at the risk and cost of the contractor
and recovery shall be effected. In any case, the contractor and the specialised
agency, during the guarantee period, shall inspect and examine the treatment
once in every year and make good any defect observed and confirm the same
in writing.

CW- 229

GUARANTEE TO BE EXECUTED BY CONTRACTOR FOR

REMOVAL OF DEFECTS AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK IN
RESPECT OF WATER PROOFING WORKS.
This agreement made this _____day of _________________two thousand and
_______
between____________________________,
_________________________________ (Name of the contractor, hereinafter call
Guarantor of the one part) and the ___________________ (hereinafter called the
________________ of the other part).
WHEREAS THIS agreement is supplementary to a contract (hereinafter called the
Contract) dated________________ and made between the GUARANTOR of the one
part and the GOVERNMENT of the other part where by the Contractor inter alia,
undertook to render the buildings and structures in the said contract recited
completely water and leak proof.
AND WHEREAS THE GUARANTOR agreed to give a guarantee to the effect that
the said structures will remain water / leak proof for ten years from the date of
completion of work
NOW THE GUARANTOR hereby guarantees that water proofing treatment given by
him will render the structures completely leak proof and the minimum life of such
water proofing treatment shall be ten years to be reckoned from the date of
completion of work.
Provided that the guarantor will not be responsible for leakage caused by earthquakes
or structural defects or misuse of roof or alterations and for such purpose
a)

Misuse of roof shall mean by operation, which will damage roofing treatment,
like chopping of firewood and things of the same nature, which might cause
damage to the roof.

b)

Alteration shall mean construction of an additional storey or a part of roof or

construction adjoining to existing roof, where by roofing treatment is removed
in parts.

c)

The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge with regard to cause of leakage shall

be final.

During this period of guarantee, the guarantor shall make good all defects and in case
of any defects being found, render the building water proof at his own cost, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall commence the work for such
rectification within seven days from the date of issue of the notice from the Engineerin-Charge calling upon him to rectify the defects, failing which the work shall be got

CW- 230

done by Department through some other contractor at the GUARANTORS cost and
risk. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the cost, payable by the Guarantor
shall be final and binding.
That is the Guarantor fails to execute the necessary rectification or commits breach
thereunder then the Guarantor will indemnify the Principal and his successors against
all loss, damage, cost expense or otherwise which may be incurred by him by reasons
of any default on the part of GUARANTOR in performance and observance of this
supplementary agreement. As to the amount of loss and / or damage and / or cost
incurred by the IOL, the decision of the Engi neer-in-Charge will be final and binding
on the parties.
IN WITNESS WHERE OF these presents has been executed by the Obligator
________________________________________________and
by
_____________________________and for and on behalf of the on the day mont h and
year first above written.
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED by (OBLIGOR) in the presence of:
1.
2.
SIGNED FOR AND ON BEHALF OF BY ____________________________ in the
presence of:
1.
2.

CW- 231

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD WORK,

PAVING WORK
1.0

Site Clearance
Land required for roadways, pavements, paths, car parks, gutters, storm drains,
side slopes, embankments and the like shall be cleared of all trees having a
girth of 300mm and less, brushwood, loose stones, vegetation, bushes, stumps
and all other similar materials. Tree roots and stumps shall be grubbed out and
removed to a depth of approximately 500mm below the finished surfaces.
Useful materials as designated by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be removed
and neatly stacked by the Contractor at his own cost and disposed of for use by
the Employer as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.0

Setting Out
Following clearance of the Site the alignment of the roads, pavings and other
works shall be set out true to lines, curves, slopes, grades and sections as
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing and maintaining all
Benchmarks, profiles, alignments, stakes and markers as long as they are
required for the work in the opinion of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Levels and sections of the work shall be taken and recorded jointly by the
Engineer-in-Charge and the Contractor before any excavation and/or filing
work is commenced.

3.0

Excavation and Construction

The Contractor shall refer to P.W.D. Specification for items in relation to
excavation and earthwork which shall apply equally to the work under this
Section.
Temporary profiles of the work sections, including gutters and drains, shall be
installed at suitable intervals as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Excavation shall be done neatly, smoothly and evenly to the correct lines,
curves, grades, sections and side slopes as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge may require
measurement ridges and dead-men to be left at specified intervals to check
measurements.

CW- 232

Sub-grades, if loose, shall be scarified, watered and properly compacted to the

satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost adequate temporary drainage for
the removal of seepage and other water from the excavations. Springs, sewers,
irrigation channels, service lines, cables and the like shall be suitably diverted
or interrupted and carefully made good by the Contractor at his o wn cost.
4.0

Preparation of Sub-grades
Sub-grades for all paved surfaces shall be prepared as follows:
150mm thick layers of consolidated, stabilised soil shall be rolled with an 8 to
10 tonne capacity rollers to the required grades, camber and sections. Soil for
this purpose shall be used either from excavated materials on Site or brought
from approved outside sources as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and
mixed with approved quality lime in the proportion of 5% (five percent) by
weight. Stabilised soils shall have CBR 4. The proportion of lime may vary
according to actual site conditions to achieve the required CBR and to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge at no additional cost.
On stabilised soils a layer of good quality muroom shall be spread and rolled
with an 8 to 10 tonne capacity roller to a compacted thickness of 230 mm and
with a Proctor Density of 95% or a dry density of 1.4gm/cm, whichever is the
higher, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
In certain cases subsoil conditions and/or to achieve levels a layer of boulders
of required thickness may have to be provided below the stabilised soil layer,
properly packed and rolled with an 8 to 10 tonne capacity roller as directed by
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

5.0

Soling
The Contractor shall provide samples and information regarding the sources
and quality of materials for soling for approval by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Materials brought on to the Site shall conform strictly to the approved samples
and be obtained only from the approved sources.
Rubble stones shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, clean, of course
texture, free from unsound material, cracks, decay and weathering. Water
absorption shall be as low as possible, but no more than 5% (five percent).
Rubble stones shall be flat bedded and the smallest size shall be equal to the
specified thickness of soling. Lengths and breadths shall not exceed twice the
thickness.

CW- 233

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any and all tonnage, royalties,
rent and other payments or compensation, if any, for getting stone, gravel or
other materials required for the work. No claims on account of any obstruction
caused in the collection of materials or difficulties or actions arising out of
quarrying on either Government or private land shall be entertained by the
Employer. Quarrying shall be done only from sound portions of approved
quarries, disintegrated and weathered material being unacceptable.
Rubble shall be stacked uniformly at the Site in regular piles of approximately
6m x 3m x lm unless otherwise specified by the Engineer-in-Charge. All leads
and lifts for transporting rubble to the area to be surfaced are deemed to be
included in the quoted rates.
Rubble shall be stacked on even ground clear of the areas to be surfaced and as
far as possible beyond the side widths and side drains. In the absence of even
ground rubble shall be stacked on a platform prepared by the Contractor at his
own cost. Widths of stacks may be rejected by the Engineer-in-Charge if there
is a shortage of space on the Site.
6.0

Rolling
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-Charge sub-grades for roads and
paved areas shall be rolled with power rollers weighing not less than 10 (ten)
tonnes. Rolling shall progress in parallel lines from the edges to the centre of
areas to be compacted, lapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by at
least half the width of the track. During and after rolling the Contractor shall
check the surfaces for grade and camber.
Mechanical hand rollers for restricted areas and steep slopes shall weigh not
less than half a tonne and the working methods and operatives shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

7.0

Traffic
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own cost as necessary or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge diversions and barricades. Traffic signals
or flagmen, if required for the safety and convenience of the public and to
maintain access, use or occupation of public and private roads and footpaths,
shall be provided day and night for the duration of the work.

8.0

One Layer Metal Packing

The Contractor shall provide samples and information regarding the sources
and quality of over size metal for approval by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Materials brought on to the Site shall conform strictly to the approved samples
and be obtained only from the approved sources.

CW- 234

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any and all tonnage, royalties,
rent and other payments or compensation, if any, for getting stone, gravel or
other materials required for the work. No claims on account of any obstruction
caused in the collection of materials or difficulties or actions arising out of
quarrying on either Government or private land shall be entertained by the
Employer. Quarrying shall be done only from sound portions of approved
quarries, disintegrated and weathered material being unacceptable.
60mm metal shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, clean, of course
texture, free from unsound material, cracks, decay and weathering. Water
absorption shall be as low as possible, but no more than 5% (five percent).
Over size metal shall be flat bedded and the smallest size shall be equal to the
specified thickness of the relevant layer. Lengths and breadths of metal should
generally not exceed twice the thickness.
The Contractor shall clear off areas to be surfaced in accordance with this
Specification and carry out all trimming or filling to lines, curves, grades and
sections. All filling shall be well watered and compacted to obtain maximum
consolidation. Cambers, grades and elevations of sub-grades shall conform to
the finished surfaces as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer-inCharge and camber boards shall be used to ensure the required sections.
60mm metal shall be roughly spread over prepared bases to an initial total
thickness of 115mm. Layers shall then be rolled and compacted by a 10 tonne
capacity power roller until the compacted layer does not exceed 80mm.
Rolling shall start from edges of areas to be surfaced and proceeded towards
the crown in longitudinal strips overlapping on successive strips by at least one
half the width of the rear wheel of the roller.
The operation shall continue until no visible settlement of the metal or
movement under the roller is observed. Gradients and cambers shall be
checked from time to time by means of level, stakes, strings and cambers.
Depressions or humps shall be corrected by completely removing and relaying
the metal layer and rolling the same satisfactorily until refusal.
After dry rolling is completed, grit, stone, dust and sand shall be spread.
Moderate sprinkling of water and rolling shall be continued and stone dust
shall again be spread, if required, until all the voids are completely filled and
the movement of metal under the wheel ceases. If there is excess powder, the
same shall be removed lightly by brooms.

CW- 235

Surfaces shall be checked for camber and unevenness or undulations shall be

rectified as required. Surfaces shall be then watered, extra powder added, if
required, brushed and rolled to obtain a mosaic surface. This surface shall be
maintained until an upper coating is laid.
The rate of spreading grit, sand and dust shall not be less then 3 cubic metres to
4.60 cubic metres per square metre. The first layer of grit, sand or stone dust
shall not be spread over a wet or watered metal layer.
Junctions of existing and new surfaces shall be diagonal on plan and shall be in
accordance with the corresponding course levels of the existing surfaces. Each
layer shall be laid and rolled true to grade and section and checked by bonding
rods and template boards. Gravel or hard muroom shall be spread evenly over
the rolled second layer and further rolled with a power roller weighing not less
than 10 tonnes as specified hereabove.
9.0

Two Layer Metal Packing

The Contractor shall provide samples and information regarding the sources
and quality of over size metal for approval by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Materials brought on to the Site shall conform strictly to the approved samples
and be obtained only from the approved sources.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any and all tonnage, royalties,
rent and other payments or compensation, if any, for getting stone, gravel or
other materials required for the work. No claims on account of any obstruction
caused in the collection of materials or difficulties or actions arising out of
quarrying on either Government or private land shall be entertained by the
Employer. Quarrying shall be done only from sound portions of approved
quarries, disintegrated and weathered material being unacceptable.
Over size metal between 75mm and 100mm shall be hard, tough, sound,
durable, dense, clean, of course texture, free from unsound material, cracks,
decay and weathering. Water absorption shall be as low as possible, but no
more than 5% (five percent).
Over size metal shall be flat bedded and the smallest size shall be equal to the
specified thickness of the relevant layer. Lengths and breadths of metal sho uld
generally not exceed twice the thickness.
The Contractor shall clear off areas to be surfaced in accordance with this
Specification and carry out all trimming or filling to lines, curves, grades and
sections. All filling shall be well watered and compacted to obtain maximum
consolidation. Cambers, grades and elevations of sub-grades shall conform to

CW- 236

the finished surfaces as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer-inCharge and camber boards shall be used to ensure the required sections.
150mm thick layers of metal packing shall be laid and rolled to a consolidated
thickness of 120mm. The final consolidated thickness of 240mm shall be
executed in two layers only.
Junctions of existing and new surfaces shall be diagonal on plan and shall be in
accordance with the corresponding course levels of the existing surfaces. Each
layer shall be laid and rolled true to grade and section and checked by bonding
rods and template boards. Gravel or hard muroom shall be spread evenly over
the rolled second layer and further rolled with a power roller weighing not less
than 10 tonnes as specified hereabove.
10.0

Pebble faced cement tiles

Pebble faced cement precast tiles of specified thickness of approved type shall
be provided on consolidated ground surface by maintaining 20/25mm grass
lawn joints. The tiles shall be placed in level by maintaining grass joints as
directed by Engineer-In-charge.

11.0

Kotah / Local stone Treads / Riser

The work shall be carried out as specified in the specifications for flooring for
Kotah stone flooring. The hand dressed treads / risers shall be fixed on
consolidated ground in the required size or as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
The joints between stone shall be provided as specified.

12.0

Precast R.C.C. coping

Precast R.C.C. coping of shape and size shown on the drawing in concrete
glade M-20 shall be fixed on the walls provided in open exhibition terraces.
The joints shall be filled up with 1:3 concrete mortar.

13.

PAVER BLOCKS / COBBLE STONE FLOORING

Raw Materials
Cement
The cement used in the manufacture of high quality precise concrete paving
blocks shall be conforming to IS 12269 (53 grade) ordinary Portland Cement
or IS 8112 (43 grade ordinary Portland cement). The minimum cement in
concrete used for making paver blocks should be 380 kg /Cu.M.

CW- 237

Aggregates
The fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or
uncrushed materials, which apart from the grading requirements comply with
IS 383-1970. The fine aggregates used shall contain minimum of 25% natural
silicon sand. Lime stone aggregates shall not be used. Aggregates shall contain
no more than 3% by weight of clay and shall be free from deleterious salts and
contaminants.
Water
The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter. It shall meet the
requirements stipulated in IS:456-2000.
Other materials
Any other materials / ingredients used in the concrete shall conform to latest IS
specifications.
PAVER BLOCKS CHARACTERISTICS
The concrete pavers should have perpendicularities after release from the
mould and the same should be retained until the laying.
The surface should be of anti-skid and anti glare type.
The paver should have uniform chamfers to facilitate easy drainage of surface
run off.
The pavers should have uniform interlocking space of 2 mm to 3 mm to ensure
compacted sand filling after vibration on the paver surface.
The concrete mix design should be followed for each batch of materials
separately and automatic batching plant is to be used to achieve uniformity in
strength and quality.
The pavers shall be manufactured in single layer only.
Skilled labour should be employed for laying blocks to ensure line and level
for laying, desired shape of the surface and adequate compaction of the sand in
the joints.
The pavers are to be skirted all round with kerbing using solid concrete blocks
of size shown in drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The
kerbing should be embedded for 100 mm depth. The concrete used for kerbing
shall be cured properly for 7 days minimum.

CW- 238

Laying of Paver Blocks

Priming
It will be responsibilities of the Contractors to ensure that the manhole /
pipeline cable trenches / circular drainage system etc. raised to driveway level
using the requisite materials as per instruction of Engineer-In-Charge. The
areas of potholes / deep depressions at the isolated locations also have to be
filled up before laying the paver blocks. No extra pavements will be made for
this purpose.
It will be the responsibility of the Contractors to ensure that undulations on the
paver blocks are eliminated after the traffic is allowed on it. Proper slope for
drainage of water needs to be ensured by the Contractor. All necessary
materials, tools, tackles are required to be arranged by the Contractor.
Bedding sand course
The bedding sand shall consist of a clean well graded sand passing through
4.75 mm sieve and suitable for concrete. The bedding should be from either a
single source or blended to achieved the following grading.
In sieve size

% passed

9.52 mm
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm

100
95 100
80 100
60 100

600 microns
300 microns
150 microns
75 microns

25 60
10 30
5 15
0 10

Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that single-sized, gap gr aded sands or

sands containing an excessive amount of fines or plastic fines are not used.
The sand particles should preferably be sharp not rounded as sharp sand
possess higher strength and resist the migration of sand from under the block to
less frequently areas even through sharp sands are relatively more difficult to
compact than rounded sands, the use of sharp sands is preferred for the more
heavily trafficked driveways. The sand use for bedding shall be free of any
deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence.

CW- 239

The sand shall be of uniform moisture content and within 4% - 8% when

spread and shall be protected against rain when stock piled prior to spreading.
Saturated sand shall not be used. The bedding sand shall be spread loose in a
uniform layer as per drawing. The compacted uniform thickness shall be of 45
mm and within + / - 5 mm. Thickness variation shall not be used to correct
irregularities in the base course surface.
The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose dry condition and
protected against precompaction both prior to and following screeding. Any
precompacted sand or screeded sand left overnight shall be loosened before
further laying of paving blocks take place.
Sand shall be slightly screeded in a loose condition to the predetermined depth
only slightly ahead of the laying of paving unit.
Any depressions in the screeded sand exceeding 5 mm shall be loosened, raked
and rescreeded before laying of paving blocks.
Laying of interlocki ng Paver Blocks
Paver blocks shall be laid in herringbone laying pattern throughout the
pavement. Once the laying pattern has been established, it shall continue
without interruption over the entire pavement surface. Cutting of blocks, the
use of infill concrete or discontinuities in laying pattern is not be permitted in
other than approved locations.
Paver blocks shall be placed on the uncompacted screeded sand bed to the
nominated laying pattern, care being taken to maintain the specified bond
through out the job. The first row shall be located next to an edge restraint.
Specially manufactured edge paving blocks are permitted or edge blocks may
be cut using a power saw, a mechanical or hydraulic guillotine, bolster or other
approved cutting machine.
Paver blocks shall be placed to achieve gaps nominally 2 to 3 mm wide
between adjacent paving joints. No joint shall be less 1.5 mm not more than 4
mm. Frequent use of string lines shall be used to check alignment. In this
regards the laying face shall be checked at least every two meters as the face
proceeds. Should the face become out of alignment, it must be corrected prior
to initial compaction and before further laying job is proceeded with.
In each row, all full blocked shall be laid first. Closure blocks shall be cut and
fitted subsequently. Such closer blocks shall consist of not less than 25% of a
full blocks.

CW- 240

To infill spaces between 25 mm and 50 mm wide concrete having screened

sand, coarse aggregate mix shall be used. Within such mix the nominal
aggregate size shall not exceed one third the smallest dimension of the infill
space. For smaller spaces dry packed mortar shall be used.
Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the
laying bond, the paver blocks shall not be hammered into positions. Where
adjustment of paver blocks necessary care shall be taken to avoid premature
compaction of the sand bedding.
Initial Compaction
After laying the paver blocks, they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation
of the sand bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than
Two (2) passes of a suitable plate compactor.
The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat plate
vibrator having plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve paving
blocks. Prior to compaction all debris shall be removed from the surface.
Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to
any traffic. Compaction shall not, however, be attempted within one metre of
the laying face. Compaction shall continue until lipping has been eliminated
between adjoining blocks. Joints shall then be filled and recompacted as
described.
All work further than one metre from the laying face shall be left fully
compacted at the completion of each days laying.
Any blocks that are structurally damaged prior to our during compaction shall
be immediately removed and replaced.
Sufficient plate compactors shall be maintained at the paving site for both
bedding compaction and joint filling.
Joint filling and final compaction
As soon as possible after compaction and in any case prior to the termination
of work on that day and prior to the acceptance of vehicular traffic, sand for
joint filling shall be spread over the pavement.
Joint sand shall pass a 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve and shall be free of soluble salts
or contaminants likely to cause efflorescence. The same shall comply with the
following grading limits.

CW- 241

In sieve size

% passed

2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 microns
300 microns
150 microns
75 microns

100
9 100
60 - 90
30 - 60
15 - 30
10 - 20

The Contractor shall supply a sample of the jointing sand to be used in the
contract prior to delivering any such materials to site and incorporation into the
work. Certificates of test results issued by a recognized testing laboratory
confirming that the samles conform to the requirements of this specifications
shall accompany the sample.
The jointing sand shall be broomed to fill the joints. Excess sand shall then be
removed from the pavement surface and the joining sand shall be compacted
with not less than one (1) Pass by the plate vibrator and joints refilled with
sand to full depth. This procedure shall be repeated until all joints are
completed filled with sand. No traffic shall be permitted to use the pavement
until all joints have been completely filled with sand and compacted.
Both the sand and paver block shall be dry when sand is spread and broomed
into the joints to prevent premature setting of sand.
The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent blocks shall not exceed 3
mm with not more than 1% in any 3 m x 3 mm area exceeding 2 mm.
Pavement which is deformed beyond above limits after final compaction shall
be taken out and reconstructed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Edge Restraint
Edge restrains need to be sufficiently robust to withstand override by the
anticipated traffic, to withstand thermal expansion and to prevent loss of the
laying course materials from beneath the surface course. The edge restraint
should present a vertical face down to the level of the underside of the laying
course.
The surface course should not be vibrated until the edge restraint, together with
any bedding or concrete haunching, has gained sufficient strength. It is
essential that edge restraints are adequately secured.

CW- 242

Sampling and Testing Procedures for Paver Blocks

Sample size
Internal Average of minimum 3 samples per 5000 blocks for paver block
manufacturers.
External Minimum 2 blocks per 10000 blocks. Average of minimum 8
blocks per site.
Sampling for Testing
Sampling for testing of paver blocks shall be done in accordance with
Appendix - A.
Compressive Strength
Testing for compressive strength shall be undertaken in accordance with
Appendix - B. The average compressive strength of the 80 mm thick paver
block tested shall be 50 N/Sq mm and average compressive strength of the 60
mm thick paver blocks tested shall be 45 N/Sq.mm.
Water Absorption
Testing for water absorption shall be in accordance with IS 2185:1979:Part I
(Specifications for concrete masonry blocks) Appendix C.

CW- 243

Appendix A
Sampling of Paver Blocks
Method of Sampling
Before laying paver blocks, each designated section comprising not more than 50000
blocks, shall be divided into ten approximately equal groups. Three blocks shall be
drawn from each group.
Marking and identification
All sample shall be dispatched to the approved test laboratory taking precaution to
avoid damage to the paving in transit. Protect the paving from damage and
contamination until they have been tested. The samples shall be stored in water at
200 C + 5 o C for 2 house prior to testing.

Appendix B
Procedure for Testing of Compressive Strength for Paver Blocks
Reference : BS 6717 Part I (1993) Specifications for Paver Blocks
B-1 Testing Machine : The testing machines shall be suitable capacity for the test
and capable of applying the load at the rate specified. It shall comply, as regards
repeatability and accuracy with the requirements of relevant IS specification.
B-2 Procedure The sample specimens shall be tested in wet condition after being
stored at least 24 hours, in water maintained at a temperature of 200C + 5oC before
the specimens are submerged in water, the necessary area shall be determined.
The plates of the testing machine shall be wiped clean and any loose grit or other
material removed from the contact faces of the specimen. Plywood nominally 4 mm
thick, shall be used as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen and
the machine plates, and these boards shall be large than the specimen by a marging of
at least 5 mm at all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen tested. The
specimen shall be placed in the machine with the wearing surface in a horizontal
plane and in such a way that the axes of the specimen are aligned with those of the
machines plates. The load shall be applied without shock and increased continuously
at the rate of approximately 15 N/sqmm per minute until no grater load can be
sustained. The maximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded.

CW- 244

B-3 Calculation of corrected Strength : The compressive strength of block

specimen shall be calculated by dividing the maximum load by full cross section area
and multiplying by an appropriate factors.
Thickness and Chamfer Correction Factors
For Compressive Strength
Work size thickness
in mm

Correction Factors
Plain Block
1.00
1.12
1.18

60
80
100

Chamfered Block
1.06
1.18
1.24

B-4 Compressive Strength Calculation. The average corrected compressive strength

for the designed block section shall be calculated.

Appendix C
Method for the Determination of Water Absorption
The test specimens shall be completely immersed in water at room temperature for 24
hours.
The specimens shall then be weighed, while suspended by a metal wire and
completely submerged in water.
They shall be removed from the water and allowed to drain for one minute.
Visible surfaces water being removed with a damp cloth and immediately weighed.
Subsequent to saturation, all specimens shall be dried in a ventilated over at 100 to
115oC for not less than 24 hours and until two successive weightings at intervals of 2
hours show an increment of loss not greater, than 0.2 percent of the last previously
determined mass of the specimen. Calculate the absorptions as follows:
A B
Absorption, kg/m3 =
x 10000
B C
A B
Absorption percent =

x 100
B

CW- 245

Where
A = wet mass of unit in kg
B = dry mass of unit in kg. And
C = suspended immersed mass of unit in kg.
Granite Cobble Stone Flooring
The specification for laying shall be exactly as per the specification of paver blocks.
The granite cobble stone of size 100 mm x 100 mm x 100 mm manufactured by
BASANT Batons or equivalent of red and grey colours, shall be laid in carved pattern
on sand bedding. The joints between stones shall be filled with 1:6 cement Mortar
and top portion of joint between stones for 10 mm deep shall be filled up with 1:4
white cement sand mortar. The flooring shall be cured for seven days.

CW- 246

List of Drawings
SR. NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23A
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49

DESCRIPTION
SITE PLAN
SETTINGOUT PLAN
76.50 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN
80.50 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN
84.50 LEVEL FLOOR PLA N
88.50 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN
94.50 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN
100.50 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN
ROOF PLAN
LANDSCAPE PLAN
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
ELEVATION A-A
ELEVATION B-B
ELEVATION C-C
ELEVATION D-D
FLOORING PATTERN AT 76.50 LVL
WINDOWS DETAIL FROM W1 TO W3
WINDOWS DETAIL FROM W4 TO W9
SCHEDULE OF DOORS
DOOR DETAILS
SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
LIFT MACHINE ROOM & DETAILS
STAIRCASE DETAIL (ST-1)
STAIRCASE DETAIL (ST-2 & ST-3)
STAIRCASE DETAIL (ST-4)
TOILET DETAILS GROUND FLOOR
TOILET DETAILS SECOND FLOOR
LIFT LOBBY DETAILS
88.50 LEVEL FLOORING PATTERN
94.50 LEVEL FLOORING PATTERN
U. G. TANK & PUMP ROOM DETAILS
O. H. TANK DETAILS
DETAILS OF EXHIBIT TERRACES
GEODESIC DETAIL SHEET 1
GEODESIC DETAIL SHEET 2
COMPOUND WALL DETAILS WEST SIDE
COMPOUND WALL DETAILS EAST SIDE
COMPOUND WALL DETAILS NORTH SIDE
SECURITY CABIN & GATE DETAILS
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS SHEET 1
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS SHEET 2
RAILING DETAIL FOR ATRIUM
WINDOW SCHEDULE
FLOORING PATTERN AT 80.50 LVL
FLOORING PATTERN AT 100.50 LVL.
LIFT CAR INTERIOR DETAILS
84.50 LVL FLOORING PATTERN

DRG. NO.

DATE

TD-01
TD-02
TD-03
TD-04
TD-05
TD-06
TD-07
TD-08
TD-09
TD-10
TD-11
TD-12
TD-13
TD-14
TD-15
TD-16
TD-17
TD-18
TD-19
TD-20
TD-21
TD-22
TD-23
TD-23A
TD-24
TD-25
TD-26
TD-27
TD-28
TD-29
TD-30
TD-31
TD-32
TD-33
TD-34
TD-35
TD-36
TD-37
TD-38
TD-39
TD-40
TD-41
TD-42
TD-43
TD-44
TD-45
TD-46
TD-47
TD-48
TD-49

Note: These drawings are tender purpose only. The construction drawings will be issued during
progress of works.

CW- 247

SR. NO.

DESCRIPTION

DRG. NO.

PILE LAYOUT

5967-01 R-0

PILE & PILE CAP DETAILS

5967-02-R0SHT. 1 of 2

PILE & PILE CAP SECTION DETAILS

5967-02-R0SHT. 2 of 2

LAYOUT AT 76.5 M. LVL. R.C.C. BEAM

SCHEDULE & DETAILS

5967-03-R0

LAYOUT AT 80.5 M. LVL.

5967-04-R0

R.C.C. BEAM & SLAB SCHEDULE AT 80.5 M.

LVL.

5967-05-R0

LAYOUT AT 84.5 M. LVL.

5967-06-R0

R.C.C BEAM & SLAB SCHEDULE AT 84.5 M.

LVL.

5967-07-R0

LAYOUT AT 88.5 M. LVL. & LAYOUT AT 91.5

M. LVL.

5967-08-R0

10

R.C.C. BEAM & SLAB SCHEDULE AT 88.5 M.

LVL. & 91.5 M LVL.

5967-09-R0

11

LAYOUT AT 94.5 M. LVL.

5967-10-R0

12

R.C.C BEAM & SLAB SCHEDULE AT 94.5 M.

LVL.

5967-11-R0

13

LAYOUT AT 100.5 M. LVL.

5967-12-R0

14

R.C.C BEAM & SLAB SCHEDULE AT 100.5 M.

LVL.

5967-13-R0

15.

DETAIL GENERAL DRAWING FOR

RETAINING WALL WITH WEEP HOLES

5967-14-R0

16.

DETAIL GENERAL DRAWING FOR

RETAINING WALL WITH WEEP HOLES

5967-15-R0

17.

COLUMN SCHEDULE

5967-16-R0

18.

COMPOUND WALL SECTION DETAILS

5967-17-R0

19.

MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS

5967-18-R0

20.

OVER HEAD WATER TANK LAYOUT &

DETAILS

5967-19-R0

REMARK

CW- 248

SR. NO.

DESCRIPTION

DRG. NO.

21.

U. G. TANK LAYOUT & DETAILS

5967-20-R0

22.

LIFT MACHINE ROOM LAYOUT & SECTION

DETAILS

5967-21-R0

23.

CONNECTING BRIDGE DETAILS AT VARIOUS

FLOOR LEVELS

5967-22-R0

24.

STAIRCASE SECTION DETAILS

5967-23-R0

25.

SECURITY CABIN & DETAILS

5967-24-R0

REMARK

Note: These drawings are tender purpose only. The construction drawings will be issued
during progress of works.

CW- 249